Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual Service Documentation Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual 705P01205 Initial Issue 09/2007 Xerox Corporation XOG Worldwide Product Training & Information 26600 Parkway - Bldg. 60 P.O. Box 1000, M/S 7060-776 Wilsonville, OR 97070-1000 NOTICE: All service documentation is supplied to Xerox external customers for informational purposes only. Xerox service documentation is intended for use by certified, product trained service personnel only. Xerox does not warrant or represent that such documentation is complete, nor does Xerox represent or warrant that it will notify or provide to such customer any future changes to this documentation. Customer performed service of equipment, or modules, components or parts of such equipment may affect the warranty offered by Xerox with respect to such equipment. You should consult the applicable warranty for its terms regarding customer or third party provided service. If the customer services such equipment, modules, components or parts thereof, the customer releases Xerox from any and all liability for the customer actions, and the customer agrees to indemnify, defend and hold Xerox harmless from any third party claims which arise directly or indirectly from such service. Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation. Copyright protection claimed includes all forms of matters of copyrightable materials and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted, including without limitation, material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen such as styles, templates, icons, screen displays, looks, etc. Xerox technical training materials and service manuals are intended for use by authorized Xerox service technicians and service partners only and are not for resale. These materials may not be distributed, copied or otherwise reproduced without prior written consent from Xerox Corporation. XEROX, The Document Company, the digital X, CentreWare, infoSMART, Made For Each Other, PagePack, Phaser, PhaserSMART, and Walk-Up are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Acrobat, Adobe Reader, Adobe Type Manager, ATM, Illustrator PageMaker, Photoshop, PostScript, Adobe Brilliant Screens, Adobe Garamond, Adobe Jenson, Birch, Carta, IntelliSelect, Mythos, Quake, and Tekton are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Apple, AppleTalk, Bonjour, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, LocalTalk, Macintosh, Mac OS, TrueType, Apple Chancery, Chicago, Geneva, Monaco, New York , and QuickDraw are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. HP-GL, HP-UX, and PCL are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. IBM and AIX are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Windows, Vista, Windows Server, and Wingdings are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Novell, NetWare, NDPS, NDS, Novell Directory Services, IPX, and Novell Distributed Print Services are trademarks of Novell, Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. SunSM, Sun Microsystems, and Solaris are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. SWOP is a trademark of SWOP, Inc. UNIX is a trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/ Open Company Limited. As an ENERGY STAR partner, Xerox Corporation has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The ENERGY STAR name and logo are registered U.S. marks. PANTONE Colors generated may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Publications for accurate color. PANTONE and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. Pantone, Inc., 2000.
Introduction
09/2007 ii
Introduction
About This Manual .......................................................................................................... Organization.................................................................................................................... Power Safety................................................................................................................... Service Safety Summary................................................................................................. Moving the System.......................................................................................................... Symbology and Nomenclature ........................................................................................ Electrostatic Discharge Precautions ............................................................................... Regulatory Specifications................................................................................................ Phaser 8860/8860MFP Overview ................................................................................... System Configurations .................................................................................................... Parts of the 8860MFP ..................................................................................................... 8860MFP Control Panel Layout ...................................................................................... Parts of the 8860............................................................................................................. 8860 Control Panel Layout.............................................................................................. 8860 Menu Map .............................................................................................................. System Specifications ..................................................................................................... iii iii iv iv vi vii ix ix x xi xii xiv xvi xviii xix xx
09/2007 iii
Introduction
Introduction
09/2007 iv
Organization
The titles of the sections and a description of the information contained in each section are contained in the following paragraphs:
Section 4 Repairs/Adjustments
This section contains all the removal, replacement, and adjustments procedures. Repairs Repairs include procedures for removal and replacement of spare parts listed in the Parts List. Use the repair procedures for the correct order of removal and replacement, for warnings, cautions, and notes. Adjustments Adjustments include procedures for adjusting the parts that must be within specification for the correct operation of the system. Use the adjustment procedures for the correct sequence of operation for specifications, warnings, cautions and notes.
09/2007 v
Power Safety
Power Source
For 115 VAC printers, do not apply more than 135 volts RMS between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground. For 230 VAC printers, do not apply more than 254 volts RMS between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground. Use only the specified power cord and connector. This manual assumes that the reader is a qualified service technician. Plug the three-wire power cord (with grounding prong) into a grounded AC outlet only. If necessary, contact a licensed electrician to install a properly grounded outlet. If the product loses its ground connection, contact with conductive parts may cause an electrical shock. A protective ground connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation.
WARNING
Avoid the potential of electrical shock by ensuring that the system is properly grounded. Electrical products may be hazardous if misused. The power cord is attached to the system as a plug-in device on the side of the system. If it is necessary to disconnect all electrical power from the system, disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.
WARNING
Do not remove the covers or guards that are fastened with screws unless you are installing optional equipment and are specifically instructed to do so. Power should be OFF when performing these installations. Disconnect the power cord when removing covers and guards for installing optional equipment. Except for user-installed options, there are no parts that you can maintain or service behind these covers
WARNING
The following are hazards to your safety: 1. 2. 3. Damaged or frayed Power Cord Liquid spilled into the system Exposure to water or excessive moisture Turn off the Power Switch Disconnect the Power Cord from the electrical outlet. Call an authorized service representative. Do not attempt any maintenance procedure that is not specifically described in the documentation supplied with your system. Do not use aerosol cleaners. The use of supplies that are not approved may cause poor performance and could create a hazardous condition.
Maintenance Safety
Introduction
09/2007 vi
Do not burn any consumables or routine maintenance items. For information on Xerox supplies recycling programs, go to www.xerox.com/gwa.
Operational Safety The system and supplies were designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements. These include safety agency examination, approval, and compliance with established environmental standards. Pay attention to these safety guidelines to ensure the continued, safe operation of the system. Use the supplies specifically designed for your system. The use of unsuitable materials may cause poor performance and a possible safety hazard. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on, or supplied with, the system, options and supplies. CAUTION Use of other than Genuine Xerox Solid Ink may affect print and copy quality and system reliability. It is the only ink designed and manufactured under strict quality controls by Xerox for specific use with this system. The Xerox Warranty, Service Agreements, and Total Satisfaction Guarantee do not cover damage, malfunction, or degradation of performance caused by use of non-Xerox supplies or consumables, or the use of Xerox supplies not specified for this system. NOTE: The Total Satisfaction Guarantee is available in the United States and Canada. Coverage may vary outside these areas; please contact your local representative for details.
WARNING
Do not touch any electrical component unless you are instructed to do so by a service procedure.
General Guidelines
For qualified service personnel only: Refer also to the preceding Power Safety Precautions. Avoid servicing alone: Do not perform internal service or adjustment of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid or resuscitation is present. Use care when servicing with power: Dangerous voltages may exist at several points in this product. To avoid personal injury, do not touch exposed connections and components while power is on. Disconnect power before removing the power supply shield or replacing components. Do not wear jewelry: Remove jewelry prior to servicing. Rings, necklaces and other metallic objects could come into contact with dangerous voltages and currents.
Warning Labels
Read and obey all posted warning labels. Throughout the printer, warning labels are displayed on potentially dangerous components. As you service the printer, check to make certain that all warning labels remain in place.
Safety Interlocks
Make sure all covers are in place and all interlock switches are functioning correctly after you have completed a printer service call. If you bypass an interlock switch during a service call, use extreme caution when working on or around the printer.
09/2007 vii
Introduction
Figure 2 System Lifting Technique Always move the system separately from optional Trays 3 and 4.
When shipping the system, repack the system using the original packing material and boxes or a Xerox repackaging kit. Instructions for repacking the system are included in the kit. If you do not have all the original packaging, or are unable to repackage the system, contact your local Xerox service representative CAUTION Failure to repackage the system properly for shipment can result in damage to the system. Damage to the system caused by improper packaging is not covered by the Xerox warranty, service agreement, or Total Satisfaction Guarantee.
Figure 1 Locking the Scanhead Always remove the document feeder and Scanner before shipping the system.
Introduction
09/2007 viii
Table 2 Additional Warnings REP 5.0.2 Scanner Power Supply REP 5.0.19 Drum Heater Relay Board
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE! DANGER: HAUTE TENSION! Exercise care when making the voltage check in the following steps. DANGER: Soyez extrmement vigilant lorsque vous effectuez les tests de tension au cours des tapes qui suivent.
WARNING
A Warning is used whenever an operating or maintenance procedure, a practice, condition, or statement, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury. CAUTION A Caution is used whenever an operating or maintenance procedure, a practice, condition, or statement, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to the equipment. NOTE: A Note is used whenever it is necessary to highlight an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, condition, or statement.
WARNING
Personal injury may result from grasping hot areas of Printhead. If a hot Printhead must be removed, grasp the Printhead by black plastic frame component. DANGER: Des blessures peuvent rsulter si les zones chaudes du module de four sont touches. Si un module de four chaud doit tre enlev, le saisir par l'lment en plastique noir du bti.
Machine Safety Icons The following precautionary symbols may appear on the system. This symbol indicates DANGER high voltage.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, do not perform repair or adjustment activities with the power switch on or electrical power applied to the machine. DANGER: Afin d'viter des blessures ou des chocs lectriques, ne pas effectuer des activits de maintenance ou de rglage avec l'quipement sur Marche ou avec le cordon d'alimentation branch. The following sections have additional specific warning information. Table 1 Introduction and Section 4 Introduction - Symbology and Nomenclature Section 4 - Repairs and Adjustments Figure 1 High Voltage Symbol Protective ground (earth) symbol.
WARNING
A Warning is used whenever an operating or maintenance procedure, a practice, conditioning, or statement, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury. DANGER: Une note DANGER est utilise chaque fois quune procdure de maintenance ou quune manipulation prsente un risque de blessure si elle na pas t strictement observe. The following sections have additional specific warning information. Table 2 Additional Warnings REP 2.0.2 Printhead Assembly REP 2.0.8 Left and Right Printhead Restraints Figure 3 Hot Surface Symbol Figure 2 Protective Ground (earth) Symbol These symbols indicate hot surface on or in the printer. Use caution to avoid personal injury.
09/2007 ix
Introduction
The surface is hot while the printer is running. After turning off the power, wait 30 minutes.
Figure 4 Wait 30 Minutes Symbol Avoid pinching fingers in the printer. Use caution to avoid personal injury.
INPUT POWER 220 V INPUT POWER 100 V INPUT POWER 120 V +5 VDC +24 VDC
Introduction
09/2007 x
Regulatory Specifications
Xerox has tested this product to electromagnetic emission and immunity standards. These standards are designed to mitigate interference caused or received by this product in a typical office environment.
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Xerox could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. To ensure compliance with Part 15 of the FCC rules, use shielded interface cables.
Canada (Regulations)
This Class A digital apparatus (8860/8860MFP) complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique (8860/8860MFP) de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
09/2007 xi
Introduction
European Union
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive The Phaser 8860MFP has been self-certified by Xerox for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the following countries: Table 1 Supported Countries Austria Belgium Denmark France Italy Germany Greece Iceland Ireland Spain Luxembourg Netherlands Norway Portugal Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom Finland
In the event of a problem you should contact your authorized local dealer in the first instance. This product has been tested to and is compliant with TBR21, a specification for terminal equipment for use on analogue-switched telephone networks in the European Economic Area. This product provides an user-adjustable setting of the country code. Refer to the customer documentation for this procedure. Country codes should be set prior to connecting this product to the network. NOTE: Although the 8860MFP can use either loop disconnect (pulse) or DTMF (tone) signaling, it is recommended that it is set to use DTMF signaling. DTMF signaling provides reliable and faster call setup. Modification of this product, connection to external control software or to external control apparatus not authorized by Xerox, will invalidate its certification. This product, if used properly in accordance with the users instructions, is neither dangerous for the consumer nor for the environment. A signed copy of the Declaration of Conformity for this product can be obtained from Xerox.
Figure 1 Phaser 8860MFP Multifunction Product with Optional Trays Introduction Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual
09/2007 xii
System Configurations
Standard Features
The Phaser 8860/8860MFP offers these standard features: Maximum print speed (pages per minute) based on letter-size plain paper: NOTE: Print speeds for media fed from Tray 1 may be up to 50% slower. Table 1 Phaser 8860/8860MFP Print Speeds Phaser 8860 Color Printer PostScript Print Quality Modes: Fast Color: 30 ppm Standard: 24 ppm Enhanced: 16 ppm High Resolution/Photo: 10 ppm Phaser 8860MFP Multifunction Product PostScript Print Quality Modes: Fast Color: 30 ppm Standard: 24 ppm Enhanced: 16 ppm High Resolution/Photo: 10 ppm
Additional Trays Trays 1 and 2 are standard on all configurations. The following additional tray combinations are supported: One 525-Sheet Feeder (Tray 3) Two 525-Sheet Feeders (Trays 3 and 4)
Memory All configurations have two memory slots supporting 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1 GB SODIMM modules (up to maximum of 1 GB DDR2). System Cart The System Cart supports a fully-optioned system and provides space for media storage.
Metered Printing
Metered printing (PagePack), involves the combination of control software and specialized Ink Sticks to meter system activity for billing purposes. The Configuration page lists Metered Ink as Enabled when metering is enabled. Metered Operation
PCL Print Quality Modes: 300 x 600 dpi: 16 ppm 600 x 600 dpi: 8 ppm
PCL Print Quality Modes: 300 x 600 dpi: 16 ppm 600 x 600 dpi: 8 ppm
First-page-out: 6 seconds for color prints, 15 seconds for color copies Copy, Print, Scan, Fax capabilities (options vary according to configuration and memory) Connections: USB, Ethernet 10/100 Base-Tx, Foreign Device Interface (available) RJ-11 Fax Modem (8860MFP only)
When a metered printer is initialized at first power-up, the customer sets the printer to Metered operation using a unique, factory-supplied, 4-digit PIN. Once set to Metered operation, the control software performs the following: 1. 2. 3. The Mode and PIN-entered values in Engine Control Board NVRAM are set. The Control Panel momentarily displays Metered Ink is now enabled, then returns to Ready (if no other errors). The First Time Tips pages and the Configuration page are printed.
Available Configurations
Table 2 lists the standard configurations. Table 2 Phaser 8860/8860MFP Configurations Features Memory Hard Drive Automatic 2-sided Printing (DADF) 525-Sheet Feeder System Cart Copy Scan to PC Scan to E-mail Scan to Hard Drive Fax 8860 256 MB No* No No* No* No No No No No 8860MFP 512 MB Yes Yes No* No* Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
If an incorrect PIN is entered, Incorrect numeric password displays with a prompt Retry or Do not retry. Retry returns to the enter prompt, Do not retry returns to the Replace Ink Stick error message. The error persists until the correct PIN is entered. NOTE: The Hidden Service menu provides an Enable Metered Ink option to restore the Metered mode parameters to NVRAM should they become lost or corrupt. Metered Ink To support metered printing, metered Ink Sticks are available in all four colors. The shape of the metered Ink Stick differs from the non-metered versions.
Product Options
Phaser 8860/8860MFP options include: Additional Trays
09/2007 xiii
Introduction
System Configurations
Open View
Figure 2 Open View 1. Figure 1 8570MFP Front View 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Tray 4 (optional) Tray 3 (optional) Tray 2 Tray 1 (MPT) Output Tray Exit Cover Control Panel Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) Front Cover DADF 2. 3. 4. 5. Output Tray Short Paper Stop Exit Cover Ink Loader Cover Scan Head Lock
10. Interface Cover 11. Drum Maintenance Kit and Waste Tray access 12. Front Door Latch
Introduction
09/2007 xiv
Figure 3 Side View with Interface Connections 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Drum Maintenance Kit Waste Tray AC Power Cord Connection Power Switch Scanner Cable Connection USB Connection Ethernet Connection Configuration Card RJ-11 Fax Modem Connection 1. 2. 3. 4. RAM Connectors NVRAM Device Hard Drive Printer Stabilizer (8860MFP only) Figure 4 Back View
09/2007 xv
Introduction
Figure 1 8860MFP Control Panel Table 1 Control Panel Functional Areas Left Side Center Right Side
Copy, Scan, and Fax functions Display, Mode, Navigation but- Numeric keypad, Stop, Start, and indicator LEDs tons, and status LEDs Clear, and Clear All buttons
Figure 5 Routine Maintenance Items and Consumables Table 1 Routine Maintenance Life Expectancy Routine Maintenance Items Extended-Capacity Maintenance Kit Standard-Capacity Maintenance Kit Waste Tray DADF Pick Rollers and Separator Pad 30,000 cycles (0-20% coverage) 20,000 cycles (20-100%) coverage. 10,000 cycles Empty every 7 Purges 50,000 scans 1. 2. Figure 2 Left Side Control Panel Color Mode selects black and white or color for copy or scan jobs. Document Type selects the type of document (photo, graphic, mixed text and graphics, or text only), for copy or scan jobs. Output Quality selects the output quality mode for copies: fast color, standard, enhanced, or high-resolution/photo. 2-Sided selects either one or 2-sided for the original and one- or 2-sided for the output. Lighten/Darken selects a setting for copy, scan, or fax jobs. Reduce/Enlarge selects scale percentage for output: 25, 50, 100, 150, 200, 400. Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual
Consumables
CAUTION Phaser 8860/8860MFP products use a new formulation of Ink having unique properties. The Ink Loader on these products is keyed to accept this Ink shape only. The use of Ink not specifically designed for this product can result in system failures. 3. 4. 5. 6. Introduction 09/2007 xvi
7. 8. 9.
The Down Arrow reduces the reduce/enlarge percentage in one percent increments. The Up Arrow increases the reduce/enlarge percentage in one percent increments. Reduce/Enlarge Percentage display indicates the current educe/enlarge setting.
Figure 4 Right Side Control Panel 1. 2. 3. Figure 3 Center Control Panel 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Copy displays the Copy menu. Scan displays the Scan menu. Print displays the Print menu. Fax displays the Fax menu. System displays the System Setup menu. Help(?) provides additional information about the menu or message displayed. OK accepts the highlighted menu selection. Down Arrow scrolls downward through menu selections. Up Arrow scrolls upward through menu selections. Mode Skip execution of POST diagnostics Print Service Diagnostics Map Reset PostScript NVRAM Password Bypass Table 2 Short Cuts Press this selection at Power On OK INFO BACK+ON UP+DOWN 5. 6. 7. 8. Numeric keypad for entering numbers for sending a fax, selecting a number of copies, or entering a numeric password. Start initiates the selected function (copy, scan. or fax). Stop pauses a print, copy, scan, or fax job. To cancel the job, follow the instructions indicated on the display. Clear All resets all job settings and returns to the top of the default function. Pause enters a pause in a fax number. Delayed Send stores a time for fax transmission. Send List to view or add fax numbers to a list. Speed Dial accesses directories of groups or individual fax numbers.
10. Back returns the previous menu to the display. 11. Control Panel display. 12. Status LED uses color to indicate these states of the current function: Green indicates the system is ready to print, copy, scan, or fax. Yellow indicates a warning condition. The system continues the operation. Red indicates a startup or operational error condition. Blinking indicates a warm-up or busy condition.
NOTE: To enter Service Diagnostics, press the BACK and ? buttons before the Xerox logo stops scrolling and until Beginning Service Mode appears.
09/2007 xvii
Introduction
Figure 2 Side View with Interface Connections 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Drum Maintenance Kit Waste Tray AC Power Cord Connection Power Switch USB Connection Configuration Card Ethernet Connection
10. Output Tray Extension 11. Interface Cover 12. Side Door
Introduction
09/2007 xviii
Figure 4 Routine Maintenance Items and Consumables Table 1 Routine Maintenance Life Expectancy Routine Maintenance Items Extended-Capacity Maintenance Kit Standard-Capacity Maintenance Kit Waste Tray DADF Pick Rollers and Separator Pad 30,000 cycles (0-20% coverage) 20,000 cycles (20-100%) coverage. 10,000 cycles Empty every 7 Purges 50,000 scans
Consumables
CAUTION Phaser 8860/8860MFP products use a new formulation of Ink having unique properties. The Ink Loader on these products is keyed to accept this Ink shape only. The use of Ink not specifically designed for this product can result in system failures.
Figure 3 Back View 1. 2. 3. 4. Hard Drive (optional) Memory Configuration Card NVRAM Device
09/2007 xix
Introduction
Table 1 Short Cuts Press These Buttons Printer goes to the ready state without waiting for temperatures to reach operating values. On power-up, when the Xerox splash screen displays, press and release the Up Arrow button, then press the Down Arrow button. If the printer detects ink on the drum, the display indicates a warming-up status.
Figure 1 8860 Control Panel 1. Status LED. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Green is Ready to Print Yellow is Warning condition, printer continues to print Red is Startup sequence or error condition Blinking is printer is busy or warming up
Display Cancel button cancels the current print job Back button returns to the previous menu item Up Arrow button scrolls upward through the menus Down Arrow button scrolls downward through the menus OK button accepts the selected setting Help (?) button provides additional information, such as status, error messages, and maintenance information
Introduction
09/2007 xx
Figure 2 8860 Menu Map (2/2) Figure 1 8860 Menu Map (1/2)
09/2007 xxi
Introduction
System Specifications
Functional Specifications
Table 1 Functional Specifications Characteristic Printing Process Image System Color Medium Resolution Specifications Four-color (CMYK) solid ink Printhead architecture. Transfix transfer from oil coated Drum Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black Ink Sticks Fast Color: 225 x 400 dpi Standard: 300 x 450 dpi Enhanced: 525 x 450 dpi Photo: 525 x 2400 dpi Color: 8 seconds Monochrome: 8 seconds Color and Monochrome: 12 minutes from Power On
Memory Specifications
Table 2 Memory Specifications Characteristic Minimum RAM Maximum RAM Supported RAM Specifications 256 MB 8860 / 512 MB 8860MFP 1 GB Supports up to 1 GB of DDR2 memory using 2 slots
The DADF accommodates sizes from 114 x 140 mm (4.5 x 5.5 in.) to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14.0 in.). The weight range includes 60-120 g/m2 (16-32 lb. Bond) (22-45 lb. Cover).
Introduction
System Specifications
09/2007 xxii
Color Management
Copies per Minute Memory Image Buffer Bit Depth Optical Resolution Output Resolution from Scanner Calibration Time Power Saver Mode
09/2007 xxiii
System Specifications
Table 8 Scanner/DADF Functional Specifications Characteristic Noise Specification Standby: < or equal to 45 dB Scanning: < or equal to 50 dB Characteristic Maximum Print Area Guaranteed Image Area Resolution/Gradation
Table 12 Image Specifications Specification 206 mm x 346 mm 206 mm x 346 mm Fast Color: 300 x 300 dpi Standard: 300 x 450 dpi Enhanced: 563 x 400 dpi Photo/Hi Res: 525 x 2400 dpi
Electrical Specifications
Table 9 Electrical Specifications Characteristic Primary Line Voltages Primary Line Voltage Frequency Range Power Consumption at Rated Voltage Input Energy Star Scanner Power Supply Specification 90-135 VAC 180-254 VAC 47 - 63 Hz Characteristic 300 W (230 W 8860) average during printing 1500 W (1250 W 8860) peak - 1000 typical 220 W (180W 8860) at idle 70 W (43 W 8860) 30 W Temperature Humidity Altitude
Environmental Specifications
Table 13 Environmental Specifications Specification Operating 10 - 32 C / 50 - 90 F operating 10% - 80% RH Non-Condensing operating 0 to 2,438 meters (8,000 ft.) Storage -30C to 60C (-22 F to 140 F) 30% to 95% RH, non-condensing 0 to 6,092 meters (20,000 ft.) Standby Mode
Image Specifications
Table 10 Print Engine Only Skew Specifications Characteristic Printed Left Side Margin Leading Edge Margin Specification 5.0 mm + 2.0 mm (0.197 in. + .080 in.) 5.0 mm + 1.3 mm (0.197 in. + .050 in.) NOTE: Check that the printer is on a stable, non-vibrating suface. Advise the customer to use care not to shake the printer excessively when loading media or closing the Front Door. During operation, the ink is in liquid form an can spill from the Printhead reservoir resulting in output defects.
NOTE: To derive the skew specification for a particular media size, measure the width of the leading edge in millimeters. Next, divide the measured length by 1000, then multiply by the appropriate Image Area Tolerance specification in milli-radians. For example, A 5 in. by 7 in. custom page would have a leading edge width, in millimeters, of 127mm (5 in.). Dividing the 127 by 1000 (127/1000), then multiplying the result by the 11 milli-radians specification results in a maximum skew of 1.4 mm (127/1000) x 11 = 1.4 mm. Table 11 System Skew Specifications Scan, Copy, Print Characteristic Printed Left Side Margin Leading Edge Margin Image Area Tolerance Zone Image Skew, Envelopes Image Skew, Index Card 15.5 milli-radians max across the width of the leading edge. 18.0 milli-radians max across the width of the leading edge. Specification 5.0 mm + 4.0 mm (0.197 in. + .157 in.) 5.0 mm + 3.3 mm (0.197 in. + .130 in.)
Media Storage Guidelines If media handling problems are a common occurrence, review the following storage guidelines with the customer. Store paper in dark, cool, relatively dry locations. Most paper items are susceptible to damage from ultraviolet (UV) and visible light. UV radiation, which is emitted by the sun and fluorescent bulbs, is particularly damaging to paper items. The intensity and length of exposure to visible light on paper items should be reduced as much as possible. Maintain constant temperatures and relative humidity Avoid light, heat, and dampness. Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual
Image Skew, All other sizes 11.0 milli-radians max across the width of the leading edge.
System Specifications
Avoid attics, kitchens, garages, and basements for storing paper. Inside walls are drier than outside walls where moisture can collect. Store paper flat. Paper should be stored on pallets, cartons, shelves, or in cabinets. Avoid having food or drinks in the area where paper is stored or handled. Do not open sealed packages of paper until needed. Leave paper in the original packaging. For most commercial grades, the wrappers inner lining protects the paper. Some specialty media is packaged inside sealed plastic bags. Leave the media inside the bag until needed; return unused media to the bag.
DADF Media Guidelines The DADF accommodates sizes from 114 x 140 mm (4.5 x 5.5 in.) to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14.0 in.), with weights within the following range: 60120 g/m2 (1632 lb. Bond) (2245 lb. Cover). Follow these guidelines when loading originals into the document feeder: Load originals face-up, so the top of the document enters first. Place only loose sheets of paper in the document feeder. Adjust the paper guides so they fit against the originals. Insert paper in the document feeder only when the ink on the paper is completely dry. Paper with paper clips or staples attached Paper with wrinkles, curls, folds, tears, or notches Coated or carbonless paper, transparencies, or items other such as cloth or metal Envelopes
Use the glass rather than the document feeder to copy or scan the following types of originals:
Supported Media The following sections provide information about paper sizes and weights that can be used in the system trays. For more detailed information about supported paper and other media, print the Paper Tips page: 1. 2. 3. 4. On the Control Panel, press the System button. Select Information, and then press the OK button. Select Information Pages, and then press the OK button. Select Paper Tips, and then press the OK button to print.
09/2007 xxv
Introduction
System Specifications
Introduction
System Specifications
09/2007 xxvi
09/2007 1-1
09/2007 1-2
Final checkout
09/2007 1-3
Table 1 Service Tools Description Optional Tools Canned Air 3 -Prong Claw Part-Retriever Pointer with Magnetized Head Tweezers Utility Knife Dental Mirror Screw Box Soldering Iron Heat Shrink tubing Electrical Tape Jeweler's Screwdriver Kit Precision/Hobby tool set Serial & Parallel Loop Back Plugs Bootable CDs and Floppy Disks IC Chip Puller phillips, flathead, pliers, small torx drivers Detail
Initial Actions
Purpose
Use the following procedure to determine the reason for the service call and to identify and organize the actions which must be performed.
Procedure
1. Gather the information about the service call and the condition of the copier/printer. a. Question the operator(s). Ask about the location of most recent paper jams. Ask about the image quality and the copier/printer performance in general, including any unusual sounds or other indications. After informing the customer that the machine will not be available for copying and printing, disconnect the machine from the customers network. If a new installation, be sure all packing material is removed. Check that the power cords are in good condition, directly plugged in to the power source, and free from defects. Repair or replace the power cords as required. Check that the circuit breaker, if present, is not tripped. If the system appears is inoperative, go to Electrical Troubleshooting and repair the problem. Then continue below. Inspect any rejected copies. Inquire as to, or otherwise determine, the paper quality and weight. Print the Paper Tips page for specific media specifications. Look for any damage to the copies, oil marks, image quality defects, or other indications of an unreported problem. NOTE: If a fault code is displayed while performing a diagnostics procedure, go to that fault code RAP and repair the fault. Return to Diagnostics and continue with the procedure that you were performing. g. Display and review the information in the Fault History, Jam History, Service Usage Profile. Classify this information into categories: Information that is related to the problem that caused the service call. Information that is related to secondary problems. Information that does not require action, such as a single occurrence of a problem. 2. 3. 4. 5. Perform any required routine maintenance activities. Refer to the Routine Maintenance Activities section. If any DADF feed jams are reported, or fault codes are logged, replace the Feed Roll Kit. Try to duplicate the problem by running the same jobs that the customer ran once repairs are complete to verify repairs are effective. Go to General Procedures to further investigate the problem.
b. c. d.
e. f.
09/2007 1-4
Cleaning Procedures
Purpose
The purpose is to provide cleaning procedures to be performed at every call.
Procedure
CAUTION Do not use any solvents unless directed to do so in this manual. General Cleaning Use a dry lint free cloth or a lint free cloth moistened with water for all cleaning unless directed otherwise in this manual. Wipe with a dry, lint free cloth if a moistened cloth is used. 1. 2. 3. Feed Components (Rolls and Pads) Follow the General Cleaning procedure above. Jam Sensors Clean the sensors with a dry cotton swab. Scanner a. b. 4. Using the optical Cleaning Cloth, clean the Document Glass. Clean the Document Cover.
DADF Check the paper path for debris or damage. Clean the rolls with a clean cloth and Film Remover as required.
09/2007 1-5
Final Actions
Purpose
The intent of this procedure is to be used as a guide to follow at the end of every service call.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check that the exterior of the system and the adjacent area is clean. Use a dry cloth or a cloth moistened with water to clean the exterior of the system. Do not use solvents. Check the supply of consumables. Ensure that an adequate supply of consumables is available according to local operating procedures. Conduct any operator training that is needed. Ensure the operator understands the periodic maintenance procedures in the User Guide. Reconnect the system to the customer network. Verify function by printing one or more test prints. Present these to the customer as examples of system performance. Issue copy credits as needed. Discuss the service call with the customer to ensure that the customer understands what has been done and is satisfied with the results of the service call.
Final Actions
09/2007 1-6
09/2007 2-1
09/2007 2-2
BIST Error Reporting BIST verifies basic Electronics Module CPU operation and reports failures using PS and PE LEDs. These LEDs are located on the Electronics Module directly above the Scanner Assembly connection. BIST tests occur immediately at power-up, before POST tests are run or the Control Panel is initialized. The following table defines the blink patterns associated with a failure: Table 1 BIST Blink Pattern Error Reporting PE LED PS LED Description The power supply could not remain regulated when DC power was applied so it shut down. Follow the troubleshooting procedures for electrical shorts (see Electrical Troubleshooting) and check the power supply fuses. Initialization failure. The system is held in reset mode. This can be caused by an Electronics Module fault or a +3.3 V power supply failure. See Electrical Troubleshooting.
Off NOTE: BIST and POST errors are not stored in the fault history logs. In addition to the numeric error codes appearing on the Control Panel display, the system uses the Control Panel, PS, and PE LEDs to communicate errors. Figure 1 shows location of the PS and PE LEDs on the Electronics Module. 1
PS and Control Boot loader memory test failure. Ensure the systems RAM is Panel blink at 1/ properly seated and that the correct RAM type is installed. 2 sec. intervals Rapid Blinking The CPU and/or PCI bus is not communicating. Reboot the system. If the error persists, replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5). ROM not responding. Reboot the system, if the error still occurs, replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5). System hangs during initialization 1. Unplug all connections to the Electronics Module. 2. 3. 4. 5. Plug in the Power Cable. Power on the system. If the problem persists, reseat the RAM Modules. Replace the Electronic Module (REP 5.0.5).
2 3
POST Error Reporting POST checks the communication paths within the Electronics Module and to other various system components POST testing initializes the Control Panel, and in most cases if an error occurs, a text message is displayed on the Control Panel along with an LED blink code flashing on all three LEDs (Control Panel LED, PS LED and PE LED). If initialization of the Control Panel fails, POST errors will still report using the LED blink patterns. The sum of the flashes equal the error code. If the code has more than 5 flashes, there is a brief pause between each set of 5 flashes to make them easier to count. After all flashes occur within the code, there is a long pause and then the flash pattern repeats. Figure 1 PS and PE LED Locations Soft POST errors, that do not prevent the system from powering up completely, are displayed on the Control Panel for 5 seconds, and then the system continues through the remainder of POST. There are no rear panel LED codes associated with soft errors. Most soft errors will cause the system to print a Startup Page with the error message on it.
09/2007 2-3
NOTE: Before replacing the Electronics Module for any POST errors, do the following: 1. 2. 3. Unplug all wiring and/or cables to the Electronics Module. Plug in the AC power cable and power on the Electronics Module. If the error blink pattern is now different from the original error reported before Step 1, the problem may not be in the Electronics Module. See Electrical Troubleshooting. Table 2 POST Blink Pattern Error Reporting Error PS, PE, and Control Error Code Panel LED s Type Description 01.01 Flutter then 01 blinks 02.01 Flutter then 02 blinks 02.02 Flutter then 02 blinks 03.01 Flutter only 03.02 Flutter then 03 blinks 03.03 Flutter only 03.04 Flutter then 03 blinks 04.01 Flutter then 04 blinks 04.02 Flutter then 04 blinks 04.03 Flutter then 04 blinks 04.04 Flutter then 04 blinks 05.01 Flutter then 05 blinks 05.02 Flutter only 6.08 No indication 07.01 Flutter only 07.02 Flutter only 08.01 Flutter only 09.01 Flutter only 10.01 Flutter then 10 blinks 10.02 Flutter only 11.01 Flutter then 11 blinks 11.02 Flutter then 11 blinks 11.03 Flutter then 11 blinks 11.04 Flutter then 11 blinks 12.nn Flutter only 13.01 Flutter then 13 blinks 13.02 Flutter then 13 blinks 14.nn Flutter then 14 blinks 15.01 Flutter then 15 blinks 15.02 Flutter then 15 blinks 15.03 Flutter then 15 blinks 15.04 Flutter then 15 blinks 15.05 Flutter then 15 blinks 15.06 Flutter then 15 blinks Hard Hard Hard Soft Hard Soft Hard Hard Hard Hard Hard Hard Soft Soft Soft Soft Soft Soft Hard Soft Hard Hard Hard Hard Soft Hard Hard Hard Hard Hard Hard Hard Hard Hard Bad error code Failed machine check System panic ID read failure Mismatch Version mismatch Access failure ID read failure ID mismatch TMVL mismatch, read/write failed TMVL mismatch, read/write failed I/O Board serial communication error. I/O Board serial mismatch error. Hard Drive failure Control Panel communications error Control Panel version mismatch Control Panel failed to initialize Control Panel data error Power control link failure Power control link invalid, mismatch error EEPROM read failure EEPROM write failure EEPROM re-read failure EEPROM data failure Configuration Card failure PHY reset failure (Low) PHY ID error USB ASIC error CPU interrupt error CPU interrupt error CPU interrupt error, IRQ CPU interrupt error CPU interrupt error CPU interrupt error
Table 2 POST Blink Pattern Error Reporting Error PS, PE, and Control Error Code Panel LED s Type Description 15.07 Flutter then 15 blinks 15.08 Flutter then 15 blinks 15.09 Flutter then 15 blinks 15.10 Flutter then 15 blinks 15.11 Flutter then 15 blinks 16.01 Flutter only 16.02 Flutter only 16.03 Flutter only 16.04 Flutter only 17.01 Flutter then 17 blinks 18.01 Flutter then 18 blinks 18.02 Flutter then 18 blinks 18.03 Flutter then 18 blinks 18.04 Flutter only 19.01 Flutter then 19 blinks PEST Error Reporting PEST tests occur after POST tests have been run and PostScript has been initialized. PEST checks the connections and operation of various system components. Error codes for PEST tests are displayed on the Control Panel and are all in the 37,XXX.xx series. For troubleshooting PEST error codes, see Error Message Troubleshooting. Hard Hard Hard Hard Hard Soft Soft Soft Soft Hard Hard Hard Hard Soft Hard CPU interrupt error CPU interrupt error CPU interrupt error CPU interrupt error CPU interrupt error Real Time Clock read failure Real Time Clock write failure Real Time Clock re-read failure Real Time Clock failure Insufficient RAM memory IPCB ID read failure IPCB ID mismatch IPCB PCI configuration failure IPCB version mismatch Hard Drive failure
09/2007 2-4
NVRAM Reset
Many of the troubleshooting procedures in this section include an NVRAM reset as a procedural step. Following an NVRAM reset, the system is unable to communicate on the network and has lost several parameters specific to the customers configuration. If possible, print a Configuration page to capture networking parameters. and discuss the customers configuration to document these settings before resetting NVRAM. Table 1 lists the parameters reset by NVRAM Reset. Required parameters (Yes) must be configured to restore default system operation on the network. Table 1 Parameters Reset with the Service Diagnostics NVRAM Reset Command Menu TCP/IP Setup Parameter TCP/IP DHCP/BOOTP AutoIP TCP/IP Address TCP/IP Network Mask TCP/IP Gateway Port 9100 LPR IPP SLP SSDP CentreWare IS Network Setup USB Setup Ethernet Speed EtherTalk USB Port Wait Timeout (USB) Page Description Language (USB) Control Panel Setup Control Panel Language Control Panel Brightness Control Panel Contrast Accessible Control panel Copy Defaults Setup Color Mode 2-Sided Copying Output Quality Document Type Paper Supply Color Balance -> Cyan Color Balance Color Balance -> Magenta Color Balance Color Balance -> Yellow Color Balance Color Balance -> Black Color Balance Laser Original Prescan Glass Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual Default On On On 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 On On On On On On Auto On On 30 English 5 5 Off Color 1-1 Enhanced Mixed Tray 2 0 0 0 0 Off On Required Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
Table 1 Parameters Reset with the Service Diagnostics NVRAM Reset Command Menu Copy Main Parameter Number of Copies Paper Suppy Original Size Prescan Glass Preset Reduce/Enlarge Collate Edge Erase -> Left Edge Erase -> Right Edge Erase -> Top Edge Erase -> Bottom Margin Shift -> Long Edge Margin Shift -> Short Edge Auto Center Book Copy -> Both Pages ->Gutter Erase Book Copy -> Left Page -> Gutter Erase Book Copy -> Right Page -> Gutter Erase Auto Suppression Covers -> Cover Tray Blank Separator Blank Separator Tray Create Booklet (8860MFP Only) Repeat Image (8860MFP Only) Repeat Image -> Rows Repeat Image -> Columns N-Up Poster Color Balance -> Cyan Color Balance Color Balance -> Magenta Color Balance Color Balance -> Yellow Color Balance Color Balance -> Black Color Balance Laser Original Fax Main Fax To Resolution Original Size Auto Suppression Transmission Report Starting Rate Default 1 Tray 2 Supply On None Auto 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Off 0.0 0.0 0.0 Off Tray 1 Off Tray 2 Off Off 1 1 Off Off 0 0 0 0 Off None Standard Automatic Off On Super G3 Required No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
AutoSelect Yes
09/2007 2-5
NVRAM Reset
Table 1 Parameters Reset with the Service Diagnostics NVRAM Reset Command Menu Fax Send Setup Parameter Transmission Report Reduced Image (8860 only) Redial Count Redial Time Interval Auto Resend Policy Auto Resend Count Document Type Resolution Transmission Header (8860 only) Fax Receive Setup Paper Suplly Fax Receive Answer Delay Secure Receive (8860 only) Secure Receive Password (8860 only) Junk Fax Prevention 2-Sided Fax Printing Fax Configuration Line Name Dial Type Line Monitor Volume Auto Activity Report Starting Rate Error Correction Mode Fax Configuration Dial Pause Dial Delay Max Compression File Security Daily Removal Remove At Age-based Removal Remove at Age Paper Handing Setup Load Paper Timeout Tray 1 Mode Tray 1 Prompt Tray 2 ~ [N] Mode Tray 2 ~ [N] Prompt Letter/A4 Substitution Custom Units Cleaning Page Source Default Never Off 3 15 3 Mixed Standard On Tray 2 On 0 Off None Off 1-1 None Tone 2 Off Super G3 On 3 0 Off 00:00 Off 24 3 min. Dynamic 30 sec. Dynamic None On Highest Required No Yes No No Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No
Table 1 Parameters Reset with the Service Diagnostics NVRAM Reset Command Menu System Controls Parameter Startup Page Auto Clear Timeout Power Saver Timeout Date and Time Intelligent Ready Default Function Color Copy Password Print Job Interrupt (8860 only) Paper Tray Setup Tray 1 Paper - Media Size Tray 1 Paper - Media Type Tray 2 Paper - Media Type Tray 3 Paper - Media Type (if installed) Tray 4 Paper - Media Type (if installed) Print Defaults Setup PS-PCL Setup Paper Source 2-Sided Printing Pitch Point Size Symbol Set Oreientation Form Length Line Termination Draft Mode Color Mode Scan Default Setup Color Mode Document Type Scan Resolution Laser Original Scan Main Scan To Scan Resolution Original Size Auto Suppression Laser Original Default On 60 sec. 4 hours None On Copy Disabled On Plain Plain Plain Plain Auto Disabled 10.00 12.00 PC8 Portrait 6 On Off Color Color Mixed 100x100 Off Public 100x100 Automatic Off Off Required No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
Unsent Pg Yes
Guide Size No
JBIG/MMR No
Table 2 summarizes system parameters not affected by an NVRAM Reset. Table 2 System Parameters Not Affected by an NVRAM Reset Parameter Metric Defaults MAC Address Serial Number Model number Set by the Configuration Card Comment
Inches/mm No
NVRAM Reset
09/2007 2-6
Table 2 System Parameters Not Affected by an NVRAM Reset Parameter License Number PostScript Version PostScript Revision Activation Date Adobe Serial Number System Date and Time Fax Country Fax Line ID Overwrite Removals Speed Dial Individual Directory Speed Dial Group Directory Tray Media Types and Sizes Metered Supplies Print Counter Billing Meters Substituted Jets Warm-up Mode Warm-up Settings Stand-by Settings Jet Substitution Mode Set in CWIS Set in CWIS Set in CWIS Fax Configuration Fax Configuration File Security Fax Send Fax Send Unconfirmed following NVRAM Reset. Metered operation System Print Count The activation date is stored in Usage Profile NVRAM. Comment
Device faults are indicated by a 4 in the tenths place of the fault code (xx,yyy.4x). This indicates a hardware problem. The most common device faults troubleshooting procedures are documented in this section. Program faults are indicated by a 6 in the tenths place of the fault code (xx,yyy.6x). Unfortunately, there are too many program faults to enumerate them all and most program faults will not mean anything unless you are intimately familiar with the code base. Some of the more common program faults are documented in this section. CPU exceptions are indicated by a 7 in the tenths place of the fault code (xx,yyy.7z). The error code indicates both the Power PC exception number and the region of firmware that was executing when the exception occurred: Engine, PostScript, Network, or Operating System. NOTE: A CPU exception can either be caused by hardware or firmware error. Refer to the infoSMART Knowledge Base for descriptions of the most common faults.
09/2007 2-7
Table 2 525-Sheet Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions Check the wiring from the feeder to Electronics Module. Is the wiring defective? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected? Yes No
Replace the harReplace the feeder. ness. If the error persists, go to Step 6. Reset NVRAM. If the Reconnect the syserror persists, tem grounds. replace the feeder.
Initial Actions
Check the tray to ensure it is free of obstructions or debris. Check the operation of the Tray Lift Plate. Check the condition of the Feed and Pick Rollers. Reseat the optional tray connection to the system. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 1,000.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Tray Feeder, PL 3.0 Pick Assy and Retard Roller Kit, PL 3.0 Left Side Harness, PL 5.0 Left Side Wire Routing (1/2) - P/J204 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Left Side Harness (1/2) - Figure 4
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 525-Sheet Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Go to Step 2.
Remove the 525-Sheet Feeder and check Replace the damthe connections for damage. aged connections. Are the connectors damaged? Check the Pick Assembly for dirt, damage, Replace the Pick Assembly (REP or wear. 3.0.18). Are the rollers damaged or worn? Test the Pick Clutch. Run the Service Diagnostics Pick Clutch test for the affected tray. Does the Pick Clutch operate correctly? Test the Lift Motor. Run the Service Diagnostics Lift Motor test for the affected tray. Does the Lift Motor operate correctly? Go to Step 3.
1,00X.4x
09/2007 2-8
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Check the I/O Board for obvious signs of damage. Check that all connections to the board are secure by reseating each connection. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 1,000.6x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts NVRAM, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Applicable Parts I/O Board, PL 5.0 Right Side Harness, PL 5.0 I/O Board Power Control Cable, PL 5.0 Table 1 2,00X.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Wiring and Plug/Jack References Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 8 Right Side Wire Routing (1/2) - Figure 2 Right Side Wire Routing (1/2) - Figure 2
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 525-Sheet Feeder Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Reseat all Electronics Module connections. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 I/O Board Error Troubleshooting Procedure
Reset NVRAM. If the Reconnect the system grounds. error persists, replace the NVRAM device (REP 5.0.9).
Step Questions or Actions 1 2 3 Check the I/O Board for damage. Are the connectors damaged? Reseat all I/O Board connections. Does the problem persist? Check I/O Power Control Cable continuity between P/J840 on the I/O Board and P/ J10 on the Electronics Module. Is the wiring defective?
Yes
No
Replace the cable. If Replace the I/O Board (REP 5.0.13). the error persists, replace the I/O Board.
09/2007 2-9
1,000.6x, 2,00X.xx
Initial Actions
Turn Off the system. Check that the Configuration Card is correct for the system. Turn the system On. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. Check that all connections to the Electronics Module and I/O Board are secure by reseating each connection. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 2,006.xx Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 2,006.xx Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts I/O Board, PL 5.0.13 NVRAM, PL 5.0.9 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Configuration Card Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions Table 2 I/O Board Error Troubleshooting Procedure 1 Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Step Questions or Actions 1 2 Reseat all I/O Board connections. Does the problem persist? Reseat all Electronics Module connections. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected?
No Complete. 2 Complete. 3
Replace the Configuration Card, restart the system, and retest. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected? Replace the Electronics Module. Does the problem persist?
Go to Step 3.
Replace the NVRAM Reconnect the sysdevice (REP 5.0.9). tem grounds.
2,006.xx, 2,0XX.6x
09/2007 2-10
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
The ambient temperature is too low ( < 10C). The Printhead temperature is too low. Fast Time To Ready (FTTR) mode with head/cap flag set in NVRAM. Fast Time To Ready (FTTR) mode with a dirty Drum.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 3,000.6x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts NVRAM, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Initial Actions
Check the ambient air temperature. Check that the system is located in a suitable environment. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Drum Heater Relay Board, PL 5.0 Right Side Wire Routing (1/2) - Figure 2 Drum Temperature Sensor, PL 6.0 I/O Board (2/2) - Figure 12
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Process Control Error Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Test the heaters. Run the Service Diagnostics Monitor Heaters tests with all heaters On. Do the heaters function properly? Check the harness to the failed heater. Is the harness damaged? Yes No
Go to Step 3. Replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5). Replace the harness. Replace the failed component.
09/2007 2-11
3,0XX.6x, 4,0xx.4x
Initial Actions
Check Wiper Alignment. Check damage, debris, or Ink build-up near the Printhead. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Check for dirt, debris, or obstructions around the Printhead. Check that the Waste Tray is correctly installed. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 4,024.42 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Media Drive Assembly, PL 4.0 Wiper Blade, PL 2.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Left Side Harness (2/2) - Figure 7
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 4,025.46 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Process Drive, PL 5.0 X-Axis Motor, PL 2.0 Head Tilt Solenoid, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10 Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10 Left Side Harness (2/2) - Figure 7
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 4,024.42 Wiper Alignment Fault Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Test the Wiper alignment. Run the Service Diagnostics Check Wiper Alignment test. Did the test Fail? Test the Wiper drive. Run the Service Diagnostics Wiper Drive test. Did the test fail? Check the Wiper drive and lock systems for ink, obstructions, or damage. Is the Wiper drive function correctly? Yes No
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 4,025.46 Drum Transfix Fault Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Clear any obstructions to Printhead movement. If the error persists, go to Step 2. Go to Step 3.
Perform (ADJ 2.5.1) Go to Step 2. and retest. If the test fails again, go to Step 2. Go to Step 3. Go to Step 5.
Go to Step 11. Check for ink build up in the Head Tilt drive, Waste Tray, or wires interfering with Printhead motion. Is the Printhead clear of obstructions? Check the Process Drive for damage. Ensure the gears are correctly aligned (see ADJ 4.7.1). Is the process gearbox damaged? Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7).
Go to Step 4.
Clean the interior of Check the Head Maintenance Clutch. Is there any oil, contamination, or obvious the system or replace the clutch if damage? necessary. Test the Head Maintenance Clutch. Run the Service Diagnostics Head Maintenance Clutch test. Does the clutch function correctly? Replace in order: Exit Module Media Drive Assy Wiper Blade
Replace the X-Axis Check the X-Axis Motor connection (P/ Motor (REP 4.0.5). J150). Run the Service Diagnostics X-Axis Motor test. Did the test fail? Test the Printhead Tilt Drive. Run the Service Diagnostics Tilt Drive test. Did the test fail? Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7).
Go to Step 4.
4,024.42, 4,025.46
09/2007 2-12
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
The Drum rotated once without a Drum Home Position Sensor activation. The Y-Axis Encoder is faulty, or the Drum has stalled. Problem in the Y-Axis sub-system. Problem with the Y-Axis motion sub-system.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 4,0xx.6x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts NVRAM, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Initial Actions
Check for obstructions or debris. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 5,0xx.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Process Control Program Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Reseat all Electronics Module connections. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete. Applicable Parts Y-Axis Belt, PL 2.0 Y--Axis Motor, PL 4.0 Electronics Module Power - Figure 9 Drum Assembly (Encoder) Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10 Reset NVRAM. If the Reconnect the syserror persists, tem grounds. replace the NVRAM device (REP 5.0.9). Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Y-Axis Sub-System Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Test the Y-Axis Encoder. Run the Service Diagnostics Y-Axis Encoder test from the Monitor menu. Did the test pass? Check the Y-Axis Motor connection (P/ J18). Is the wiring faulty? Check the Y-Axis Encoder wiring. Is the wiring faulty? Yes Go to Step 2. No Go to Step 3.
Go to Step 4.
3 4
Replace the Drum Assy (REP 2.0.3). Replace the Y-Axis Motor (REP 4.0.11).
Go to Step 5. Test the Y-Axis Drive. Run the Service Diagnostics Y-Axis Drive test. Did the test pass? Test Y-Axis Belt tension. Run the Service Diagnostics Y-Axis Belt Tension test. Did the test pass? Go to Step 6.
09/2007 2-13
4,0xx.6x, 5,0xx.4x
Table 2 Y-Axis Sub-System Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 6 Yes No Replace the Y-Axis Motor (REP 4.0.11).
Replace the Drum Test the Y-Axis Motor. Run the Service Diagnostics Y-Axis Motor Assembly (REP 2.0.3). test. Did the test pass?
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 5,0xx.6x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts NVRAM, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Y-Axis Sub-System Program Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Reseat all Electronics Module connections. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Reset NVRAM. If the Reconnect the system grounds. error persists, replace the NVRAM device (REP 5.0.9).
5,0xx.4x, 5,0xx.6x
09/2007 2-14
Initial Actions
Check for Ink build-up or other obstructions around the Printhead. Check the Printhead power (P/J4) connection and related wiring. Verify the Printhead travels smoothly from left to right. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 6,0xx.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts X-Axis Motor, PL 4.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Process Control Program Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 2 Check the X-Axis Motor wiring. Is the wiring faulty? Yes Replace the wiring. No Go to Step 2. Replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5).
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 6,0xx.6x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts NVRAM, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Replace the X-Axis Test the X-Axis Motor. Run the Service Diagnostics X-Axis Motor Motor (REP 4.0.5). test. Did the test pass?
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 X-Axis Program Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Reseat all Electronics Module connections. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Reset NVRAM. If the Reconnect the system grounds. error persists, replace the NVRAM device (REP 5.0.9).
09/2007 2-15
6,0xx.4x, 6,0xx.6x
Initial Actions
Check that the Process Drive gear train is properly homed. Check for obstructions in or around the Process Drive gearbox. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Check for obstructions or ink spills around the Printhead. Verify the Printhead travels smoothly from left to right. Check the Printhead Restraint Arms. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 7,002.44 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Process Drive, PL 4.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 7,0xx.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Process Drive Fault 7,002.44 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Check that the Process Drive is properly aligned (ADJ 4.7.1). Is the Process Drive misaligned? Test the Tilt Axis Drive. Run the Service Diagnostics Tilt Axis Drive test. Did the test pass? Check the Process Drive for damage, debris, or obstructions. Is there any damage? Test the Process Drive Motor. Run the Service Diagnostics Process Motor Test. Did the test fail? Test the Transfix Cams Run the Service Diagnostics Transfix Drive Slow test. Do the Transfix Cam operate correctly? Yes Perform ADJ 4.7.1. No Go to Step 2.
Head Tilt Gear, PL 4.0 Head Tilt Solenoid, PL 4.0 Left Side Harness (2/2) - Figure 7 Process Drive, PL 4.0 Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10
Troubleshooting Procedures
The Head Tilt Solenoid is not activating the Head Tilt Gear, or the Printhead is not tilting properly
Go to Step 3.
Go to Step 4. Table 2 Head Tilt Solenoid Faults 7,006.xx Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions Yes Perform ADJ 4.7.1. No Go to Step 2.
Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7). Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7). Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7).
Go to Step 4.
Check that the Process Drive is properly aligned (ADJ 4.7.1). Is the Process Drive misaligned? Reboot the system. Is the tilt-head activating the Head Tilt Gear. Check for Ink spills on or near the Head Tilt Gear.
Go to Step 5.
Go to Step 4.
Go to Step 3.
3 Verify the transfix cams are not damaged. If the error persists, replace the Transfix Cam Shaft (REP 2.0.10).
Remove ink spills or Go to Step 4. reinstall the head-tilt and start over with Step 1. Follow recommended actions for error codes and reboot the printer.
7,002.44, 7,006.4x
09/2007 2-16
Initial Actions
Check that the Process Drive gear train is properly homed. Check for obstructions or ink spills around the Printhead. Verify the Printhead travels smoothly from left to right. Check the Printhead Restraint Arms. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Check that the Process Drive gear train is properly homed. Check for obstructions or ink spills around the Printhead. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 7,008.41 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Wiring and Plug/Jack References Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 7,007.49 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Process Drive, PL 4.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Process Drive Faults 7,007.49 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Check that the Process Drive is properly aligned (ADJ 4.7.1). Is the Process Drive misaligned? Yes Perform ADJ 4.7.1. No Go to Step 2.
Troubleshooting Procedure
The Head Tilt Solenoid is not activating the Head Tilt Cam, or the head is not tilting properly Table 2 Head Tilt Solenoid Faults 7,008.41 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Complete. 2 Reboot the system. Does the error persist? Check for Ink spills on or near the Head Tilt Gear. Clean and reboot the system. Does the error persist? Check that the Printhead moves properly to the left and right. Does the Printhead move correctly? Realign the Process Drive (ADJ 4.7.1). Does the error persist? Check the Process Drive for damage, debris, or obstructions. Is there any damage? Test the Tilt Axis Drive. Run the Service Diagnostics Tilt Axis Drive test. Did the test pass? Yes Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3. No Complete. Complete.
Remove the Printhead and inspect the Go to Step 3. Head Tilt Gear, Spring, and Process Drive gears for ink spills. Clean if necessary. Does the error persist? Realign the Process Drive (ADJ 4.7.1). Does the error persist? Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7).
3 Complete.
Go to Step 4.
4 5
09/2007 2-17
7,007.49, 7,008.41
Table 2 Head Tilt Solenoid Faults 7,008.41 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 7 Test the Head Maintenance Clutch. Run the Service Diagnostics Head Maintenance Wiper Clutch test. Does the clutch operate correctly? Check the Printhead Wiper alignment. Is the Printhead Wiper properly aligned? Test the Wiper Drive. Run the Service Diagnostics Wiper Drive test. Does the Wiper Drive operate correctly? Yes Go to Step 8. No Replace the clutch (REP 4.0.4).
8 9
Go to Step 9.
Initial Actions
Replace the Exit Repair or replace the Module (REP 3.0.7). Wiper Drive. Check for obstructions or ink spills around the Printhead. Check the Printhead Restraint Arms. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 7,009.42 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Process Drive, PL 4.0 Restraint Arms, PL 2.0 Head Maintenance Clutch, PL 4.0 I/O Board (2/2) - Figure 12 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10
Troubleshooting Procedure
The Printhead is tilted back, but not properly restrained in the Printhead Restraints. Table 2 Printhead Restraint Fault 7,009.42 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 2 3 Yes No Go to Step 2. Perform ADJ 2.5.1.
Check the restraints for damage or debris. Replace damaged Are the restraints damaged? parts (REP 2.0.8). Check the Printhead Wiper alignment. Is the Printhead Wiper properly aligned? Check Printhead wire routing and the Tilt Gear. Does the Printhead move freely? Check that the Process Drive is aligned (ADJ 4.7.1). Is the Process Drive misaligned? Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7). Does the error persist? Test the Head Maintenance Clutch Run the Service Diagnostics Head Maintenance Wiper Clutch test. Does the clutch operate correctly? Go to Step 4.
Remove ink spills or Go to Step 4. reinstall the Printhead. Perform ADJ 4.7.1. Go to Step 5.
5 6
Go to Step 6. Go to Step 7.
7,008.41, 7,009.42
09/2007 2-18
Table 2 Printhead Restraint Fault 7,009.42 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 7 Test the Wiper Drive. Run the Service Diagnostics Wiper Drive test. Does the Wiper Drive operate correctly? Yes No
Replace the Exit Repair the Wiper Module (REP 3.0.7). Drive.
Initial Actions
Check that the Process Drive gear train is properly homed. Check for obstructions or ink spills around the Printhead. Spilled ink could indicate the system was tipped while hot. Check for blockage in the Purge Tube. Verify the Printhead travels smoothly from left to right. Check the Printhead Restraint Arms. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 7,010.4x through 7,015.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Process Drive, PL 4.0 Head Tilt Solenoid, PL 4.0 Head Tilt Gear, PL 4.0 Restraint Arms, PL 2.0 Head Maintenance Clutch, PL 4.0 I/O Board (2/2) - Figure 12 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10 Left Side Harness (2/2) - Figure 7
Troubleshooting Procedure
The Printhead is stuck, or incorrectly positioned. Table 2 Printhead Restraint Fault 7,010.xx through 7,015.xx Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 2 Reboot the system. Does the error persist? Check the Printhead Lock Arms. Do the arms rotate correctly? Yes Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3. No Complete. Repair or replace the Printhead Restraints (REP 2.0.8).
09/2007 2-19
7,009.42, 7,01X.4x
Table 2 Printhead Restraint Fault 7,010.xx through 7,015.xx Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 3 Check for ink spills around the Printhead and Printhead Tilt Gears. The Printhead should move when pushed left or right. Is the area around the Printhead clean and unobstructed? Yes Go to Step 4. No Remove ink spills or obstructions.
Go to Step 5. Check the X-Axis Motor. Does the X-Axis Motor drive the Printhead to the center position?
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Check that the Process Drive is properly Realign the Process Go to Step 6. aligned (ADJ 4.7.1). Drive (ADJ 4.7.1). Check that the Process Shaft and Drive Module Shaft are at their home positions. Is the Process Drive misaligned? Check for ink spilled on the Head Tilt Gear Go to Step 7. or its drive train. Are the gears clean? Test the Head Maintenance Clutch Run the Service Diagnostics Head Maintenance Wiper Clutch test. Does the clutch operate correctly? Test the Wiper Drive. Run the Service Diagnostics Wiper Drive test. Does the Wiper Drive operate correctly? Go to Step 8. Clean the gears.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 7,0xx.6x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts NVRAM, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Process Program Faults Troubleshooting Procedure
Replace the Exit Repair the Wiper Module (REP 3.0.7). Drive.
Step Questions or Actions 1 Reseat all Electronics Module connections. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected?
Yes Go to Step 2.
No Complete.
Go to Step 9. Test the maintenance drive. Run the Service Diagnostics Load Maintenance Clutch test. Does the drive operate correctly? Check that the Head Tilt Gear engages. Manually engage the Head Tilt Gear. Does the gear engage the drive? Test the Tilt Axis Drive. Run the Service Diagnostics Tilt Axis Drive test. Did the test pass? Go to Step 11.
Check the maintenance drive system and replace any defective parts. Set the Head Tilt Gear. Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7). Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7).
10
Reset NVRAM. If the Reconnect the system grounds. error persists, replace the NVRAM device (REP 5.0.9).
11
Go to Step 12.
12
Complete. Test the Process Drive. Run the Service Diagnostics Process Motor test. Does the Process Drive operate correctly?
7,01X.4x, 7,0xx.6x
09/2007 2-20
Table 2 Media Drive Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions For an 8,007.41 error: Check for a missing KL-clip securing the Head Maintenance Clutch. Replace if missing. Check for oil on the right end of the Exit Roller shaft. Oil leaks from the brass bushing can cause the clutch to slip. Did this correct the problem? For an 8,009.43 error: 1. Check for paper in the paper path. 2. Ensure the Media Drive Assembly is fully seated and correctly installed. Remove the Tray 1 Pick Solenoid to check that the Take Away Roller shaft is properly seated to its drive gear in the Media Drive Assembly. Ensure the feed rollers are properly engaged in the drive gears. Go to Step 5. Go to Step 6. Yes Complete. No Go to Step 4.
Complete.
Initial Actions
Check for paper in the paper path. Check the condition of the Pick and Retard Rollers. 4 4.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 8,0XX.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Media Drive Assembly, PL 4.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Left Side Harness (2/2) - Figure 7
Check the Wiper drive. Run the Service Diagnostics Wiper Drive test. Does the Wiper operate correctly? Align the Printhead Wiper (ADJ 2.5.1). Does the Wiper align?
5 6
Go to Step 7.
Go to Step 6. Go to Step 7.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Media Drive Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Go to Step 4. 8 9 7
Complete. Inspect the wiper system for improper operation, obstructions, or damage (broken gear or belt). Look for ink in the wiper belt channels. Did this correct the problem? Check the Wiper Clutch. Run the Service Diagnostics Head Maintenance Clutch test. Does the clutch operate correctly? Check the right side Wiper Lock. Does the lock operate correctly? Go to Step 8.
For an 8,005.48 error: Complete. 1. Check the area surrounding the Take Away Roller. 2. Remove the Tray 1 Pick Solenoid (REP 4.0.12) to view the meshing of the roller gears to the Media Drive.
Go to Step 9.
Clean the system Check for obstructions or spilled ink on the Replace the Exit Module (REP 3.0.7). and retest. Wiper Blade, Head Tilt Gear drive, and under the Printhead. Is the Wiper, Media Drive, and Printhead clear or ink or obstructions?
09/2007 2-21
8,0XX.4x
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 8,0xx.6x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts NVRAM, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Media Drive Program Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Reseat all Electronics Module connections. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM. If the Reconnect the syserror persists, tem grounds. replace the NVRAM device (REP 5.0.9). Check that the Ink Sticks are genuine Xerox. Check for obstructions in the Ink Wells. Check the Ink Loader data (P/J0150) and power (P/J5) connections. Verify the Ink Sticks advance in the Ink Loader. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 9,0xx.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Ink Loader Assy, PL 2.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References I/O Board (2/2) - Figure 12
NOTE: Following Ink Loader Assembly replacement, or for Ink count flag stuck errors, clear the Ink Stick Count (ISC) fault using the Clear ISC Fault menu item located in the Service Diagnostics Function menu.
8,0xx.6x, 9,0XX.4x
09/2007 2-22
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Process Drive Faults 9,0XX.4x Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Remove any blockage and/or replace the ink stick. Run clear ISC Fault test to clear the error. This must be performed following an ink loader replacement. Replace the Ink Loader (REP 2.0.1).
Check that the ink stick is able to advance Go to Step 2. in the ink loader chute. Check for broken or wrong type ink sticks. Are the Ink Sticks loading properly?
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 9,009.44 and 9,0xx.6x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts NVRAM, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Test the appropriate Ink Melt Heater. Run the Service Diagnostics Ink Melt [1,2,3,4] test. 1 = Yellow 2 = Cyan 3 = Magenta 4 = Black
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Ink Loader Program Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Reseat all Electronics Module connections. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Reset NVRAM. If the Reconnect the system grounds. error persists, replace the NVRAM device. (REP 5.0.9).
09/2007 2-23
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Process Drive Faults 11,0xx.4x Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 2 Check ground integrity for the printer. Does the error persist? Reseat all system interconnections and check that the cables are properly dressed. Does the error persist? Reset NVRAM. Does the error persist? For errors 11, 001.47 and 11,017.45 Replace the Tray Lift Motor. Does the error persist? For errors 11,002.48 and 11, 016.44 Check the Option Tray connection. Does the error persist? For errors 11,003.49 and 11,0014.42 For errors 11,004.41 and 11,013.41 Replace the I/O Board (REP 5.0.13). Does the error persist? For errors 11,006.43 and 11,015.43 For error 11,009.46 Replace the I/O Board (REP 5.0.13). Does the error persist? For all other 11,000.4x errors: Yes Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3. No Complete. Complete.
Complete.
Replace the ElecComplete. tronics Module (REP 5.0.5). Replace the optional Complete. tray. Replace the I/O Board (REP 5.0.13) Complete.
Replace the Control Complete. Panel (REP 1.0.9). Replace the Printhead (REP 2.0.2). Complete.
Initial Actions
Check that all system grounds are secured. Check or reseat all connections to the Electronics Module. Check the condition of all harnesses. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Replace the ElecComplete. tronics Module (REP 5.0.5). Replace the ElecComplete. tronics Module (REP 5.0.5).
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 11,0xx.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts I/O Board, PL 2.0 Right Side Harness, PL 5.0 Left Side Harness, PL 5.0 Electronics Module, PL 5.0 Optional Feeder, PL 3.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10 Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10 Left Side Harness (1/2) - Figure 6 Electronics Module - Figure 8 Left Side Harness (1/2) - Figure 6
I/O Board Power Control Cable, PL 5.0 Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10
11,0XX.xx
09/2007 2-24
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 11,300.6x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 11,100.60 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Electronics Module, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Electronics Module Power - Figure 9
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 12,000.60 Program Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Temperature Fault 11,100.60 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Check that the air ducts are free of obstructions and the fans are operating correctly. Are the fans operating correctly? Yes No
Reseat all Electronics Module connections. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected?
Replace the ElecReplace the defectronics Module (REP tive fan. 5.0.5).
Replace the ElecReconnect the systronics Module (REP tem grounds. 5.0.5).
09/2007 2-25
11,100.60, 11,300.6x
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Check that all system grounds are secured. Check the ambient room temperature. Check the fan operation and vents. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 12,000.60 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts NVRAM, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedures. Table 1 13,0xx.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Printhead, PL 2.0 NVRAM, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Electronics Module - Figure 8
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 12,000.60 Program Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Reseat all Electronics Module connections. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 13,000.48 Troubleshooting Procedure
Reset NVRAM. If the Reconnect the system grounds. error persists, replace the NVRAM device (REP 5.0.9).
Step Questions or Actions 1 2 3 Check ground integrity for the printer. Does the error persist? Reset NVRAM. Does the error persist? Reseat all system connections to the Printhead and check that the harnesses are properly dressed. Does the error persist?
Yes Go to Step 2.
No Complete.
Replace the NVRAM Complete. device (REP 5.0.9). Replace the Printhead (REP 2.0.2). Complete.
12,000.60, 13,000.48
09/2007 2-26
Initial Actions
Check that all system grounds are secured. Check the ambient room temperature. Check the fan operation and vents. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Check that all system grounds are secured. Check the ambient room temperature. Check the fan operation and vents. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedures. Table 1 13,003.42 and 13,007.46 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts NVRAM, PL 5.0 Electronics Module, PL 5.0 Electronics Module - Figure 8 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Table 1 13,008.47 and 13,010.49 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Drum Fan, PL 4.0 Drum Assembly Wiring and Plug/Jack References Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10 Electronics Module Power - Figure 9 Left Side Harness (2/2) - Figure 7
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedures.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 13,003.42 and 13,007.46 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 2 Check ground integrity for the printer. Does the error persist? Reset NVRAM. Does the error persist? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Drum Temperature Sensor, PL 6.0 I/O Board (2/2) - Figure 12 Electronics Module Fan
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 13,008.47 and 13,010.49 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Advise the customer of operational requirements. Complete. Go to Step 6. Clean the vents.
Complete. Replace in the NVRAM device (REP 5.0.9). If the error persists, replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5).
Verify that the ambient temperature is Go to Step 2. within environmental specifications. Is the room within operating parameters? Check ground integrity for the printer. Does the error persist? Go to Step 2.
2 3 4
Is the error code associated with an over- Go to Step 4. heat condition?. Check airflow at the vents. Is there adequate clearance, and are the vents clean? Test the Drum Fan Run the Service Diagnostics Drum Fan Motor test. Does the fan operate correctly? Test the Electronics Module Fan. Does the Fan operate correctly? Go to Step 5.
Go to Step 6.
Go to Step 7.
Replace the Electronics Module Fan (REP 4.0.15). Error Messages and Codes
09/2007 2-27
Table 2 13,008.47 and 13,010.49 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 7 Test the Drum Temperature Sensor. Run the Service Diagnostics Drum Temperature Sensor test. Does the sensor operate correctly? Yes Go to Step 8. No Replace the Drum Temperature Sensor. (REP 6.0.4). Replace the Drum Temperature Sensor. (REP 6.0.4).
Test the Drum Heater. Replace the Drum Run the Service Diagnostics Drum Heater Assembly (REP test. 2.0.3). Does the heater operate correctly?
Initial Actions
Check that all system grounds are secured. Check the ambient room temperature. Check the fan operation and vents. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedures. Table 1 13,0xx.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2 13,067.43, 13,069.45 and 13,071.47 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Test the Drum Temperature Sensor. Run the Service Diagnostics Drum Temperature Sensor test. Does the sensor operate correctly? Check the Drum Heater Sensor harness. Is the harness free from defects or damage? Yes Go to Step 2. No Replace the Drum Temperature Sensor. (REP 6.0.4). Repair the wiring.
09/2007 2-28
Initial Actions
Check that all system grounds are secured. Check the ambient room temperature. Check the fan operation and vents. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Check that all system grounds are secured. Check the ambient room temperature. Check the fan operation and vents. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedures. Table 1 13,XXX.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Preheater, PL 2.0 I/O Board, PL 5.0 Right Combined Cable, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References I/O Board (1/2) - Figure 11 I/O Board (1/2) - Figure 11
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedures. Table 1 13,1XX.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Printhead, PL 2.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Electronics Module - Figure 8
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Left Jetstack Thermal Fault Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions Yes No Advise the customer of operational requirements. Complete. Replace the Printhead (REP 2.0.2).
Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2 Preheater Thermal Fault Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Advise the customer of operational requirements. 2 3 1
Verify that the ambient temperature of the Go to Step 2. room is within the systems environmental specifications. Is the room within operating parameters? Test the Preheater. Run the Service Diagnostics Preheater test. Does the Preheater operate correctly?
Verify that the ambient temperature of the Go to Step 2. room is within the systems specifications. Is the room within operating parameters? Check ground integrity for the printer. Does the error persist? Test the Left Jetstack. Run the Service Diagnostics Left Jetstack Temperature test. Does the Preheater operate correctly? Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4.
Check Preheater connections and wiring. Replace the PreRepair or replace the Are the connections secure and the wiring heater (REP 2.0.17). wiring. undamaged?
Check Printhead connections and wiring. Replace the PrintAre the connections secure and the wiring head (REP 2.0.2). undamaged?
09/2007 2-29
13,XXX.4x, 13,1XX.4x
Initial Actions
Check that all system grounds are secured. Check the ambient room temperature. Check the fan operation and vents. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Check that all system grounds are secured. Check the ambient room temperature. Check the fan operation and vents. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedures. Table 1 13,2XX.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Printhead, PL 2.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Electronics Module - Figure 8
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedures. Table 1 13,XXX.xx Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Printhead, PL 2.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Electronics Module - Figure 8
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Right Jetstack Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Advise the customer of operational requirements. Complete. Replace the Printhead (REP 2.0.2).
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Printhead Reservoir Thermal Fault Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Advise the customer of operational requirements. Complete. Replace the Printhead (REP 2.0.2).
Verify that the ambient temperature of the Go to Step 2. room is within the systems specifications. Is the room within operating parameters? Check ground integrity for the printer. Does the error persist? Test the Right Jetstack. Run the Service Diagnostics Right Jetstack Temperature test. Does the Preheater operate correctly? Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4.
Verify that the ambient temperature of the Go to Step 2. room is within the systems specifications. Is the room within operating parameters? Check ground integrity for the printer. Does the error persist? Go to Step 3.
2 3
2 3
Test the Printhead Reservoir temperature. Go to Step 4. Run the Service Diagnostics Reservoir Temperature test. Does the Printhead operate correctly? Check Printhead connections and wiring. Replace the PrintAre the connections secure and the wiring head (REP 2.0.2). undamaged?
Check Printhead connections and wiring. Replace the PrintAre the connections secure and the wiring head (REP 2.0.2). undamaged?
09/2007 2-30
Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2 Ink Loader Ink Melt Heater 13,328.43 through 13,581.44 Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Advise the customer of operational requirements. Complete.
Verify that the ambient temperature of the Go to Step 2. room is within the systems specifications. Is the room within operating parameters? Check ground integrity for the printer. Does the error persist? Go to Step 3.
2 3
Test the appropriate Ink Melt heater. Replace the ElecGo to Step 4. Run the Service Diagnostics Ink Melt test. tronics Module (REP 1. Yellow 5.0.5). 2. 3. 4. Cyan Magenta Black
Does the Ink Melt Heater operate correctly? 4 Check Ink Loader connections and wiring. Replace the Ink Repair or replace the Are the connections secure and the wiring Loader (REP 2.0.1). wiring. If the error undamaged? persists, replace the I/O Board (REP 5.0.13).
Initial Actions
Check that all system grounds are secured. Check the ambient room temperature. Check the fan operation and vents. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedures. Table 1 Ink Loader Thermal Fault Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Ink Loader, PL 2.0 I/O Board, PL 5.0 Electronics Module, PL 5.0 Right Combined Cable, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Electronics Module - Figure 8 I/O Board (2/2) - Figure 12 Electronics Module - Figure 8
09/2007 2-31
13,XXX.xx
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Check electrical connections to the Printhead. Check for obstructions or damage near the Printhead. If obstructions are cleared, retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 6,0xx.6x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts NVRAM, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 19,0xx.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Printhead, PL 2.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Electronics Module - Figure 8
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 X-Axis Program Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Reseat all Electronics Module connections. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Process Drive Faults 7,0xx.4x Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Check and reseat all connections to the Printhead. Does the problem persist? Yes No
Reset NVRAM. If the Reconnect the system grounds. error persists, replace the NVRAM device (REP 5.0.9).
Replace the PrintComplete. head (REP 2.0.2). If the error persists, replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5).
13,00x.6x, 19,0XX.4x
09/2007 2-32
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 6,0xx.6x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 6,0xx.6x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts NVRAM, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 X-Axis Program Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 2 Update the Diagnostic firmware. Does the problem persist? Replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5). Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete. Complete.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 X-Axis Program Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Reseat all Electronics Module connections. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Check that the ground straps are place between the Media Drive Motor and YAxis Assembly. Also check the ground clip at the Tray 2 Pick Clutch. Are the system grounds connected? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Reset NVRAM. If the Reconnect the system grounds. error persists, replace the NVRAM device (REP 5.0.9).
09/2007 2-33
19,0XX.6x, 21,000.69
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 23,0XX.6x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts NVRAM, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 X-Axis Program Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Reseat all Electronics Module connections. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
As an example, the Jam Code W2Q1 indicates a Tray 3 Paper Size Switch unexpectedly activated while a paper pick operation occurred from Tray 1. See Jam Codes for a listing of the most commonly seen codes.
Reset NVRAM. If the Reconnect the system grounds. error persists, replace the NVRAM device (REP 5.0.9).
Initial Actions
Clear the paper path of obstructions or debris. Check that the media meets specifications and is loaded correctly. Check that the Pick Rollers are clean and in good condition.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Locate the code in the Jam Codes listing and follow the procedure, if available
22,0XX.6x, 23,0XX.6x
09/2007 2-34
Initial Actions
Reseat RAM devices and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 23,0XX.6x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts SDRAM, PL 5.0 or PL 5.1 Electronics Module, PL 5.0 Electronics Module - Figure 8 or PL 5.1 (8860) Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedure
Check the fault history and troubleshoot the error listed immediately prior to these codes. Otherwise, reboot the system to clear these error conditions.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 X-Axis Program Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Reseat the SDRAM devices in the Electronics Module. Does the problem persist? Replace SDRAM. Does the problem persist? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
09/2007 2-35
23,133.4x, 26,0XX.6x
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Jam Manager Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Reseat all Electronics Module connections. Does the problem persist? Check ground integrity. Are the system grounds connected? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Reset NVRAM. If the Reconnect the system grounds. error persists, replace the NVRAM device (REP 5.0.9).
27,0XX.6x, 29,0XX.6x
09/2007 2-36
Initial Actions
Check routing of tray sensor harnesses. Check that the Take Away Rollers are free of obstructions. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Reset NVRAM and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Reset NVRAM. If the Reconnect the system grounds. error persists, replace the NVRAM device (REP 5.0.9).
Replace the Media Drive Assembly (REP 4.0.14). Replace the Media Drive Assembly (REP 4.0.14).
Go to Step 4.
Check the rollers. Remove the Media Drive Assembly and check each roller for binding or drag. Do the rollers rotate correctly?
09/2007 2-37
31,001.40, 31,0XX.6x
Initial Actions
Check electrical connection to Tray 1 (P/J650). Check for obstructions or damage to the Media Guides. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
34,003.45 34,004.46
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 33,00x.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Initial Actions
Check data connection to the Printhead. Check for obstructions or damage to the Media Guides. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 34,00x.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Tray 1 Width Sensor Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Repair or replace the harness. Applicable Parts Printhead, PL 2.0 Printhead Interface Cable, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Electronics Module - Figure 8 Electronics Module - Figure 8
Check the Tray 1 Harness connection to Go to Step 2. the I/O Board (P/J610). Is the connection secure and the harness undamaged?
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Printhead NVRAM Fault Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Repair or replace the cable.
Replace the I/O Replace the Tray 1/ Test the Width Sensors. Run the Service Diagnostics Tray 1 Width Board (REP 5.0.13). Front Door AssemSensor test. bly (REP 1.0.1). Does the sensor operate correctly?
Check the Printhead data cable connec- Go to Step 2. tions (P/J3 and P/J180). Are the connections secure and the cable undamaged? Replace the Printhead (REP 2.0.2). Does the error persist?
33,00X.4x, 34,00X.4x
09/2007 2-38
Table 2 Printhead NVRAM Fault Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions CAUTION Do not attempt to remove ink from the Printhead reservoir. Purge the reservoir using solid color test prints as described. Clear the Ink Loader of Ink. For these types of errors, clear the Ink Loader of the incorrect Ink. 1. Remove the Ink Loader. 2. 3. Load the correct Ink into the chutes. Clean the area surrounding the Printhead reservoir for the affected color(s). Install the Ink Loader. Yes Go to Step 3. No Continue cleaning until no residual ink remains in the Ink Loader or area surrounding the Printhead.
Has all the improper Ink been removed from the Ink Loader and Printhead area? Disable Ink Loader level sensing. 1. Open the Ink Loader Door. 2. Switch the power On and interrupt the initialization process immediately after the Xerox logo is replaced by the words Warming Up by holding down the Up Arrow button while pressing the OK button. Go to Step 4. Continue Step 3 until level sensing is disabled.
WARNING
Allow adequate time for the system to cool before servicing the printer.
Initial Actions
Check the Ink Loader for improperly installed Ink Sticks. Shutdown the printer and allow it to cool until the Ink solidifies (approximately 30 minutes). Investigate where the contamination came from and remove the contamination source.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 34,00x.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Printhead, PL 2.0 Ink Sticks Wiring and Plug/Jack References Electronics Module - Figure 8 5 4
If successful, the words Level sense disabled momentarily appear on the display. If these words dont appear, power Off the system and attempt the procedure again. Ink level sensing remains disabled for approximately 5 minutes. Is level sense disabled? Close the Ink Loader Door and allow the system to reach Ready. Is the system Ready? Go to Step 5. Go to Step 7.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Printhead NVRAM Fault Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Go to Step 7. 6
Access the Service Tools menu to purge Go to Step 6. the Printhead contamination using the Ink Flush Prints routine. Select the affected color to print 20 solid fill prints. Were 20 solid fills printed? Check that the contamination has been purged. 1. Shutdown the system. 2. Turn the system On. Did the system reach Ready without error? Complete.
Check the Ink Loader chutes for improp- Go to Step 2. erly installed Ink Sticks. Has the Ink been loaded incorrectly or the wrong ink used?
09/2007 2-39
34,01X
Table 2 Printhead NVRAM Fault Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 7 Replace the Printhead (REP 2.0.2). Does the error persist? Yes No
Initial Actions
Check for ink spills or obstructions near the Drum Maintenance Kit. Check for obstructions or damage to the Pivot Plate and Cam Rollers. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 36,000.40 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Drum Maintenance Kit PL 1.0 Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate PL 2.0 I/O Board (2/2) - Figure 12 Process Drive, PL 4.0 Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Drum Maintenance Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 2 Yes No Repair or replace the grounds. Go to Step 3.
Check that system grounds are in place. Go to Step 2. Are the grounds secure and undamaged? Check the Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate Replace any damaged parts. for cracks, and the Dram Maintenance Cam Rollers for damage or improper movement. Is there damage to the Pivot Plate or Cam Rollers? Test Drum Maintenance operation. Run the Service Diagnostics Drum Maintenance/Transfix Home test. Does the system operate correctly? Test the Drum Maintenance drive. Run the Service Diagnostics Drum Maintenance Drive test. Does the drive operate correctly? Go to Step 4.
Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7). Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7)
Complete.
34,01X, 36,000.40
09/2007 2-40
Initial Actions
Check for ink spills or obstructions near the Drum Maintenance Kit. Check for obstructions or damage to the Pivot Plate and Cam Rollers. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Check for ink spills or obstructions near the Drum Maintenance Kit. Check for obstructions or damage to the Pivot Plate and Cam Rollers. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 36,001.67 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Drum Maintenance Kit PL 1.0 Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate PL 2.0 I/O Board (2/2) - Figure 12 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 36,001.67 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Drum Maintenance Kit PL 1.0 Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate PL 2.0 I/O Board (2/2) - Figure 12 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Drum Maintenance Drive Faults 36,001.67 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 2 Yes No Repair or replace the grounds. Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7). Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7)
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Drum Maintenance Drive Faults 36,001.67 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Check that the Drum Maintenance Kit is correctly installed. Is the installation correct? Replace the Drum Maintenance Kit Does the error persist? Yes Go to Step 2. No Correct and retest.
Check that system grounds are in place. Go to Step 2. Are the grounds secure and undamaged? Test Drum Maintenance operation. Run the Service Diagnostics Drum Maintenance/Transfix Home test. Does the system operate correctly? Test the Drum Maintenance drive. Run the Service Diagnostics Drum Maintenance Drive test. Does the drive operate correctly? Go to Step 3.
Replace the Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate and Shaft (REP 2.0.16).
Replace the Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate and Shaft (REP 2.0.16).
Complete.
09/2007 2-41
36,001.67, 36,002.44
Initial Actions
Check the Electronics Module and Drum Cooling Fans. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 37,01X.41 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Drum Fan, PL 4.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10
Initial Actions
Check the Printhead, Preheater and Ink Loader power connections. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 PEST Fan Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Test the affected component. Run the Service Diagnostics test for the affected fan. Does the affected fan operate correctly? Check wiring to the affected component. Is the wiring damaged? Yes Go to Step 2. No Replace the fan.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 37,0XX.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Ink Loader Assy, PL 2.0 Printhead, PL 2.0 Preheater, PL 2.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Electronics Module - Figure 8 Electronics Module - Figure 8 Electronics Module Power - Figure 9 2
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 PEST Heater Faults 37,0XX.4x Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Replace the affected component.
Go to Step 2. Test the affected component. Run the Service Diagnostics test for the affected component. Does the affected component reach operating temperature? Check wiring to the affected component. Is the wiring damaged?
37,0XX.xx, 37,01X.41
09/2007 2-42
Table 2 PEST 50 V Supply Fault 37,016.43 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions Shutdown the system and wait 30 seconds for the capacitors to discharge. Connect I/O Board connector (P/J840). Turn the system On. Do the PE and PS indicators (near the Power Switch) flash momentarily? Yes Go to Step 4. No Go to Step 5.
Initial Actions
Check the Electronics Module indicators. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 37,016.43 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Electronics Module, PL 4.0 I/O Board, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Left Side Harness (1/2) - Figure 6 I/O Board (2/2) - Figure 12 5
Replace the defecCheck the 50 V Supply LED. If the 50V LED (Figure 2) illuminates, the tive part. short is on one of the external devices unplugged earlier. In this case, systematically turn off the printer, plug a wiring harness back in, and turn the printer on until the 50V LED fails to illuminate. Was the defective part isolated? Shutdown the system and wait 30 seconds for the capacitors to discharge. Disconnect all connections to the I/O Board. Test the resistance of the I/O Board across pin 1 of J270 and ground. Pin 1 is on the left end of the jack. Is the resistance still less than 1K ohm? Reconnect connections on the I/O Board until you find one that creates a short at J270-1. Does a short appear at J270-1? Reconnect the Wave Amplifier. Turn the system On. Does the error persist? Reconnect the Printhead. Turn the system On. Does the error persist?
Go to Step 5.
Troubleshooting Procedure
CAUTION Damage to circuits within the Electronics Module may occur if the power supply capacitors are not allowed to fully discharge. Table 2 PEST 50 V Supply Fault 37,016.43 Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Go to Step 2. 8 7 6
Go to Step 8.
Check for a short in the Electronics Mod- Go to Step 2. ule. Measure the 50 V power supply output. The test point is located on the power control board below the main board RAM DIMMs. Is there 50 V across the TP and ground? Shutdown the system and wait 30 seconds for the capacitors to discharge. Unplug all connections to the Electronics Module. Turn the system On. Do the PE and PS indicators (near the Power Switch) flash momentarily? Go to Step 3.
Leave power on to Replace the Electronics Module (REP ensure the problem is fixed. 5.0.5).
09/2007 2-43
37,016.43
Initial Actions
Check the Tray 2 Lift Plate for damage or obstructions. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 37,0XX.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Deskew Clutch, PL 4.0 Pick Clutch, PL 4.0 Tray 1 Pick Solenoid, PL 4.0 Strip Solenoid, PL 3.0 Preheater Lift Solenoid, PL 4.0 Head Tilt Solenoid, PL 4.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 PEST Tray 2 Lift Motor Fault Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Test the Tray 2 Lift Motor. Run the Service Diagnostics Tray 2 Lift Motor test. Does the motor operate correctly? Yes No
Head Maintenance Clutch, PL 4.0 I/O Board (2/2) - Figure 12 Left Side Harness (1/2) - Figure 6 Left Side Harness (1/2) - Figure 6 Left Side Harness (1/2) - Figure 6 I/O Board (1/2) - Figure 11 Left Side Harness (2/2) - Figure 7 Left Side Harness (2/2) - Figure 7 2
Replace the ElecGo to Step 2. tronics Module (REP 5.0.5). Repair of replace the Left Side Harness.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 PEST Clutch/Solenoid Fault Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Replace the affected component.
Check the motor connection to the Left Replace the motor Side Harness. (REP 4.0.10). Is the connection secure and the harness undamaged?
Test the component indicated by the error. Go to Step 2. Run the Service Diagnostics test for the affected component. Does the component operate correctly? Check wiring to the affected component. Is the wiring damaged?
37,0XX.4x, 37,024.48
09/2007 2-44
Initial Actions
Check the Purge Pump for damage or obstructions. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Check the Relay Boards power connection. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 37,026.44 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Purge Pump, PL 2.0 Electronics Module, PL 4.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Left Side Harness (2/2) - Figure 7 Left Side Harness (2/2) - Figure 7
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 37,02X.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Relay Board, PL 5.0 Electronics Module, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References I/O Board (1/2) - Figure 11 Electronics Module Power - Figure 9
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 PEST Purge Pump Fault Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Test the Purge Pump. Run the Service Diagnostics Purge Vent Solenoid test. Does the pump operate correctly? Yes Go to Step 2. No Replace the Purge Pump (REP 2.0.7).
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 PEST Relay Board Faults 37,02X.4x Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No
Check the pump connection to the Left Replace the Purge Side Harness. Pump (REP 2.0.7). Is the connection secure and the harness undamaged?
Replace the ElecGo to Step 2. Test the Relay Board. Run the Service Diagnostics Drum Heater tronics Module (REP 5.0.5). Relay test. Does the Relay Board operate correctly? Check wiring to the affected component. Is the wiring damaged? Repair or replace the Replace the Relay harness. Board (REP 5.0.19).
09/2007 2-45
37,026.44, 37,02X.4x
Initial Actions
Check for obstructions to Drum rotation. Check the condition of the Y-Axis Drive Belt. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Check the X-Axis Motor connection. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 37,03X.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Wiring and Plug/Jack References Electronics Module Power - Figure 9 Electronics Module Power - Figure 9
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 37,03X.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts X-Axis Motor, PL 4.0 Electronics Module, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10 Right Side Wire Routing (2/2) - Figure 3
Replace the ElecGo to Step 2. Test the X-Axis Motor. Run the Service Diagnostics X-Axis Drive tronics Module (REP test. 5.0.5). Does the motor operate correctly? Check wiring to the motor. Is the wiring damaged? Repair or replace the Replace the X-Axis harness. Motor (REP 4.0.5).
Check the Y-Axis Motor. Go to Step 3. Remove the Y-Axis Belt (REP 2.0.4). Does the Y-Axis Motor shaft rotate freely?
Replace the Y-Axis Belt and test the YReplace the ElecGo to Step 4. Axis Motor. tronics Module (REP Run the Service Diagnostics Y-Axis Drive 5.0.5). test. Does the motor operate correctly? Check wiring to the motor. Is the wiring damaged? Repair or replace the Replace the Y-Axis harness. Motor (REP 4.0.11).
09/2007 2-46
Initial Actions
Check for obstructions to Media Drive rotation. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Check for obstructions to Process Drive rotation. Check the rotation of the Drum Maintenance and Transfix Roller shafts. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 37,037.46 and 37,038.47 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Media Drive, PL 4.0 Electronics Module, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Left Side Harness (2/2) - Figure 7 Left Side Wire Routing (2/2) - Figure 5 Table 1 37,039.48 and 37,040.40 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Process Drive, PL 4.0 Electronics Module, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Right Side Harness / I/O Control - Figure 10
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure.
Go to Step 2. Replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5). Repair or replace the Replace the Media harness. Drive (REP 4.0.14).
Go to Step 2. Check shaft rotation. Do the Process Drive gears, Transfix Shaft, and Drum Maintenance shaft rotate freely? Test the Process Drive Motor. Run the Service Diagnostics Process Motor test. Does the motor operate correctly? Check wiring to the motor. Is the wiring damaged?
Replace the ElecGo to Step 3. tronics Module (REP 5.0.5). Repair or replace the Replace the Proharness. cess Drive (REP 4.0.7).
09/2007 2-47
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 PEST Power Supply Faults 37,0XX.4x Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5).
Test the Power Supply. Go to Step 2. Run the Service Diagnostics Voltages test. Does the Power Supply operate correctly? Check the Printhead Power connection. Is the wiring disconnected or damaged?
Repair or replace the Replace the Elecharness. tronics Module (REP 5.0.5).
Initial Actions
Check the component power connections and harness condition. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 37,0XX.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Electronics Module, PL 5.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
37,0XX.4x
09/2007 2-48
Initial Actions
Cycle system power and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Check the Scanhead lock. Check for packaging. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 39,00X.4x Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Scanner Assembly, PL 1.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References Applicable Parts Scanner Assembly, PL 1.0 Table 1 39,004.42 Troubleshooting Reference Table Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure.
09/2007 2-49
Table 2 Scanhead Missing Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions Is the Status LED Off? Yes No
Initial Actions
Reseat the Scanner connection to the Electronics Module. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below. 6 Disconnect the Scanner Assembly from the Electronics Module. Does the Status LED light?
Replace the Scanner Go to Step 6. Power Supply (REP 5.0.2). If the error persists, replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5). Replace the Scanner Replace the Exit Assembly (REP Module Control 1.0.11). Board (REP 5.0.1). If the error persists, replace the Scanner Power Supply (REP 5.0.2). If the Status LED remains Off, replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5).
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 39,005.43 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Scanner Assembly, PL 1.0 Scanner Power Supply, PL 5.0 DADF, PL 1.0 Exit Module Control Board, PL 5.0 Exit Module Control Board - Figure 13 Exit Roller Motor, PL 4.0 Elevator Motor, PL 4.0 Exit Module Control Board - Figure 13 Exit Module Control Board - Figure 13 Exit Module Control Board - Figure 13 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Scanhead Missing Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 2 Cycle system power and retest. Does this correct the problem? Check the Scanner Power Supply status LED (see Figure 2). Is the Status LED blinking? Yes Complete. Go to Step 3. No Go to Step 2. Go to Step 5.
Remove the Output Tray and Side Covers. Replace the defec- Go to Step 4. Disconnect the Elevator (P/J303) and Exit tive motor or the Exit Module (REP 3.0.7) Roller (P/J309) motors. Does the Status LED stop blinking and remain On? With the Exit Module motors disconnected, disconnect the DADF from the Scanner. Does the Status LED stop blinking and remain On? Replace the DADF (REP 1.0.15). Go to Step 5.
39,005.43
09/2007 2-50
Initial Actions
Check the DADF connection to the Scanner Assembly. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Initial Actions
Cycle system power and retest. If the problem persists, follow the procedure below.
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 39,010.8 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts DADF, PL 1.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Primary Causes
The troubleshooting table lists parts and wiring referenced in the troubleshooting procedure. Table 1 39,011.40 and 39, 012.40 Troubleshooting Reference Table Applicable Parts Document Feeder, PL 1.0 Wiring and Plug/Jack References
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 DADF Disconnected or Missing Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Complete.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 DADF Subsystem Faults Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 2 Replace the DADF (REP 1.0.15). Cycle system power and retest. Does this correct the problem? Replace the DADF (REP 1.0.15). Yes Complete. Complete. No Go to Step 2.
Reseat the DADF connection to the Scan- Go to Step 2. ner Assembly. Wait at least one minute. Does the problem persist? Cycle system power and retest. Does this correct the problem? Complete.
09/2007 2-51
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 2 Scanhead Locked Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions Table 2 Scanhead Locked Troubleshooting Procedure 1 Yes Complete. No Replace the DADF (REP 1.0.15).
Troubleshooting Procedure
Step Questions or Actions 1 Clean or replace the DADF Pick Rollers and Separator Pad. Does the problem persist? Remove all media, open and close the DADF Front Cover, and retest. Does this correct the problem?
Yes Go to Step 2.
No Complete.
Cycle system power and retest. Does this correct the problem?
Complete.
39,013.42 , 39,014.43
09/2007 2-52
Jam Codes
The system stores the most recent 20 events in Jam History. To access this information, press and hold the Up Arrow button, then scroll to Jam History and press OK. Jam codes for Process Events differ between models. Tables 1 and 2 list the code keys for each model. Table 3 provides troubleshooting information for the most common jams. Table 1 8860 Jam Code Key Process Event A Deskew Flag B Preheater Flag C Strip Flag D Exit Flag E Tray 1 Width F Front Door G Tray 2 Media H Tray 3 Media J Tray 4 Media M Media Drive N Y-Axis Motor P Process Drive T Exit Door V Tray 2 Event W Tray 3 Event X Tray 3 Pick Flag Y Tray 4 Event Z Tray 4 Pick Flag Basis for Jam 2 Sensor Event 3 Timeout 4 Motor Stall 5 Motor Position 6 Length Short 7 Length Long System State A Abnormal shutdown B Normal shutdown C Mechanical recovery D Warmup E Ready F Fault G Auto Drum Maintenance H Printhead Maintenance J Printhead purge K Oil Transfix Roller L Standby M Pick from Tray 2 N Pick from Tray 3 P Pick from Tray 4 Q Pick from Tray 1 R Pick from Duplex S Stage for transfix T Transfix V Drum Maintenance W Imaging X Exit Z Shutdown Media Supply 1 Tray 1 2 Tray 2 3 Tray 3 4 Tray 4 5 Chase Page 6 Duplex Process Event A Deskew Flag B Preheater Flag C Strip Flag D Exit Flag E Tray 1 Width F Front Door G Exit Door H Tray 2 Media J Tray 3 Media K Tray 4 Media M Media Drive N Y-Axis Motor P Process Drive V Tray 2 Event W Tray 3 Event X Tray 3 Pick Flag Y Tray 4 Event Z Tray 4 Pick Flag
Table 2 8860MFP Jam Code Key Basis for Jam 2 Sensor Event 3 Timeout 4 Motor Stall 5 Motor Position 6 Length Short 7 Length Long System State A Abnormal shutdown B Normal shutdown C Mechanical recovery D Warmup E Ready F Fault G Auto Drum Maintenance H Printhead Maintenance J Printhead purge K Oil Transfix Roller L Standby M Pick from Tray 2 N Pick from Tray 3 P Pick from Tray 4 Q Pick from Tray 1 R Pick from Duplex S Stage for transfix T Transfix V Drum Maintenance W Imaging X Exit Z Shutdown Media Supply 1 Tray 1 2 Tray 2 3 Tray 3 4 Tray 4 5 Chase Page 6 Duplex
NOTE: The following table defines the first 3-digits. The 4th digit represents the tray number (1~4), 5 represents a chase page, and 6 represents duplex. Numbers following the 4th digit are the system page count: Table 3 Jam Code Troubleshooting Code Description / Procedure A2C Deskew sensor in unexpected state during mechanical recovery. 1. Check the Drum Maintenance Kit NVRAM contacts during oiling for continuity. 2. 3. A2E Instruct customer to remove media from Tray 1 before opening the front door. Replace the pivot arm.
Deskew sensor in unexpected state at ready. 1. Check system grounding. 2. Replace Tray 1 Pick Solenoid. Deskew sensor in unexpected state. 1. Check system grounding. 2. Verify all doors and covers are fully closed and not moving during printing. Deskew flag sensor event during head purge. Deskew sensor in an unexpected state during a Transfix Roller oiling.
A2F
A2J A2K
09/2007 2-53
Jam Codes
Table 3 Jam Code Troubleshooting Code Description / Procedure A2M A2N A2P A2S A2Q The deskew flag tripped unexpectedly while picking paper from Tray 2. The deskew flag tripped unexpectedly while picking paper from Tray 3. The deskew flag tripped unexpectedly while picking paper from Tray 4. Deskew sensor in unexpected state during media stage for transfix. The deskew flag tripped unexpectedly while the printer was picking paper from Tray 1. 1. Try using different, supported media 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. A3G A3M A3N A3P A3Q Ensure the paper guides are snug against the media in the tray Push up on Tray {2 - 4} Nudger Roller until it is captured by actuator arm. Run the following diagnostic tests, Deskew Flag, Tray {2-4} Pick Clutch and the Tray {2-4} Solenoid. Check system grounding. Verify all doors and covers are fully closed and not moving during printing. Replace the Tray {2 - 4} Pick Clutch. Replace the Retard Roller (REP 3.0.18). Replace the Preheater (REP 2.0.17). B3M B3N B3P B3Q B3S B3T
Table 3 Jam Code Troubleshooting Code Description / Procedure B2F B2S Preheater exit sensor in unexpected state during fault. Preheater exit sensor in unexpected state during stage. 1. Check system grounds. 2. 3. 4. B2M B2N B2P B2Q Check the Drum Maintenance Kit NVRAM contacts during oiling for continuity. Check the waste tray. Replace the Preheater (REP 2.0.17).
The preheat flag tripped unexpectedly while picking paper from Tray 2. The preheat flag tripped unexpectedly while picking paper from Tray 3. The preheat flag tripped unexpectedly while picking paper from Tray 4. The preheat flag tripped unexpectedly while picking paper from Tray 1. 1. Test the Preheater Sensor using Service Diagnostics. 2. Check system grounds. The preheat flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 2. The preheat flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 3. The preheat flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 4. The preheat flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 1. Preheater sensor timed out during stage. Preheater Exit Sensor timed out during transfix. 1. Verify media is appropriate for the tray. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Check for paper path obstructions, ensure the Preheater plate moves freely. Replace the Tray 1 Separator Pad Assembly. Test the Preheater Exit Sensor using Service Diagnostics. Check the condition of the Deskew Rollers. Test the Deskew Clutch using Service Diagnostics. Run the Paper Path Drive test from Service Diagnostics. Replace the Preheater (REP 2.0.17), then retest.
Deskew Sensor time-out event during an auto drum maintenance cycle. The deskew flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 2. The deskew flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 3. The deskew flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 4. The deskew flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 1. 1. Verify media is appropriate for the tray. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Verify the tray is not overfilled and the guides are positioned correctly. Check for obstructions in the paper path. Test the appropriate Tray Solenoid. Test the appropriate Tray Pick Clutch. Ensure the take away rollers are in good condition. Test the take away roller using the diagnostic Paper Path Drive test. Replace the appropriate Separator Pad Assembly. Replace the Pick Assembly (REP 3.0.18).
A3R
Deskew sensor time-out during movement from exit roller to deskew roller when duplexing print. 1. Ensure the media is appropriate for two-sided printing. Not too short, not too smooth. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check the condition of the Exit Roller and the Duplex Roller. Check the Front Door for obstructions or damage, replace the Front Door if necessary. Test the operation of the exit roller and the duplex roller using diagnostic Duplex Paper Lead Edge Times test. Test the deskew sensor using the diagnostic Sensors test.
C2C C2D C2E C2F C2K C2M C2N C2P C2Q C2R C2T
Strip flag unexpected event during mechanical recovery. Strip flag unexpected state during warm-up. Strip flag unexpected event during system ready. Strip flag unexpected event during fault. Strip flag unexpected event during Transfix Roller oiling. The strip flag actuated unexpectedly when paper was picked from Tray 2. The strip flag actuated unexpectedly when paper was picked from Tray 3. The strip flag actuated unexpectedly when paper was picked from Tray 4. The strip flag actuated unexpectedly when paper was picked from Tray 1. Strip flag unexpected event during pick from the duplex path. Strip flag unexpected event during transfix. 1. Check system grounds. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Check for paper tray overfill. Test the Strip Sensor using Service Diagnostics. Check the Stripper Blade for damage or debris. Run the Paper Lead Edge Times test using Service Diagnostics. Test the Deskew Clutch using Service Diagnostics. Replace the Stripper Carriage Assembly (REP 2.0.12), then retest.
B2C
Preheat exit sensor unexpected state during mechanical recovery. 1. Clear jam and let printer finish mechanical recovery. 2. Check system grounds.
Jam Codes
09/2007 2-54
Table 3 Jam Code Troubleshooting Code Description / Procedure C2X Strip flag unexpected event during exit. 1. Check that the media is not too thick and is supported by the system. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C3M C3N C3P C3Q C3T Use a less glossy media. Check that the guides in the tray are snug against the media. If the Drum Maintenance Kit is near end of life, replace it. Clean and inspect the exit rollers. Test the Paper Path Drive using Service Diagnostics. 6. 7. D3C D3M D3N D3P D3Q D3R D3T
Table 3 Jam Code Troubleshooting Code Description / Procedure D2X The exit flag actuated unexpectedly exit. 1. Check that the media is not too thick and is supported by the system. 2. 3. 4. 5. Use a less glossy media. If the Drum Maintenance Kit is near end of life, replace it. Clean and inspect the exit rollers. Check that the Exit Sensor Flag for proper installation or damage. Replace if necessary. Test the Paper Path Drive using Service Diagnostics. Replace the problem component.
The strip flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 2. The strip flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 3. The strip flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 4. The strip flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 1. Strip flag time-out during transfix. 1. Check that the media is the correct size and type for the tray. If envelope jam, try a different style. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check the Drum Maintenance Kit for proper operation, replace if necessary. Check that the Process Drive is correctly homed (ADJ 4.7.1). Test the Stripper Carriage using the Stripper Contact test in Service Diagnostics. Test the Transfix Drive using the Transfix Drive Slow and Transfix Drive Fast tests.
Exit flag time-out during mechanical recovery. Exit flag timed out following Tray 2 Pick. Exit flag timed out following Tray 3 Pick. Exit flag timed out following Tray 4 Pick. Exit flag timed out following Tray 1 Pick. Exit flag timed out during duplexing. Exit flag time-out during transfix. 1. Check that the media is not too thick and is supported by the system. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Check that the exit path is free of obstructions. If the Drum Maintenance Kit is near end of life, replace it. Clean and inspect the Stripper Blade. Clean and inspect the exit rollers. Check that the rollers rotate freely. Check the Exit Sensor Flag for proper installation or damage. Replace if necessary. Test the Paper Path Drive using Service Diagnostics. Replace the problem component.
C3X
Strip flag time-out during exit. 1. Open the Exit Door and ensure the springs for the idler rollers are present and installed correctly (they should be the same for all 5 rollers). 2. Verify the metal bar is installed on top of the Exit Guide. Print pulled back into transfix nip during exit. 1. Check that the media is not too thick and is supported by the system. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Use a less glossy media. If the Drum Maintenance Kit is near end of life, replace it. Clean and inspect the exit rollers. Check that the Process Drive is correctly homed (ADJ 4.7.1). Test the Paper Path Drive using Service Diagnostics. Replace the Lower Exit Guide. E2D E2E E2Q
C5X
Tray 1 width sensor during warm-up. Tray 1 width sensor during operation. Tray 1 width sensor during Tray 1 pick 1. Check the Tray 1 width guides for proper operation. Verify the guides are not moving during printing. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check the Front Door is closed and the wiring is properly connected and seated. Test the Tray 1 Width Sensor using Service Diagnostics. Check the Tray 1 wiring to the I/O board. Replace the I/O Board (REP 5.0.13), then retest.
Exit flag unexpected event during warm-up. The exit flag actuated unexpectedly when paper was picked from Tray 2. The exit flag actuated unexpectedly when paper was picked from Tray 3. The exit flag actuated unexpectedly when paper was picked from Tray 4. The exit flag actuated unexpectedly when paper was picked from Tray 1. The exit flag actuated unexpectedly when duplexing The exit flag actuated unexpectedly when transfixing 1. Check system grounds. 2. 3. 4. Test the Exit Sensor using Service Diagnostics. Run the Paper Lead Edge Times test using Service Diagnostics. Replace the problem component, then retest.
09/2007 2-55
Jam Codes
Table 3 Jam Code Troubleshooting Code Description / Procedure F2D F2F F2M F2N F2P F2Q F2R F2S F2T F2V F2W F2X The Front Door Interlock tripped during warming up. The Front Door Interlock tripped during fault state. The Front Door Interlock tripped during a pick from Tray 2. The Front Door Interlock tripped during a pick from Tray 3. The Front Door Interlock tripped during a pick from Tray 4. The Front Door Interlock tripped during a pick from Tray 1. The Front Door Interlock tripped during duplexing. The Front Door Interlock tripped while the paper was staged for transfix. The Front Door Interlock tripped during transfix. The Front Door Interlock tripped during Drum oiling. The Front Door Interlock tripped during imaging. The Front Door Interlock tripped during exit. 1. Check the Front Door for damaged hinges, latch, or interlock actuator. 2. 3. 4. 5. G2M H2N J2M J2P Check the covers for proper alignment and fit. Test the Interlock Switch (Door Sensor test) using Service Diagnostics. Check the Front Door Interlock Switch installation and wiring. Replace the switch, then retest.
Table 3 Jam Code Troubleshooting Code Description / Procedure M2C M4A M4B M4C M4D M4E M4F M4G M4H M4J M4K M4L M4M M4N M4P M4Q M4R M4S M4T Media Drive motor had an unexpected event during mechanical recovery. Media Drive motor stalled during an abnormal printer shutdown. Media Drive motor stalled during a normal printer shutdown. Media Drive motor stalled during mechanical recovery. Media Drive motor stalled during printer warm-up. Media Drive motor stalled during ready state. Media Drive motor stalled during a fault state. Media Drive motor stalled during an auto drum maintenance cycle. Media Drive motor stalled during printhead maintenance. Media Drive motor stalled during printhead purge. Media Drive motor stalled during an oil Transfix Roller cycle. Media Drive motor stalled during standby mode. Media Drive motor stalled during pick from Tray 2. Media Drive motor stalled during pick from Tray 3. Media Drive motor stalled during pick from Tray 4. Media Drive motor stalled during pick from Tray 1. Media Drive motor stalled during duplex. Media Drive motor stalled during transfix stage. Media Drive motor stalled during transfix. 1. Check that the media is supported by the system. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. N2T Check that the exit path is free of obstructions. Check system grounds. Test the Media Drive motor using the Paper Path Drive test. If necessary, retest using the Media Path Motor and Shafts tests. Check the condition and movement of the rollers and gears. Replace the Media Drive Assembly (REP 4.0.14).
Tray 2 removed during pick from Tray 2. Tray 3 removed during pick from Tray 3. Tray 4 removed during pick from Tray 4. Tray 4 Media Present Sensor event pick from Tray 4.
Y-Axis motor event during transfix (Tray 1 only - probably a multi-pick). 1. Check that the media is supported by the system. 2. 3. 4. 5. Try a heavier media. Send a snippet to turn off the multi-pick detection code. Test the Y-Axis Motor using Service Diagnostics, replace if necessary (REP 4.0.11). Run the Voltages test, replace the Electronics Module if necessary (REP 5.0.5).
N2W
Y-Axis motor event during imaging. Probably a software fault. Check system grounds.
Jam Codes
09/2007 2-56
Table 3 Jam Code Troubleshooting Code Description / Procedure N4A N4B N4C N4D NFE N4F N4G N4H N4J N4K N4L N4S N4T N4V N4W N4X Y-Axis motor stalled on power-up following an abnormal shutdown. Y-Axis motor stalled on power-up following a normal shutdown. Y-Axis motor stalled during mechanical recovery Y-Axis motor stalled during warm-up. Y-Axis motor stalled during ready state. Y-Axis motor stalled during a fault state. Y-Axis motor stalled during an auto drum maintenance cycle. Y-Axis motor stalled during printhead maintenance. Y-Axis motor stalled during printhead purge. Y-Axis motor stalled during an oil Transfix Roller cycle. Y-Axis motor stalled during standby mode. Y-Axis motor stalled during staging for transfix. Y-Axis motor stalled during transfixing. Y-Axis motor stalled during a print drum maintenance cycle. Y-Axis motor stalled during drum imaging. Y-Axis motor stalled during paper exit. 1. Check for supported media, generally label, trifold or envelopes cause this error. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. N5T N5W Try running fewer sheets through the tray. Check that the Process Drive is correctly homed (ADJ 4.7.1). Test theY-Axis Motor using Service Diagnostics, replace if necessary (REP 4.0.11). Test for Y-Axis Belt slippage using the Belt Slip test. Replace the Tray 1 Separator Pad assembly. Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7).
Table 3 Jam Code Troubleshooting Code Description / Procedure N7T Y-Axis Motor media long during transfix. The media was longer than expected. 1. Check for supported media. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. P4A P4B P4C P4D PFE P4F P4G P4H P4J P4K P4L P4S P4T P4V P4W P4X Try heavier media. Try loading only a few sheets. Some photo media may require running one sheet at a time. Run the diagnostic Check Drum Y-Axis Encoder test. Replace the Pick Assembly and Retard Roller (REP 3.0.18). Run the clean ink smears and check the Preheater exit flag for debris. Remove the Preheater (REP 2.0.17), and check the Preheater flag for ink or paper interference. Replace the Preheater (REP 2.0.17) if the error persists.
Y-Axis motor out of position during transfixing. Y-Axis motor out of position during drum imaging. 1. Check the Y-Axis drive belt. 2. 3. 4. 5. Run the Check Drum Y-Axis Encoder test. Run the Check Drum Y-Axis Drive test. Test for Y-Axis Belt slippage using the Belt Slip test. Replace the Y-Axis Motor (REP 4.0.11), or Drum Assembly (REP 2.0.3) if necessary.
Process Drive stalled on power-up following an abnormal shutdown. Process Drive stalled on power-up following a normal shutdown. Process Drive stalled during mechanical recovery Process Drive stalled during warm-up. Process Drive stalled during ready state. Process Drive stalled during a fault state. Process Drive stalled during an auto drum maintenance cycle. Process Drive stalled during printhead maintenance. Process Drive stalled during printhead purge. Process Drive stalled during an oil Transfix Roller cycle. Process Drive stalled during standby mode. Process Drive stalled during staging for transfix. Process Drive stalled during transfixing. Process Drive stalled during a print drum maintenance cycle. Process Drive stalled during drum imaging. Process Drive stalled during paper exit. 1. Check for supported media. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Check that the Process Drive is correctly homed (ADJ 4.7.1). Test the Process Drive using Service Diagnostics. Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7) if necessary. Run the Transfix Fast and Slow tests. Replace the Transfix Camshaft (REP 2.0.10) and load arms if necessary. Run the Tilt Drive test, replace if necessary. Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7).
N6T
Y-Axis Motor media short during transfix. The media was shorter than expected. Legal size paper from Tray 4 in standard print mode may buckle. Use slower print mode. 1. Check for supported media. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check system grounds. Run the Check Drum Y-Axis Encoder test. Remove the Preheater (REP 2.0.17), and check the Preheater flag for ink or paper interference. Replace the Preheater (REP 2.0.17).
09/2007 2-57
Jam Codes
Table 3 Jam Code Troubleshooting Code Description / Procedure T2A T2B T2C T2D T2E T2F T2G T2H T2J T2K T2L T2M T2N T2P T2Q T2R T2S T2T T2X T2Z Exit Door Interlock tripped following an abnormal shutdown. Exit Door Interlock tripped following a normal shutdown. Exit Door Interlock tripped during mechanical recovery Exit Door Interlock tripped during warm-up. Exit Door Interlock tripped during ready state. Exit Door Interlock tripped during a fault state. Exit Door Interlock tripped during an auto drum maintenance cycle. Exit Door Interlock tripped during Printhead maintenance. Exit Door Interlock tripped during Printhead purge. Exit Door Interlock tripped during an oil Transfix Roller cycle. Exit Door Interlock tripped during standby mode. Exit Door Interlock tripped during pick from Tray 2. Exit Door Interlock tripped during pick from Tray 3. Exit Door Interlock tripped during pick from Tray 4. Exit Door Interlock tripped during pick from Tray 1. Exit Door Interlock tripped during duplexing. Exit Door Interlock tripped during transfix staging. Exit Door Interlock tripped during transfixing. Exit Door Interlock tripped during paper exit. Exit Door Interlock tripped during shutdown. 1. Check for supported media. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. V2D V2E V2F V2K V2L V2M V2N V2P V2Q V2R V2S V2T V2X Check system grounds. Run the Monitor Sensors test using Service Diagnostics. Check the Exit Door Interlock Switch. Replace if necessary (REP 6.0.2). Check the Drum Maintenance Kit is functioning properly and the blade is not covered with ink debris. Replace if necessary Replace the Transfix Roller (REP 2.0.12). X2A X2B X2C X2D X2E X2F X2L X2M X2N X2P X2Q X2R X2S X2V X2W X2X
Table 3 Jam Code Troubleshooting Code Description / Procedure W2D W2E W2F W2L W2M W2N W2P W2Q W2R W2V W2S W2T W2X Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during warm-up. Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during ready state. Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during a fault state. Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during standby mode. Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 2. Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 3. Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 4. Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 1. Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during duplexing. Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during an auto drum maintenance cycle. Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during transfix staging. Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during transfixing. Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during paper exit. 1. Check system grounds. 2. 3. 4. W4N W4P W2S Check that the Tray 3 media guides are set correctly. Run the Monitor Sensors test using Service Diagnostics. Replace the 525-Sheet Feeder.
Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 3. Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 4. Tray 3 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 1. 1. Check system grounds. 2. 3. 4. Check that the Tray 3 media guides are set correctly. Run the Monitor Sensors test using Service Diagnostics. Replace the 525-Sheet Feeder.
Tray 2 Paper Size Switch activated during warm-up. Tray 2 Paper Size Switch activated during ready state. Tray 2 Paper Size Switch activated during a fault state. Tray 2 Paper Size Switch activated during an oil Transfix Roller cycle. Tray 2 Paper Size Switch activated during standby mode. Tray 2 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 2. Tray 2 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 3. Tray 2 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 4. Tray 2 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 1. Tray 2 Paper Size Switch activated during duplexing. Tray 2 Paper Size Switch activated during transfix staging. Tray 2 Paper Size Switch activated during transfixing. Tray 2 Paper Size Switch activated during paper exit. 1. Check system grounds. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check that the Tray 2 media guides are set correctly. Run the Monitor Sensors test using Service Diagnostics. Check the Paper Size Switch. Replace if necessary (REP 6.0.7). Replace the Pivot Arm.
Tray 3 pick flag actuated during an abnormal shutdown. Tray 3 pick flag actuated during a normal shutdown. Tray 3 pick flag actuated during mechanical recovery Tray 3 pick flag actuated during warm-up. Tray 3 pick flag actuated during ready state. Tray 3 pick flag actuated during a fault state. Tray 3 pick flag actuated during standby mode. Tray 3 pick flag actuated during pick from Tray 2. Tray 3 pick flag actuated during pick from Tray 3. Tray 3 pick flag actuated during pick from Tray 4. Tray 3 pick flag actuated during pick from Tray 1. Tray 3 pick flag actuated during duplexing. Tray 3 pick flag actuated during transfix staging. Tray 3 pick flag actuated during an auto drum maintenance cycle. Tray 3 pick flag actuated during drum imaging. Tray 3 pick flag actuated during paper exit. 1. Check system grounds. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check that the Tray 2 media guides are set correctly Run the Monitor Sensors test using Service Diagnostics. Replace the 525-Sheet Feeder. Replace the Pivot Arm.
Jam Codes
09/2007 2-58
Table 3 Jam Code Troubleshooting Code Description / Procedure X3D X3E X3F X3K X3L X3M X3N X3P X3Q X3R X3S X3T X3V X3W X3X Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during warm-up. Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during ready state. Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during a fault state. Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during an oil Transfix Roller cycle. Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during standby mode. Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during pick from Tray 2. Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during pick from Tray 3. Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during pick from Tray 4. Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during pick from Tray 1. Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during duplexing. Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during transfix staging. Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during transfixing. Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during a drum maintenance cycle. Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during drum imaging. Tray 3 pick flag timed-out during paper exit. 1. Check for supported media. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Y2D Y2E Y2F Y2L Y2M Y2N Y2P Y2Q Y2R Y2S Y2T Y2V Y2W Y2X Reduce the amount of media loaded in the tray and reposition the guides to fit snugly against the media. Check the rollers for damage, debris or excessive wear. Clean or replace as necessary. Run the Tray 3 Pick Shaft test using Service Diagnostics. Check system grounds. Push up on the Nudger Roller until it is captured by the Actuator Arm. Run the Pick Clutch test using Service Diagnostics. Replace if necessary. Run the Media Path Drive test using Service Diagnostics. Replace the Pick Roller Assembly (REP 3.0.18). Z3B Z3D Z3E Z3F Z3L Z3M Z3N Z3P Z3Q Z3R Z3S Z3T Z3V Z3W Z3Z
Table 3 Jam Code Troubleshooting Code Description / Procedure Z2A Z2B Z2C Z2D Z2E Z2F Z2L Z2M Z2N Z2P Z2Q Z2R Z2S Z2T Z2V Z2W Z2Z Tray 4 pick flag actuated during an abnormal shutdown. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during a normal shutdown. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during mechanical recovery Tray 4 pick flag actuated during warm-up. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during ready state. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during a fault state. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during standby mode. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during pick from Tray 2. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during pick from Tray 3. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during pick from Tray 4. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during pick from Tray 1. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during duplexing. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during transfix staging. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during transfix. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during an auto drum maintenance cycle. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during drum imaging. Tray 4 pick flag actuated during paper exit. 1. Check system grounds. 2. 3. 4. Run the Monitor Sensors test using Service Diagnostics. Replace the 525-Sheet Feeder. Replace the Pivot Arm.
10. Replace the 525-Sheet Feeder. Tray 4 Paper Size Switch activated during warm-up. Tray 4 Paper Size Switch activated during ready state. Tray 4 Paper Size Switch activated during a fault state. Tray 4 Paper Size Switch activated during standby mode. Tray 4 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 2. Tray 4 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 3. Tray 4 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 4. Tray 4 Paper Size Switch activated during pick from Tray 1. Tray 4 Paper Size Switch activated during duplexing. Tray 4 Paper Size Switch activated during transfix staging. Tray 4 Paper Size Switch activated during transfixing. Tray 4 Paper Size Switch activated during a drum maintenance cycle. Tray 4 Paper Size Switch activated during Drum imaging. Tray 4 Paper Size Switch activated during paper exit. 1. Check system grounds. 2. 3. 4. 5. Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual Check that the media guides are adjusted correctly. Run the Monitor Sensors test to test the Tray 4 Paper Size Switch. Replace the Tray 4 525-Sheet Feeder. Replace the pivot arm.
Tray 4 pick sensor timed-out during a normal shutdown. Tray 4 pick sensor timed-out during warm-up. Tray 4 pick sensor timed-out during ready state. Tray 4 pick sensor timed-out during a fault state. Tray 4 pick sensor timed-out during standby mode. Tray 4 pick sensor timed-out during a pick from Tray 2. Tray 4 pick sensor timed-out during a pick from Tray 3. Tray 4 pick sensor timed-out during a pick from Tray 4. Tray 4 pick sensor timed-out during a pick from Tray 1. Tray 4 pick sensor timed-out during duplexing. Tray 4 pick sensor timed-out during transfix staging. Tray 4 pick sensor timed-out during transfix. Tray 4 pick sensor timed-out during an auto drum maintenance cycle. Tray 4 pick sensor timed-out during drum imaging. Tray 4 pick sensor timed out while exiting print 1. Check the paper loaded in Tray 4 is the correct size and type. 2. 3. 4. Check the rollers for damage, debris or excessive wear. Clean or replace as necessary. Run the Tray 4 Pick Shaft test. Replace the Tray 4 525-Sheet Feeder.
09/2007 2-59
Jam Codes
Jam Codes
09/2007 2-60
3 Image Quality
IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP .................................................................................. IQ2 Dark Streaks on Copied Image ................................................................................ IQ3 Voids in the Copied Image ....................................................................................... IQ4 Skewed Copy Image ................................................................................................ IQ6 Fuzzy Text or Image................................................................................................. IQ5 Copy Image is Lighter or Darker than the Original ................................................... IQ7 Copied Image Colors Do Not Match the Original ..................................................... IQ8 Dark Streaks on Copied Image ................................................................................ IQ9 Copy Image is Skewed............................................................................................. IQ10 Copy Image is Lighter or Darker than the Original ................................................. IQ11 Copied Image Colors Do Not Match the Original ................................................... IQ12 Fuzzy Text or Image............................................................................................... IQ13 Random Light Stripes............................................................................................. IQ14 Predominate Light Stripes ...................................................................................... IQ15 Smudges or Smears............................................................................................... IQ16 Printed Image is Too Light or Too Dark ................................................................. IQ17 No Image is Printed................................................................................................ IQ18 Color is Uneven or Color is Wrong......................................................................... IQ19 Streaks or Lines Down the Print ............................................................................. IQ20 Scratches or Marks Parallel to the Long Axis of Printing ....................................... IQ21 Ink on the White Portion of the Printed Page ......................................................... IQ22 Fuzzy Text .............................................................................................................. IQ23 Poor Primary Color Fill ........................................................................................... IQ24 Ghosting ................................................................................................................. IQ25 Poor Small Text Resolution.................................................................................... IQ26 Vertical Lines Appear Wavy ................................................................................... IQ27 Oil Streaks on Print ................................................................................................ IQ28 Incomplete Image Transfer .................................................................................... IQ29 Ink Smears on First Side of Duplex Print ............................................................... IQ30 Repeating Print Defects ......................................................................................... IQ31 White Stripes (Pinstripes) ....................................................................................... IQ32 Wrinkling................................................................................................................. IQ33 Image is Offset or Cut-Off ...................................................................................... IQ34 Poor Ink Adhesion, Poor Image Durability ............................................................. IQ35 Massive Jet Loss .................................................................................................... Analyzing Service Test Prints ......................................................................................... Jet Substitution Mode...................................................................................................... 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-5 3-6 3-6 3-7 3-7 3-8 3-8 3-9 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-11 3-12 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-23 3-24 3-24 3-25 3-25 3-26 3-31
09/2007 3-1
Image Quality
Image Quality
09/2007 3-2
Table 2 Scanner Image Quality Problems RAP IQ12 Table 3 Print Engine Image Quality Problems Symptom Random Light Stripes Predominate Light Stripes Smudges or Smears The printed Image is too Light or Dark No Image is Printed Color is Uneven or Wrong Streaks or Lines Down the Print Scratches or Marks Parallel to the Long Printing Axis Ink on the White Portion of the Page Fuzzy Text Poor Primary Color Fills Ghosting Poor Small Text Resolution Vertical Lines Appear Wavy Oil Streaks on Print Incomplete Image Transfer Ink Smears on First Printed Side of Duplex Print Repeating Defects White Stripes Wrinkling Image if Offset or Cutoff Poor Ink Adhesion, Poor Image Durability RAP IQ2 IQ3 IQ4 IQ5 IQ6 IQ7 If a print quality problem is not resolved using the image quality troubleshooting procedures, see Analyzing Service Test Prints. NOTE: The Troubleshooting Print Quality page includes instructions for printing the Eliminate Light Stripes test print. The Eliminate Light Stripes test print indicates individual weak or missing jets or an obstruction in the imaging path that produces a vertical band down the entire page. You may also see color variations from jet to jet on the Eliminate Light Stripes test print. Some variation is normal and usually self corrects within a few printed pages. RAP IQ13 IQ14 IQ15 IQ16 IQ17 IQ18 IQ19 IQ20 IQ21 IQ22 IQ23 IQ24 IQ25 IQ26 IQ27 IQ28 IQ29 IQ30 IQ31 IQ32 IQ33 IQ34
Initial Actions
Computer applications, hardware malfunctions, or communication between the IIT and IOT can cause scan/copy or print-quality issues. Hardware failures that result in image quality problems can occur in the DADF, Scanner Assembly or Print Engine. Use the following steps to determine which part of the system is at fault. 1. 2. 3. Ensure the DADF and Scanner connectors are securely connected. Cycle power to the system. Print the 2-sided demo page from the Control Panel. If the image defect appears on the printed page, the problem is within the Print Engine. When analyzing a print-quality defect from a Print Engine malfunction, determine if the defect occurs: 4. 5. 6. 7. in all colors in only one color as a repeating or random defect
Copy a page directly from the platen. Copy a page from the DADF, selecting 2-sided copy to see if the defect is on the 1st, 2nd or both sides of the page. If the image defect appears on the 1st side, the problem is within the Scanner Assembly. If the image defect appears on the 2nd side of the page, the problem is the DADF.
NOTE: To aid in troubleshooting image quality issues, print the Paper Tips page. The paper should be from an unopened ream that has been acclimated to room temperature.
Procedure
After determining the source of the image quality problem, examine the image and select the relevant corrective procedure from one of the following tables. Table 1 DADF Image Quality Problems Symptom Dark Streaks on the Copied Image Voids in the Copied Image Skewed Copy Image Copied Image is Lighter or Darker than the Original Fuzzy Text or Image Copy Image Colors Do Not Match Original Table 2 Scanner Image Quality Problems Symptom Dark Streaks on the Scanned Image Skewed Scan Image Scanned Image is Lighter or Darker than the Original Scan Image Colors Do Not Match Original RAP IQ8 IQ9 IQ10 IQ11
09/2007 3-3
Image Quality
IQ1
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. 4. Check that supported media is being used. Check for Ink build-up or debris. Clean if necessary. Copy another page. If the problem persists, perform the following corrective actions. Reseat all DADF connections.
Initial Actions
1. 2. Check that supported media is being used. Reseat all DADF connections.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ3 Voids in the Copied Image Step Questions and Actions Yes Go to Step 2. No Go to Step 3. Replace the DADF.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ2 Dark Streaks on Copied Image Step Questions and Actions 1 Check the DADF for ink build up. Open the DADF Front Cover. Clean the inside of the DADF Front Cover, including the ribs, rollers and separator pad. Does the problem persist? Check the CVT Window for ink build up. Clean the CVT Window. Does the problem persist? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete. 2 1
Does the void run the entire length of one side of the image.
Go to Step 3.
Complete. Advise the customer that periodic cleaning of the CVT window may be necessary. Complete.
Open the DADF and check that the Calibra- Go to Step 3. tion Strip extends fully. The Lamp should be completely covered by the strip. Block the DADF Cover Sensor, select 2-sided copy, and then feed media through the DADF. Does the strip extend and retract properly? Remove any debris obstructing the Lamp. Does the problem persist?
Check DADF calibration. Perform the DADF to Scanner Calibration adjustment procedure (ADJ 1.15.1). Does the problem persist? Replace the DADF (REP 1.0.15). Does the problem persist?
Go to Step 4.
Complete.
Image Quality
IQ2, IQ3
09/2007 3-4
Procedure
Table 1 IQ6 Fuzzy Text or Image Step Questions and Actions Yes No
Procedure
Table 1 IQ4 Skewed Copy Image Step Questions and Actions 1 Check that the original is printed on supported media and is undamaged. Is the original supported? Yes Go to Step 2. No Use the Platen. 2 Complete. 3 1
Print the Graphics Demo page for fuzzy image or the Configuration page for fuzzy text. Does the text appear fuzzy? Make a copy of the page printed in Step 1. Does the image still appear fuzzy? Check and/or adjust the Control Panel copy settings. Print the Troubleshooting Print Quality page and evaluate the Output Quality and Color Settings section. Use Text or Mixed print mode to evaluate text. Graphics lose image quality in these two modes. If the system is set to Photo or Graphics mode, text quality decreases. Does the problem persist after making the adjustments? Perform the DADF to Scanner Calibration adjustment procedure (ADJ 1.15.1). Does the problem persist? Scan a copy of the page printed in Step 2. Does the problem persist?
The problem is Go to Step 2. with the Print Engine. See IQ22. Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4. Go to Step 4. Complete.
Check that the paper guides are correctly Go to Step 3. adjusted, and clean the Pick Roller and Separator Pad. Does the problem persist? Perform the DADF to Scanner Calibration adjustment procedure (ADJ 1.15.1). Does the problem persist?
Go to Step 5.
Complete.
Replace the Scan- Replace the DADF ner Assembly (REP 1.0.15). (REP 1.0.11).
09/2007 3-5
Image Quality
IQ4, IQ6
Initial Actions
1. 2. Check that supported media is being used. Reseat all DADF connections.
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. 4. Check that supported media is being used. Test output using Laser Original Mode. Reseat all DADF connections. Cycle power to the system.
Procedure
NOTE: The Control Panel settings for Color Mode, Document Type, Output Quality, and Lighten/Darken influence the output in different ways. Finding a satisfactory combination of these settings for a particular original might require several attempts. In some cases, these controls may not completely compensate for artifacts introduced in the scanning process. Table 1 IQ5 Copy Image is Lighter or Darker than the Original Step Questions and Actions 1 Check and/or adjust the Control Panel copy settings. 1. Print the Troubleshooting Print Quality page and evaluate the Output Quality and Color Settings section. 2. Use the Lighten/Darken Output Quality adjustment to attempt to correct the problem. Check that the print mode is not set to Draft or Standard. Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
NOTE: There can be slight color variations from an original copy to a solid ink print resulting from the physical properties of the original, (i.e., ink jet copy, laser toner copy, etc.). A Laser Original Mode is also available to adjust the imaging system to more accurately produce copies of laser originals. Color matching varies because the reflective characteristics of the original vary. The Control Panel settings for Color Mode, Document Type, Output Quality, and Lighten/ Darken influence the output in different ways. Finding a satisfactory combination of these settings for a particular original might require several attempts. In some cases, these controls may not completely compensate for artifacts introduced in the scanning process.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ7 Copied Image Colors Do Not Match the Original Step Questions and Actions 1 Print the Graphics Demo page. Make a copy of the Graphics Demo page. Do the colors vary between the two? Check and/or adjust the Control Panel copy settings. Print the Troubleshooting Print Quality page and evaluate the Output Quality and Color Settings section. Does the problem persist after making the adjustments? Perform the DADF to Scanner Calibration adjustment procedure (ADJ 1.15.1). Does the problem persist? Replace the DADF. Does the problem persist? Check the cabling between the Scanner and Print Engine. Is the cabling damaged? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
3.
Does the problem persist after making the adjustments? 2 Perform the DADF to Scanner Calibration adjustment procedure (ADJ 1.15.1). Does the problem persist? Replace the DADF. Complete.
Go to Step 3.
Complete.
Go to Step 4.
Complete.
4 5
Go to Step 5.
Complete.
Replace the Scan- Replace the Elecner Assembly tronics Module. If (REP 1.0.11). the problem persists, replace the Scanner Assembly (REP 1.0.11).
Image Quality
IQ5, IQ7
09/2007 3-6
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. 4. Check that supported media is being used. Reseat all cable connections between the Scanner Assembly and the Electronics Module. Check for Ink build-up or debris. Clean if necessary. Copy another page. If the problem persists, perform the following corrective actions.
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. 4. Check that supported media is being used. Adjust the guides on the DADF Input Tray. Check that image skew exceeds specifications. Reseat all DADF connections.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ8 Dark Streaks on Copied Image Step Questions and Actions 1 Check the CVT Window for ink build up. Clean the CVT Window. Scan another page. Does the problem persist? Check DADF calibration. Perform the DADF to Scanner Calibration adjustment procedure (ADJ 1.15.1). Does the problem persist? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ9 Copy Image is Skewed Step Questions and Actions 1 Yes No Use the Platen.
Complete. 2
Check that the original is printed on supGo to Step 2. ported media and is undamaged. Print the Paper Tips page for a listing of supported media. Is the original supported? Perform the DADF to Scanner Calibration adjustment procedure (ADJ 1.15.1). Does the problem persist?
09/2007 3-7
Image Quality
IQ8, IQ9
Initial Actions
1. 2. Check that supported media is being used. Reseat all cable connections between the Scanner Assembly and the Electronics Module.
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. Check that supported media is being used. Reseat all cable connections between the Scanner Assembly and the Electronics Module. Cycle power to the system.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ10 Copy Image is Lighter or Darker than the Original Step Questions and Actions 1 Check and/or adjust the Control Panel copy settings. 1. Print the Troubleshooting Print Quality page and evaluate the Output Quality and Color Settings section. 2. Use the Lighten/Darken Output Quality adjustment to attempt to correct the problem. Check that the print mode is not set to Draft or Standard. Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
NOTE: There can be slight color variations from an original copy to a solid ink print resulting from the physical properties of the original, (i.e., ink jet copy, laser toner copy, etc.). Reds may never match the original. A Laser Original Mode is also available to adjust the imaging system to more accurately produce copies of laser originals. Color matching varies because the reflective characteristics of the original vary.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ11 Copied Image Colors Do Not Match the Original Step Questions and Actions 1 Print the Graphics Demo page. Make a copy of the Graphics Demo page. Do the colors vary between the two? Check and/or adjust the Control Panel copy settings. Print the Troubleshooting Print Quality page and evaluate the Output Quality and Color Settings section. Does the problem persist after making the adjustments? Adjust the Original Type and Output Quality modes and monitor how the copy changes with different combinations of settings. Does the problem persist? Perform the DADF to Scanner Calibration adjustment procedure (ADJ 1.15.1). Does the problem persist? Replace the DADF (REP 1.0.15). Does the problem persist? Check the cabling between the Scanner and Print Engine. Is the cabling damaged? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
3.
Go to Step 3.
Complete.
Does the problem persist after making the adjustments? 2 Perform the DADF to Scanner Calibration adjustment procedure (ADJ 1.15.1). Does the problem persist? Replace the Scan- Complete. ner Assembly (REP 1.0.11). 3
Go to Step 4.
Complete.
Go to Step 5.
Complete.
5 6
Go to Step 6.
Complete.
Replace the Scan- Replace the Elecner Assembly tronics Module (REP 1.0.11). (REP 5.0.5). If the problem persists, replace the Scanner Assembly.
Image Quality
IQ10, IQ11
09/2007 3-8
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. Check that supported media is being used. Reseat all cable connections between the Scanner Assembly and the Electronics Module. Cycle power to the system.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ12 Fuzzy Text or Image Step Questions and Actions 1 Print the Graphics Demo page for fuzzy image or the Configuration page for fuzzy text. Does the text appear fuzzy? Make a copy of the page printed in Step 1. Does the image still appear fuzzy? Check and/or adjust the Control Panel copy settings. Print the Troubleshooting Print Quality page and evaluate the Output Quality and Color Settings section. Use Text or Mixed print mode to evaluate text. Graphics lose image quality in these two modes. If the system is set to Photo or Graphics mode, text quality decreases. Does the problem persist after making the adjustments? Perform the DADF to Scanner Calibration adjustment procedure (ADJ 1.15.1). Does the problem persist? Scan a copy of the page printed in Step 2. Does the problem persist? Yes No
The problem is Go to Step 2. with the Print Engine. See IQ22. Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4. Go to Step 4. Complete. Figure 1 Random Light Stripes NOTE: If there are discolored jets, as shown in Figure 2, print several solid fill test prints in the affected color. In the following example, the center yellow stripe has discolored jets, therefore you would print the yellow solid fill.
2 3
Go to Step 5.
Complete.
Replace the Scan- Replace the DADF ner Assembly (REP 1.0.15). (REP 1.0.11).
Figure 2 Discolored Jets on the Light Stripes Page Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual
09/2007 3-9
Image Quality
IQ12, IQ13
Initial Actions
1. 2. Check that supported media is being used. Run the Eliminate Light Stripes routine from the Control Panel.
Procedure
NOTE: If the Eliminate Light Stripes page indicates that the missing jets are arranged as 3 side by side or 2 at the end of a row, jet substitution as described in Step 4 will not correct the problem. Table 1 IQ13 Random Light Stripes Step Questions and Actions 1 Run the Eliminate Light Stripes routine from the Control Panel. Multiple attempts are sometimes needed to clear obstructed jets. Does the problem persist? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Clean the Print Engine exit path, and wipe the Go to Step 3. Stripper Blade with a lint-free cloth. Does the problem persist? Remove the Drum Maintenance Kit and wipe the clear plastic Wiper Blade with a lint-free cloth. Does the problem persist?
Complete.
Replace the Main- Complete. tenance Kit. If the problem persists, go to Step 4. Complete.
Figure 1 Example of Predominate Light Stripe Output NOTE: If there are a series of regularly spaced white lines approximately 6 mm (.25 in.) apart, see IQ31.
Select the Jet Substitution Mode. Go to Step 5. 1. On the Control Panel, select Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select Print Quality Problems, and then press the OK button. Select Eliminate Light Stripes, and then press the OK button. Select Jet Substitution Mode, and then press the OK button. Follow the Control Panel prompts to select the color and malfunctioning jet number indicated on the Light Stripes Test page. Follow Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist.
Initial Actions
1. 2. Check that supported media is being used. Run the Eliminate Light Stripes routine from the Control Panel.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ14 Predominate Light Stripes Step Questions and Actions 1 Yes No Complete.
Does the problem persist? 5 Turn off the system for at least 4 hours. Run the Eliminate Light Stripes routine. Does the problem persist? Complete. 2
Clean the Print Engine exit path, and wipe the Go to Step 2. Stripper Blade with a lint-free cloth. Does the problem persist? Remove the Drum Maintenance Kit and wipe the clear plastic Wiper Blade with a lint-free cloth. Does the problem persist?
Replace the Drum Complete. Maintenance Kit. If the problem persists, use IQ13.
NOTE: Air bubbles obstructing jets leading to light stripes generally are absorbed after a few hours, even without purging. Air bubbles can be ingested into the Printhead as a result of a strong shock, such as a tray slam, or during ink cooling and solidification.
Image Quality
IQ13, IQ14
09/2007 3-10
Initial Actions
1. 2. Check that supported media is being used. Verify the settings for media type match the media loaded in the tray.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ16 Printed Image is Too Light or Too Dark Step Questions and Actions 1 Verify that paper type matches the type selected in the driver and by the application. Does the problem persist after making the adjustments? Check and/or adjust the Control Panel print mode settings. 1. Print the Troubleshooting Print Quality page and evaluate the Output Quality and Color Settings section. 2. Use the Lighten/Darken Output Quality adjustment to attempt to correct the problem. Check that the print mode is not set to Draft or Standard. Complete. Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Go to Step 3.
Complete.
Initial Actions
1. 2. Check that supported media is being used. Run the Remove Print Smears routine from the Control Panel.
3.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ15 Smudges or Smears Step Questions and Actions 1 Yes No Complete. 4 Complete. Complete. 3
Does the problem persist? Insert new ink and print solid fill test prints Go to Step 4. until the affected color returns to normal. This could require several ink sticks of the affected color. Does the problem persist? Purge the ink from the affected color up to 10 Replace the Printtimes, checking output every 3 purges until head (REP 2.0.2). the discoloration clears. Does the problem persist?
Clean the Print Engine exit path, and wipe the Go to Step 2. Stripper Blade with a lint-free cloth. Does the problem persist? Run the Remove Print Smears routine. Does the problem persist? Repeat Step 2 up to 3 times if necessary. Load fresh media and reprint the test page. Does the problem persist? Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4.
Complete.
2 3
Remove the Drum Maintenance Kit and wipe Replace the Drum Complete. the clear plastic blade with a lint-free cloth. Maintenance Kit. If Does the problem persist? the problem persists, go to Step 5. Clean the rollers and Stripper Blade. Does the problem persist? Go to Step 6. Complete. Complete
5 6
Check the Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate and Replace the PreCam Rollers for damage or debris. heater (REP Replace any defective parts. 2.0.17). Does the problem persist?
09/2007 3-11
Image Quality
IQ15, IQ16
Initial Actions
1. 2. Check that supported media is being used. Check for media or debris around the Printhead and Drum.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ17 No Image is Printed Step Questions and Actions 1 Yes No Complete.
Follow the instructions on the Printhead Trou- Go to Step 2. bleshooting Checklist. Does the problem persist? Inspect and reseat the Wave Amp and data cables connected to the Printhead. Replace any defective cables. Does the problem persist? Replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5). If the problem persists, replace the Printhead (REP 2.0.2).
Complete. Figure 1 Example of Uneven or Incorrect Color Output NOTE: Using non-Xerox ink may cause unpredictable color results.
Initial Actions
1. 2. Check that supported media is being used. Run the Eliminate Light Stripes routine from the Control Panel.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ18 Color is Uneven or Color is Wrong Step Questions and Actions 1 Yes No Complete.
Clear discolored jets in the Printhead. Go to Step 2. Print a Solid Fill test print for the affected color. Purge the Printhead up to 3 times. If some improvement is seen, the ink could be discolored due to exposure. Replace the affected ink and print another test. Does the problem persist? Remove the Drum Maintenance Kit and wipe the clear plastic Wiper Blade with a lint-free cloth. Does the problem persist?
Replace the Main- Complete. tenance Kit. If the problem persists, go to Step 3.
Image Quality
IQ17, IQ18
09/2007 3-12
Table 1 IQ18 Color is Uneven or Color is Wrong Step Questions and Actions 3 Check thermal regulation of the Drum. Run the Service Diagnostics Drum Thermal test. Are the reported values within range? Check the Drum Fan. Does the fan operate correctly? Check that the Drum Temperature Sensor contacts the Drum. Clean or replace the Drum Temperature Sensor (REP 6.0.4). Does the problem persist? Yes Go to Step 5. No Go to Step 4.
4 5
Go to Step 5.
Replace the Drum Complete. Heater Relay Board (REP 5.0.19). If the problem persists, replace the Drum Assembly (REP 2.0.3), followed by the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5). Figure 1 Example of Streaks and Lines on Output
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. Check that supported media is being used. Check for any dirt, debris or jammed media in the exit path. Run the Remove Print Smears routine from the Control Panel.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ19 Streaks or Lines Down the Print Step Questions and Actions 1 Remove the Drum Maintenance Kit and wipe the clear plastic Wiper Blade with a lint-free cloth. Does the problem persist? Check the exit area, exit frame, Preheater, Drum Maintenance Kit, Printhead and the Stripper Blade to see that nothing is in contact with the Drum. Clean the Stripper Blade. Does the problem persist? Yes No
Replace the Main- Complete. tenance Kit. If the problem persists, go to Step 2. Go to Step 3. Complete.
09/2007 3-13
Image Quality
IQ18, IQ19
Table 1 IQ19 Streaks or Lines Down the Print Step Questions and Actions 4 Yes No Complete.
If streaking or lines occur on only one side of Go to Step 5. a 2-sided print, the Preheater may be scraping ink off the print. Look for ink shavings along the streaks on the print. Clean the Preheater using the Remove Print Smears routine. Does the problem persist? Check for a possible weak or missing jet. Print the Weak or Missing Jet test print. Does the problem persist? Check for a discoloration in a jet. Print the Solid Fill test page for the affected color. Does the problem persist? Check the X-Axis Drive. If the X-Axis Drive does not move the Printhead smoothly, vertical lines appear on the output. Verify that the drive functions normally and that the cabling is properly dressed. Does the X-Axis Drive function correctly? Go to Step 6.
Complete.
Go to Step 7.
Complete.
Go to Step 8.
Figure 1 Example of Scratches on Output Replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5).
Replace the PreCheck the Preheater temperature. Run the Service Diagnostics Duplex Path heater (REP test. 2.0.17). Is the operating temperature of the Preheater within normal range.
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. 4. Check that supported media is being used. Check for a missing jet(s) using the Light Stripes page. Check for any dirt, debris or jammed media in the exit path. Run the Remove Print Smears routine from the Control Panel.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ20 Scratches or Marks Parallel to the Long Axis of Printing Step Questions and Actions 1 Check the exit area, exit frame, Preheater, Drum Maintenance Kit, Printhead and the Stripper Blade to see that nothing is in contact with the Drum. Clean the Stripper Blade. Does the problem persist? Remove the Drum Maintenance Kit and wipe the clear plastic Wiper Blade with a lint-free cloth. Does the problem persist? Using transparency media, print from Tray 1. Does the problem persist? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Replace the Drum Complete. Maintenance Kit. If the problem persists, go to Step 3. Go to Step 4. Go to Step 5.
Image Quality
IQ19, IQ20
09/2007 3-14
Table 1 IQ20 Scratches or Marks Parallel to the Long Axis of Printing Step Questions and Actions 4 Yes No Complete.
The scratch occurred during the pick or trans- Go to Step 5. port process from Trays 2, 3, or 4. Inspect the Pick Guides, Front Door, and Maintenance Kit. Replace or clean parts as needed. Does the problem persist? Check for debris on the Preheater. Run the Service Diagnostics Remove Print Smears routine. Does the problem persist? Force a sheet of thick (65 to 85 lb.) paper through the Preheater. Using care not to damage the sensor actuators, gently buff the heating surface by moving the sheet back and forth through the Preheater. Does the problem persist? Check the paper guides for nicks, cuts, or debris. Are the guides damaged? Go to Step 6.
Complete.
Go to Step 7.
Complete.
Replace damaged Clean all parts in parts. the paper path. Figure 1 Example of Latent Image on Output
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. Check that supported media is being used. Check for any dirt, debris or jammed media in the exit path. Run the Remove Print Smears routine from the Control Panel.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ21 Ink on the White Portion of the Printed Page Step Questions and Actions 1 Yes No Complete.
Try printing using a smoother, higher quality Go to Step 2. paper, some recycled papers are too coarse. Watermarked or punched paper could also cause latent images. Does the problem persist? Remove the Drum Maintenance Kit and wipe the clear plastic Wiper Blade with a lint-free cloth. Does the problem persist? Clean the Stripper Blade. Run the Service Diagnostics Remove Print Smears routine. Does the problem persist?
Replace the Drum Complete. Maintenance Kit. If the problem persists, go to Step 3. Go to Step 4. Complete.
09/2007 3-15
Image Quality
IQ20, IQ21
Table 1 IQ21 Ink on the White Portion of the Printed Page Step Questions and Actions 4 Yes No Complete.
Check the thermal regulation of the Drum. Go to Step 5. Run the Service Diagnostics temperature tests. Replace the Drum Temperature Sensor (REP 6.0.4), if necessary. Does the problem persist? Check for dust or debris on the Feed Rollers. Follow Printhead Run the Service Diagnostics Remove Print Troubleshooting Smears routine. Checklist. Replace the rollers (REP 3.0.18), if necessary. Does the problem persist?
Complete.
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. Check that supported media is being used. Check for any dirt, debris or jammed media in the exit path. Run the Remove Print Smears routine from the Control Panel.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ22 Fuzzy Text Step Questions and Actions 1 Yes No Complete.
Try printing using a smoother, higher quality Go to Step 2. paper, some recycled papers are too coarse. Watermarked or punched paper could also cause latent images. Does the problem persist?
Image Quality
IQ21, IQ22
09/2007 3-16
Table 1 IQ22 Fuzzy Text Step Questions and Actions 2 3 Use a higher quality print mode. Does the problem persist? Check that the dot on the Printhead Roll Block is aligned with the label of the left side of the frame. See Figure 7. Adjust the position of the dot if necessary. Does the problem persist? Yes Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4. No Complete. Complete.
Check the thermal regulation of the Drum. Go to Step 5. Run the Service Diagnostics temperature tests. Replace the Drum Temperature Sensor (REP 6.0.4), if necessary. Does the problem persist? Check Y-Axis motion. Run the Service Diagnostics Y-Axis Encoder test. Does the problem persist? Check X-Axis motion. Follow the White Stripes (Pinstripes) procedure to correct an X-Axis problem. Does the problem persist? Check that the Printhead is tilted forward against the Drum in proper print position. Realign the Printhead if necessary. Does the problem persist? Go to Step 6.
Complete.
Complete.
Go to Step 7.
Initial Actions
Follow Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist. Complete. 1. 2. 3. Check that supported media is being used. Check for any dirt, debris or jammed media in the exit path. Run several solid fill test prints in the affected color.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ23 Poor Primary Color Fill Step Questions and Actions 1 Yes No Complete.
Banded or inconsistent primary fills may indi- Go to Step 2. cate a missing, weak, or discolored jet. Print the Weak/Missing Jet test print. If there are discolored jets, print the Solid Fill test print for the affected color. Does the problem persist? Test the Y-Axis Encoder. Run the Service Diagnostics Encoder test. Does the problem persist?
Replace the Drum Complete. Assembly (REP 2.0.3). If the problem persists, go to Step 3.
09/2007 3-17
Image Quality
IQ22, IQ23
Table 1 IQ23 Poor Primary Color Fill Step Questions and Actions 3 If banding is uniform, or in a corduroy pattern, check the X-Axis motion. Run the Service Diagnostics X-Axis Motor tests. Is X-Axis motion impeded? If so, use the White Stripes (Pinstripes) procedure to troubleshoot the problem. Does the problem persist? Try the procedure listed under the Solid Fill test prints. Does the problem persist? Yes No
IQ24 Ghosting
This RAP addresses image quality problems associated with the Print Engine. Ghosting typically results from stacked prints, faulty or expended Drum Maintenance Kit, or Drum thermal regulation. Ghosting is indicated by images from a previous print appearing on subsequent prints as follows:
Replace the X-Axis Complete. Motor (REP 4.0.5). If the problem persists, replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5).
Complete.
Initial Actions
1. 2. Check that supported media is being used. Check the Drum Maintenance Kit.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ24 Ghosting Step Questions and Actions 1 Yes No Complete.
This problem can occur when prints are Go to Step 2. stacked in the Output Tray. The resulting pressure, and system heat causes blocking which has the appearance of ghosting. Print the Weak/Missing Jet test print. If there are discolored jets, print the Solid Fill test print for the affected color. Does the problem persist? Run multiple, 2-sided prints. Some amount of Go to Step 3. Transfix Roller ghosting is inherent to the system. This type of ghosting is most pronounced on the first 2-sided print. Ghosting should fade on subsequent prints. Does the problem persist?
Complete.
Image Quality
IQ23, IQ24
09/2007 3-18
Table 1 IQ24 Ghosting Step Questions and Actions 3 Check and clean the Drum Maintenance Kit Wiper Blade. Replace the kit if necessary. Run the Service Diagnostics X-Axis tests. Does the problem persist? Test the Drum Maintenance system. Run the Service Diagnostics maintenance system tests. Does the problem persist? Check these Drum maintenance system parts for damage or defects: Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate Drum Maintenance Cam Shaft Is there any damage? Test the Drum temperature regulation. Run the Service Diagnostics Drum temperature tests. Check the Drum Temperature Sensor. Does the problem persist? Yes Go to Step 4. No Complete.
Go to Step 5.
Complete.
Replace any dam- Go to Step 6. aged parts. If the problem persists, go to Step 6. Replace the Drum Complete. Temperature Sensor (REP 6.0.4).
Initial Actions
1. 2. Check that supported media is being used. Check the Drum Maintenance Kit.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ25 Poor Small Text Resolution Step Questions and Actions 1 2 Try using a higher quality print mode. Does the problem persist? Test the Drum temperature regulation. Run the Service Diagnostics Drum temperature tests. Check the Drum Temperature Sensor. Does the problem persist? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Replace the Drum Complete. Temperature Sensor (REP 6.0.4). If the problem persists, got to Step 3.
Check the X-Axis Drive installation and lubri- Replace the X-Axis Complete. cation? Motor (REP 4.0.5). Does the problem persist?
09/2007 3-19
Image Quality
IQ24, IQ25
Figure 1 Example of Wavy Vertical Lines on Output Figure 1 Example of Oil Streaks on Output
Initial Actions
1. 2. Check that supported media is being used. Check the Drum Maintenance Kit.
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. Check that supported media is being used. Check the Drum Maintenance Kit. Run the Remove Print Smears routine.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ26 Vertical Lines Appear Wavy Step Questions and Actions 1 Check and clean the Drum Maintenance Kit Wiper Blade. Does the problem persist? Check X-Axis motion. Verify that there is nothing interfering with XAxis motion. Replace any defective parts found. Does the problem persist? Check Y-Axis motion. Run the Service Diagnostics Y-Axis Encoder test. Does the problem persist? Check the Drum maintenance Cam Roller and Pivot Plate are functioning correctly. Run the Service Diagnostics Drum Maintenance tests. Does the problem persist? Yes No
Procedure
Table 1 IQ27 Oil Streaks on Print Step Questions and Actions 1 Check and clean the Drum Maintenance Kit Wiper Blade. Does the problem persist? Yes No
Replace the Drum Complete. Maintenance Kit. If the problem persists, go to Step 2. Go to Step 3. Complete.
Replace the Drum Complete. Maintenance Kit. If the problem persists, go to Step 2. Complete.
Go to Step 4.
Complete.
Check the Drum Maintenance Kit ground con- Go to Step 3. nection. Verify that the ground connection is secure between the Drum Maintenance Shaft and Drum Fan. Does the problem persist? Run the Remove Print Smears routine. Does the problem persist? Clean the Stripper Blade and Exit Guides. Does the problem persist? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 5.
Complete. Complete.
Image Quality
IQ26, IQ27
09/2007 3-20
Table 1 IQ27 Oil Streaks on Print Step Questions and Actions 5 Check that the Drum Maintenance Cam Roller and Pivot Plate are functioning correctly. Run the Service Diagnostics Drum Maintenance tests. Does the problem persist? Yes Replace any defective parts found. No Complete.
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. Check that supported media is being used. Check the Drum Maintenance Kit. Run the Remove Print Smears routine.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ28 Incomplete Image Transfer Step Questions and Actions 1 2 Tray using a higher quality print mode. Does the problem persist? Check that the Drum maintenance Cam Roller and Pivot Plate are functioning correctly. Run the Service Diagnostics Drum Maintenance tests. Does the problem persist? Clean the Stripper Blade and Exit Guides. Does the problem persist? Test the Drum temperature regulation. Run the Service Diagnostics Drum temperature tests. Check the Drum Temperature Sensor. Does the problem persist? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Replace any Complete. defective parts found. If the problem persists, go to Step 3. Go to Step 4. Complete.
3 4
Replace the Drum Complete. Temperature Sensor (REP 6.0.4). If the problem persists, go to Step 3.
09/2007 3-21
Image Quality
IQ27, IQ28
Table 1 IQ28 Incomplete Image Transfer Step Questions and Actions 5 Yes No Complete.
Is the image incomplete of only the sides of Go to Step 6. the print? This indicates incomplete Transfix Cam rotation. Check for a damaged Transfix Cam Roller or a malfunction of the Process Drive. Replace any damaged parts found. Does the problem persist?
Check the Preheater temperature. Replace the Trans- Complete. Run the Service Diagnostics Preheater tests. fix Load Module Does the problem persist? (REP 2.0.15) and Transfix Load Arms.
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. Check that supported media is being used. Check the Drum Maintenance Kit. Run the Remove Print Smears routine.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ29 Ink Smears on First Side of Duplex Print Step Questions and Actions 1 2 Clean the Stripper Blade and Exit Guides. Does the problem persist? Check the duplex paper path for damage, obstructions, or contamination. Clean or replace parts as necessary. Does the problem persist? Run the Remove Print Smears routine. Does the problem persist? Yes Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3. No Complete. Complete.
3 4
Go to Step 4.
Complete.
Check the Preheater temperature. Replace the PreComplete. Run the Service Diagnostics Preheater tests. heater (REP Does the problem persist? 2.0.17). If the problem persists, replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5).
Image Quality
IQ28, IQ29
09/2007 3-22
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. Check that supported media is being used. Print several test prints as a sample. Measure the interval between defects and note their position.
Initial Actions
1. 2. Check that supported media is being used. Print several solid-fill test prints as a sample.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ31 White Stripes (Pinstripes)
Procedure
Table 1 IQ30 Repeating Print Defects Step Questions and Actions 1 Repeating defects that occur every 11.6 cm (4.58 in.) are caused by the Transfix Roller. Clean or replace the Transfix Roller as needed. Does the problem persist? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete. 1 2
Step Questions and Actions Print several solid-fill test prints. Does the problem persist? Check the X-Axis motion. Are there any obstructions, such as cables, screws, or damaged parts? Check Printhead motion. Is there any interference with the horizontal motion of the Printhead? Does the problem persist?
Yes Go to Step 2. Correct the interference. If the problem persists, go to Step 3. Correct the interference.
No Complete. Go to Step 3.
A repeating defect that has a different Y posi- Replace the Drum Complete. tion on each page, but has the same X posi- Assembly (REP tion indicates a defect on the Drum. 2.0.3). Clean the Drum. Does the problem persist?
09/2007 3-23
Image Quality
IQ30, IQ31
IQ32 Wrinkling
This RAP addresses image quality problems associated with the Print Engine. Wrinkling generally appears in areas of solid fill near the image edge. This problem is more often seen on short-grain media. Some wrinkling of envelope flaps is expected. You may see wrinkling on the second side of a 2-sided print on the secondary colors. Wrinkling could indicate a malfunction in the Transfix mechanism.
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. Check that supported media is being used. Print an Information page from the Control Panel. Check the application print settings.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ33 Image is Offset or Cut-Off Step Questions and Actions 1 2 3 Check the Information page. Does the problem persist? Check the tray guide adjustment. Are the guides adjusted properly? Yes Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3. No Complete. Adjust the guides. Complete.
Check the application for correct image sizing Correct the appliand orientation. cation settings. Does the problem persist?
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. Check that supported media is being used. Print several solid-fill test prints as a sample. Print using a higher-quality or heavier media type.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ32 Wrinkling Step Questions and Actions 1 2 Increase the margin size of the image. Does the problem persist? Check the Drum Maintenance Kit. Inspect, clean, or replace the Drum Maintenance Kit. Does the problem persist? Check the Transfix components. Does the problem persist? Yes Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3. No Complete. Complete.
Replace in this order: Complete. Transfix Roller Transfix Camshaft Transfix Load Arms Transfix Load Module
Image Quality
IQ32, IQ33
09/2007 3-24
Initial Actions
1. 2. 3. Check that supported media is being used. Print an Information page from the Control Panel. Check the application print settings.
Procedure
Table 1 IQ34 Poor Ink Adhesion, Poor Image Durability Step Questions and Actions 1 Check the media type and finish. If the media appears glossy, replace the media and reprint. Does the problem persist? Yes Go to Step 2. No Complete.
Check the Preheater and Drum temperatures. Go to Step 3. Run the Service Diagnostics Temperature test. Are the temperatures within specified ranges (approximately 60 to 62 degrees Celsius)? Check the position of the Drum Temperature Sensor. Is the sensor positioned properly? Go to Step 4.
Initial Actions
Inspect the Printhead for Ink overflow, blockage of the Purge Hose, or accumulations of ink underneath the Printhead.
Procedure
If ink has been overflowing the Printhead reserviors, replace the Printhead.
09/2007 3-25
Image Quality
IQ34, IQ35
Figure 1 Test Print 1 Weak or Missing Jet Look for: No interlacing is used in this print: expect light/dark variation between jets. Use Look for much lighter colored vertical bands in the horizontal bars. Weak jets in the yellow band are distinguished by a cyan tint. Causes: A jet may be partially clogged. Perform printhead clean/purge cycles on the printhead to remove contaminants from the poorly-performing jet. Run a jet fix cycle by downloading the snippet from the customer support site. If jet substitution mode is required, see Jet Substitution Mode. Test the purge system and the wiper blade performance. Turn the system off for 4 to 6 hours (or overnight, if practical). Then perform a clean/purge cycle again. There may be a problem in the Purge Pump assembly or the wiper assembly may not be compliant. Verify that the printer is using Xerox ink. Follow the instructions on the Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist.
Figure 3 Test Print 3 Color Bands Image Quality Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual
09/2007 3-26
Reverse Text
The print indicates if the printhead is producing properly-sized drops of ink and that the drum temperature is not too high. NOTE: This print should be made with the system covers closed and in place. The heat loss without the covers can hide the too-hot thermal problem. Also print the test print in Enhanced print mode. Look for: Legibility in the lines of 6-point text, particularly in the primary colors. If the letters are closed or badly plugged with ink, the printhead is laying down too much ink. A good-quality print shows five vertical parallel lines of different thicknesses on the left and right side of the print. If the thinnest line is missing, the printhead is outputting too much ink or the drum temperature is too high. NOTE: Ensure that the system is not in High Resolution/Photo or Standard print mode. Causes: Check the thermal regulation of the printhead and of the drum. Make sure that the drum temperature sensor is correctly mounted and in proper, even contact with the drum. If necessary, remove the sensor and check it for an accumulation of debris at its contact point. Replace the drum temperature sensor. Ensure the Printhead drive voltage is set to the default 128. Figure 5 Test Print 5 Big Bands OHP
09/2007 3-27
Image Quality
If there is ink on the top and bottom margin of the page or ink on the back of the page, it may be caused by the roller remaining down during the print. You may hear an unusual noise if the Transfix Roller stays down and rubs against the drum. Inspect the Drive Train and ensure that it self-homes between prints. The drive train is in its home position when the two 1.5 mm holes found on the clear plastic cover align axially with corresponding holes in the gear. Another way to verify that the drive train is in its home position is to verify that the two small leaf springs from the clear plastic cover are seated correctly in their corresponding gear slots. Inspect the perimeter of the cam lobes for surface defects and check to see that the angular orientations of the cams match. Inspect the transfix load arm return springs. Verify that the maintenance kit returns home between prints. Inspect the cam shaft surfaces for damage. If all of these items are working correctly, replace the Process Drive module.
Figure 7 YMCKRGB Solid Fill Test Prints Figure 6 Grey Fill, Dot Size Uniformity Test Print Causes: Weak jets or improper Drum heating can cause uneven fills. To solve wrinkling, try different print media. Replace the maintenance kit to correct streaking. Check the drum temperature sensor for debris build-up on the sensor. Check to see if the sensor is in improper contact with the drum. See the Reverse Text test print. As a last resort to fix wrinkling, replace the Transfix Roller, transfix load module, and transfix load arm. If there is poor transfer on one side, check to see if the transfix load arm assemblies are moving easily. Clean any contamination that may be interfering with the transfix arm assembly movement. If either of the transfix load arm assemblies are worn, replace the worn load arm assembly. If there are repeating white stripes on the print, there may be a problem with the X-Axis motion, see IQ31.
Drum Seal
This print is used by manufacturing and Engineering only.
Paper Path
This print is used by Manufacturing and Engineering only.
Image Quality
09/2007 3-28
Lines: The horizontal lines of the print are made up of long and short dashes. Inspect the first and last 1/2 in. (12 mm) of the black lines for the vertical distance between the short dashes and long dashes. A difference indicates the printhead gaps at each end of the printhead are not equal. Text: Examine each end of the band of text. Look for fuzziness or differences between the quality of the characters on the left and right ends of the print. A difference indicates the printhead gaps at each end of the printhead are not equal. The ends of this systems printhead rests on two spacers on the ends of the drum that hold the head-to-drum gap under much tighter control than in previous solid ink systems. There is no head-to-drum adjustment possible in this system. If the gap is suspect, check that the printhead is correctly and completely installed.
Figure 9 Single Primary Solid Fill Test Prints Look for: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. Even, uniform fills throughout the print. There should be no wrinkling or deformity of the paper throughout the print. Poor transfer on one side. Repeating white stripes. Weak jets or uneven drum heating may cause uneven fills To solve wrinkling, try different print media. Replace the maintenance kit to correct streaking. Check the drum-temperature sensor for debris build-up on the sensor or the sensor is not in proper contact with the drum. See the test print Reverse Text. If there is poor transfer, check to see if the transfix load arm assemblies are moving easily. Clean any contamination that may be interfering with the transfix arm assembly movement. If either of the transfix load arm assemblies are worn, replace the worn load arm assembly. If there are repeating white stripes on the print, there may be a problem with the X-Axis motion.
Causes:
3.
4.
Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow Solid Fills
These single-sided test prints show the uniformity of fill for an individual color. They are also used to purge discoloration of a particular jet or color.
09/2007 3-29
Image Quality
Transfix Roller defects do not move in the X-direction, but these defects repeat every 4.58 in. (11.63 cm) down the length of the page. Many Transfix Roller defects are the most visible on duplex solid fills.
Banding
This print is used by Manufacturing.
Head Roll
This print is used by Manufacturing.
For Margins Measure from the magenta frame to the edge of the paper at the midpoint on the top and left-edge margin (right side of paper, left side of system) of the paper. The tolerance for margin is the margin +/- 2. See the Media Margin Specifications. NOTE: The measurement for skew and margin for Side 1 and Side 2 may not match Check that the media is support for the tray and the guides are properly adjusted. If you have skew on simplex prints: In Trays 2, 3, or 4, check for a worn Take Away Roller or Pick Roller. In Tray 1, check for a worn Pick Roller. This test print uses the tray selected in Paper Source on the Paper Handling Menu. If you have skew on duplex prints, check for a worn Duplex Roller an verify that the Front Door is completely closed and latched on both the left and right sides. If the lead-edge margins are outside of tolerance, check the Preheater flag.
Head Height
This print is used by Manufacturing.
X Dot Position
This print is used by Manufacturing and Engineering.
Y Dot Position
This print is used by Manufacturing and Engineering.
Chase Pages
A blank piece of paper is used to remove contamination from the Drum, Transfix Roller, and media path.
Purge Efficiency
This print is used by Manufacturing and Engineering.
Cleaning Page
This page is automatically printed following a purge. It is used to flush the jet nozzles of any possible contamination or color mixed jets. It can also be printed on its own.
Image Quality
09/2007 3-30
Figure 1 Jet Substitution Exceptions Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual 09/2007 3-31 Image Quality
After substituting a jet, print the Light Stripes Test page to verify Jet Substitution mode is enabled for the correct jet. A Service Mode key, at the bottom of the page, summarizes the number of substituted jets for each color. Other options on the Eliminate Light Stripes menu are: Light Stripes Test prints the Light Stripes page. Use this to detect weak, missing, or discolored jets. Basic initiates a cleaning cycle followed by a Cleaning page. Advanced requests a jet color and number, and then attempts to purge the jet by printing five, double-sided pages using a range of jets and color that include the affected jet. After the purge pages, the system performs a cleaning cycle, prints the Cleaning page, and prints a Light Stripes page.
NOTE: The Configuration page indicates the date when the service mode was entered. The Printer Status page provides a list of jets in Substitution Mode.
Image Quality
09/2007 3-32
09/2007 4-1
09/2007 4-2
Disassembly Overview
This section contains the removal procedures for field-replaceable parts listed in the Parts List. In most cases, the replacement procedure is simply the reverse of the removal procedure. In some instances, additional steps are necessary and are provided for replacement of the parts.
Preparation
CAUTION Following reassembly, but before restoring power, be sure the components are all in their home positions, otherwise damage to the printer will occur. Refer to the Adjustment procedures at the end of this section, for procedures on setting components to thier home positions. Before you begin any removal procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. Switch Off the printer power and disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet Disconnect all computer interface cables from the system. Wear an electrostatic discharge wrist strap to help prevent damage to the sensitive electronics of the printer circuit boards. Allow adequate time for the system to cool.
WARNING
Unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet before servicing the system.
NOTE: Names of parts that appear in the removal and replacement procedures may not match the names that appear in the Parts List. For example, a part called the Registration Chute Assembly in a removal procedure may appear on the Parts List as Assembly, Chute REGI.
09/2007 4-3
Disassembly Overview
Fastener Types
CAUTION Screws in plastic are torqued to 12 in. lbs., metal to 15 in lbs., unless otherwise specified. The screws for the Printhead Restraints should be torqued to 6 in. lbs. Irreversible damage can result from over tightening the screws into plastic parts. Always use the correct type and size screw. Using the wrong screw can damage tapped holes.
Follow these guidlines for fasteners in this product: Always use the correct type and size screw; coarse thread, brass-colored screws into plastic and fine thread, silver-colored screws into metal. Using the wrong screw can damage tapped holes. This applies to the yellow reversethreaded screws on the Drum. Do not use excessive force to remove or install either a screw or a printer part. If using a power driver to install a screw into plastic, start the screw by hand. If you strip out threads in the plastic chassis, a silver-blue-tinted thread repair screw (included in the hardware kit) can be used to correct the problem. If you remove a silver-blue-tinted thread repair screw during disassembly, replace the screw the same location or additional damage to the printer will occur.
Fasteners used in the product appear in Figure 2. Removal procedures include dimensional specifications for screws being removed. CAUTION Many parts are secured by plastic tabs or hooks. Do not over Flex or force these parts.
Disassembly Overview
09/2007 4-4
Figure 1 Output Paper Tray Retaining Tabs 2. Figure 1 Releasing the Front Door Stopper Straps 2. 3. 4. Open the plug cover and disconnect P/J650 from the right side of the Front Door . Release the wiring from cable retainers. Remove the Front Door (Tray 1/MPT) by releasing the left hinge pin from the frame and sliding the door to the right. Spread the left and right sides of the Output Tray to release the 2 tabs on the bottom.
09/2007 4-5
Figure 1 Removing the Left Side Cover 5. 6. 7. Release the tab near the top of the cover using a flat-blade screwdriver. Release the tabs along the front of the cover that secure it to the Exit Module. Pull outward on the front of the cover to release it from the frame.
Replacement
Insert the 3 tabs along the bottom edge of the cover into the slots in the frame before snapping the cover into place.
09/2007 4-6
1. 2. 3.
Remove the DADF (REP 1.0.15). Disconnect the Scanner from the printer. Place the Scanhead in the locked position for removal.
Figure 1 Unlocking the Scanner Hinges 4. 5. 6. Release the hinge latches using a screwdriver or pen. Slide the Scanner towards the back, and then lift to remove it from the printer. Remove the 4 (plastic T-20) screws that secure each hinge to the assembly.
09/2007 4-7
REP 1.0.8
1. 2. 3.
Remove the DADF (REP 1.0.15). Place the Scanhead in the locked position for removal. Disconnect the Scanner from the system.
Figure 1 Removing the 8860MFP Control Panel Figure 1 Unlocking the Scanner Hinges 3. 4. Release the tab at each end of the Control Panel, then release the remaining 4 tabs along the front edge to access the Control Panel connector. Disconnect P/J19 and remove the Control Panel from the Scanner. 4. 5. Release the hinge latches using a screwdriver or pen. Slide the Scanner towards the back, and then lift to remove it from the printer.
Replacement
NOTE: Failure to adequately secure the Scanner cable connection to the Rear Panel can result in sporadic Scanner errors. Seat the Scanner connector completely using the connectors two thumbscrews.
09/2007 4-8
Figure 1 DADF Front Cover Fasteners 3. Close and latch the DADF Input Chute. Figure 2 DADF Front Cover Removal 4. Lift the DADF Front Cover to remove.
09/2007 4-9
REP 1.0.13
NOTE: If a replacement DADF is being installed, recalibrate the Scanner using ADJ 1.15.1.
Replacement
NOTE: Failure to adequately secure the DADF cable connection to the Scanner Assembly can result in sporadic DADF errors. Seat the DADF connector completely using the connectors two thumbscrews.
09/2007 4-10
Figure 1 Removing the Right Side Cover 5. 6. 7. Release the tab near the top of the cover using a flat-blade screwdriver. Release the tabs along the front of the cover that secure it to the Exit Module. Pull outward at the front of the cover to release it from the frame.
Replacement
Insert the 3 tabs, located along the bottom edge of the cover, into the slots provided in the frame before snapping the cover into place.
09/2007 4-11
Replacement
Figure 1 Removing the Control Panel Cover CAUTION Use care during reassembly to avoid damaging the connections on the underside of of the Control Panel.
09/2007 4-12
Replacement
The Ink Loader data harness comes from the side of the chassis and plugs directly into the Ink Loader. After replacing the Ink Loader, reset the ink stick count, using the Hidden Service Menu. Perform these steps while replacing the Ink Loader. Figure 1 Removing the Exit Cover 1. 2. 3. Secure the Ink Loader harness in the retainer clip provided on the Ink Loader, and connect P/J0150. Route the Ink Loader Power harness towards the left side and connect P/J5. Transfer the Ink Sticks to the replacement Ink Loader.
Replacement
Lift the Upper Exit Guide slightly, and engage the pins on the Upper Exit Guide with the slots on the Exit Cover before inserting the cover hinge pins into the pivot points in the printer frame. Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual
09/2007 4-13
09/2007 4-14
Figure 1 Raising the Media Path Elevator 5. Press the left and right sides of the assembly inward, then lift to access the 2 connectors.
Figure 2 Removing the Ink Loader 6. 7. Disconnect the Ink Loader Power harness P/J5 from the Electronics Module. Remove the Ink Loader harness from the retaining clip on the right side, and then disconnect the harness P/J0150 from the Ink Loader to remove the Ink Loader.
Replacement
Perform these steps while replacing the Ink Loader. 1. Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual 09/2007 4-15 Raise the Media Path Elevator before inserting the assembly. Repairs and Adjustments
REP 2.0.1
2. 3. 4.
Secure the Ink Loader harness in the retainer clip provided on the Ink Loader, and connect P/J0150. Route the Ink Loader Power harness towards the left side and connect P/J5. Transfer the Ink Sticks to the replacement Ink Loader.
WARNING
Allow adequate time for the system to cool before servicing. The Roll Block that retains the Printhead Shaft remains hot longer than other nearby components. CAUTION To prevent the Printhead from contacting the Drum while releasing the restraints, move the Printhead away from the Drum using the process described in ADJ 2.2.1. CAUTION Perform the Printhead removal steps in the order given and use the Printhead finger recesses to lift the Printhead from the chassis. Do not touch the Printhead jetstack. NOTE: These steps describe Printhead removal for the 8860MFP. On 8860 models, access the Printhead by removing the Ink Loader (REP 1.1.8). Afterwards, return to this procedure and begin at Step 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the Scanner Assembly with attached DADF (REP 1.0.11) Remove the Output Tray (REP 1.0.6). Remove the Right Side Cover (REP 1.0.21). Remove the Left Side Cover (REP 1.0.7). Remove the Ink Loader (REP 2.0.1). Place several sheets of paper between the Printhead and Drum to protect the Drum. Unlock the Printhead Wiper Assembly by raising the Lock.
09/2007 4-16
Figure 1 Releasing the Printhead Wiper Lock 8. Lower the Printhead Wiper Assembly completely by rotating the Wiper drive gears as shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2 Lowering the Printhead Wiper Assembly 9. Move the Printhead Tilt Spring from its position on the Printhead and hook it behind itself as shown in Figure 3.
09/2007 4-17
REP 2.0.2
Figure 3 Releasing the Printhead Tilt Spring. 10. Pull the X-Axis Bias Spring and Hook out slightly, and then rotate downward to allow it to rest in detents provided on the frame. See Figure 4. Figure 4 X-Axis Bias Spring Hook 11. Disconnect the Air Hose from the Purge Pump. 12. Remove the left and right Printhead Restraints. To remove the restraints, remove 1 (plastic, T-20) screw that secures each restraint, and then shift the restraint inwards toward the Printhead while lifting toward the rear of the printer.
REP 2.0.2
09/2007 4-18
Figure 5 Removing the Printhead Restraint Screws NOTE: Adjust the Printhead along its X-Axis as needed using a small screwdriver inserted in the slot on the X-Axis Motor to allow removal of the Printhead Restraints. Figure 7 Removing the Roll Block NOTE: The check mark on the label indicates the proper orientation of the Roll Block. 14. Disconnect the Printhead Heater Harness P/J3 and free the harness from the restraint.
Figure 6 Removing the Printhead Restraints 13. Remove the Roll Block on the left end of the Printhead Shaft.
09/2007 4-19
REP 2.0.2
18. Disconnect the remaining 2 ribbon cables P/J180 and P/J240 from the Printhead.
Figure 8 Printhead Electrical Connections 15. Remove the 2 (metal, T-20) screws that secure the Ground Strap. 16. Push the Air Hose into the chassis. 17. Lift the Printhead, using the finger recesses as shown in Figure 11, and place the ends of the shaft in the cradle notches provided near the top of the frame as shown in Figure 9.
Figure 10 Printhead Cable Connections 19. Remove the Printhead as shown in Figure 11, using the Finger recesses provided.
Figure 9 Printhead Cradle Notch Location NOTE: Unlock the connectors before disconnecting the ribbon cables.
REP 2.0.2
09/2007 4-20
12. Install the Ink Loader. 13. Perform ADJ 4.13.1 to home the Head Tilt Gear. 14. Reassemble the remaining components, and turn system power on. 15. Print the Light Stripes page. Check for jets in Service mode. If necessary, use the Control Panel to reset the jet substitution. 16. Package the defective Printhead and completed Printhead Checklist in the replacement parts packaging.
Replacement
Follow these steps to install the replacement Printhead. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Set the Head Tilt Gear to its home position by performing ADJ 4.13.1. Lower the Wiper Assembly to the bottom of its travel. Rest the Printhead in the Cradle Notches while attaching the 2 ribbon cables. Seat and lock the Ribbon Cables (P/J180 and P/J240) in their respective sockets. Lower the Printhead into its mounts. The Printhead should tilt forward in the print position. Route the Purge Pump Hose through the frame and connect it to the Purge Pump. Install the Roll Block on the left end of the Printhead Shaft. Orient the Roll Black as shown on the label attached to the frame (Figure 7). The Red check mark indicates the correct orientation. Properly route and reconnect the Printhead Heater Harness (P/J4). NOTE: Errors 7009 and 4025 are often the result of Printhead interference by the Printhead Heater Harness. Make certain the harness is properly restrained and does not obstruct Printhead movement. 9. Install the 2 (metal, T-20) screws that secure the Ground Strap.
8.
10. Install the left and right Printhead Restraints. Tighten the screws to 6 in. lb. to avoid stripping the chassis threads. Check that the restraints do not obstruct the Roll Block. Also, make sure the Tilt Spring on the left restraint is properly positioned in the notch on the back of the Printhead and does not pinch the Purge Pump Hose. 11. Set the X-Axis Bias Hook and spring on the left end of the Printhead Shaft. See Figure 4. Ensure the point of the hook is centered in the shaft and the rest of the hook floats freely. Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual Repairs and Adjustments
09/2007 4-21
REP 2.0.2
10. Remove the Transfix Load Module (REP 2.0.15). 11. Remove the Media Drive Gearbox (REP 4.0.14). 12. Remove the Y-Axis Belt (REP 2.0.4). Relieve tension on the belt by pulling the end of the Spring Arm toward the front. With the tension released, slide the belt off the pulley. 13. Disconnect the Drum Fan P/J118 from the Right Side Harness and release the fan harness from the retainer on the Process Drive. 14. Remove 3 (plastic, T-20) screws that secure the fan to the Drum. Note the location of the Ground Plate behind the fan Figure 1 Drum Fan Mounting 15. Unplug the Drum Heater Harness P/J200 from the Relay Board and free the harness from the retaining hook.
REP 2.0.3
09/2007 4-22
Figure 2 Disconnecting the Drum 16. Disconnect the Drum Encoder harness P/J120 from the Right Side Harness and release the cable from the restraint. 17. Remove 3 (metal, 5.5 mm hex-head) screws, 2 washers, and the Ground Plate from the right side of the Drum Assembly as shown in Figure 3. These are reverse-threaded screws as indicated on the label attached to the Drum.
Figure 3 Removing the Drum Assembly 18. Remove 3 (metal, T-20) screws and 3 washers from the left side of the Drum Assembly. NOTE: Do not rest the Drum Assembly on the pulley. Allow the pulley to overhang the surface and rest the assembly on its feet. 19. Lift the Drum Assembly straight out of the chassis using the metal grips provided.
Replacement
CAUTION The Drum Temperature Sensor harness is routed through the Exit Module. Use care when reinstalling to avoid damaging the sensor. NOTE: To help seat the Drum properly, steps 2-6 provide an explicit order of placement for installing the screws to secure the Drum Assembly to the chassis. 1. 2. 3. 4. Seat the Drum Assembly into the chassis. Align the screw holes in the left and right sides of the Drum Assembly to the holes in the chassis sides. Install 1 (metal, T-20) screw and washer at the rear position on the left side to hold the Drum Assembly and torque the screw to 25 in.-lbs. Install the remaining (metal, T-20) screws and washers into the left side of the Drum Assembly and torque to 25 in.-lbs.
09/2007 4-23
REP 2.0.3
5. 6.
Install 1 (metal, hex-head) screw and washer at the rear position on the right-side to hold the Drum Assembly and torque the screw to 25 in.-lbs. Install the remaining (metal, hex-head) screws into the bottom location (without a washer) and the front location (with a washer and Ground Plate) on the right side of the Drum Assembly and torque to 25 in.-lbs. Pull outward on the left Drum Assembly handle and the right chassis side to spread the chassis and seat the left Drum bearing. Replace the Drum Temperature Sensor. Replace the Transfix Load Module, Ground Strap, and Preheater Lift Solenoid.
NOTE: After installing the Exit Module, perform the Wiper Alignment (ADJ 2.5.1). The printer may report error 7,009.4x if the Wiper is misaligned.
7. 8. 9.
10. Align the clevis on the Transfix Load Arms with the holes in the mounting ears on the Drum Assembly. The Transfix Load Arms should point in the opposite direction as the Drum Thermistor. Position the Cam Followers on the Transfix Load Arms under the Transfix Cams. 11. Insert the Clevis Pins through the clevis and the mounting ears on the Drum Assembly (insert the pins from the outside). Check that the o-ring on each Clevis Pin is inside the chassis. 12. Align the Exit Module to the chassis and re-route the Drum Temperature Sensor harness through the opening provided. Seat the Exit Module in the chassis by first engaging the 2 front locating pins, and then the rear locating pins. 13. Inset and torque to 12 in-lbs. the 6 Exit Module screws. On 8860 models, the Exit Module is secured with 4 screws torqued to 12 in-lbs.
REP 2.0.3
09/2007 4-24
Figure 6 Attaching the Transfix Load Module Arm Cam Springs Figure 5 8860MFP Exit Module Left Side Fasteners 14. Apply a small quantity of Rheolube 768 grease (P/N 070E00890) to the groove on the Transfix Load Arms. NOTE: Ensure that you lever the Spring Cam towards the center of the printer. Applying pressure in the wrong direction can damage the Transfix Load Module. 15. Insert a T-20 Torx bit through the right side slotted hole in the Transfix Load Module. Engage the hole at the back of the module, and lever the modules spring cam towards the center of the system while connecting the spring hooks to the Transfix Load Arms. Repeat this process for the left side. 16. Pull the lower end of the Y-Axis Spring Arm toward the front of the system and install the Y-Axis Belt first on the motor pulley, and then on the drum pulley. Align the grooves of the belt with those on the motor pulley. Check that the cross-ribs are away from the pulleys. 17. Connect the Media Drive Assembly harnesses. 18. Connect the Drum Heater harness P/J200 to the Relay Board. 19. Connect the Drum Encoder harness P/J120 to the Right Side Harness. 20. Connect the Drum Temperature Sensor to the I/O Board P/J870. 21. Dress the left side cabling into the retainers in the frame. Secure the Drum Heater and Drum Encoder harnesses under the retainer located on the Process Drive. 22. Install the Drum Fan and secure it with 3 (plastic, T-20) screws. Torque the top screw to 20 in-lbs. Torque the other 2 screws to 12 in-lbs. Use care not to pinch the Drum Heater or Drum Encoder harnesses between the chassis and fan shroud. 23. Route the Media Release Blade Solenoid harness through the right side of the chassis and install the Upper Duplex Guide and solenoid on the 4 mounting pins on the frame. 24. Connect the Drum Fan to the Right Side harness P/J118. 25. Install the Upper Duplex Roller. 26. Install the Outer Duplex Guide. Route the Exit Door Interlock Switch harness under the guide and through the notch provided. Connect the 2 interlock switches. 27. Reposition the Media Drive Assembly and seat the roller shafts. Insert the 6 (plastic, T-20) screws, and torque the screws to 12 in-lbs. 28. Install the Ink Loader. 29. Install the Lower Duplex Guide. 30. Install the Preheater. Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual 09/2007 4-25 Repairs and Adjustments
REP 2.0.3
31. Install the Inner Simplex Guide. 32. Install all covers and doors. 33. Install the Output Tray, Scanner, and DADF on the 8860MFP. 34. Perform the Wiper Alignment Adjustment (ADJ 2.5.1). 35. Perform the Printhead Parking procedure (ADJ 2.2.1). 36. Perform the Head Tilt Gear Homing procedure (ADJ 4.13.1). 37. Perform the Process Drive Homing Procedure (ADJ 4.7.1). 38. Turn system power On and print a Configuration page to test operation.
Figure 1 Removing the Y-Axis Belt 3. Hold tension with one hand while removing the Y-Axis Belt with the other.
09/2007 4-26
4.
Hold the Wiper Blade while rotating the small drive gear. This lowers the left end of the wiper producing slack in the Wiper Belt. Remove the Wiper Belt from the Wiper Clip to release the Wiper Blade. When reinstalling the belt into the wiper clip, place the belt partly on the clip, and then press the center of the clip with a small needle-nose pliers until the belt is secured in the clip.
Replacement
1.
Figure 2 Connecting the Printhead Wiper Blade and Belt 2. Position the Wiper Blade so that both ends are all the way down following reassembly. See ADJ 2.5.1. Also, make sure the metal portion of the blade is nearest the Drum Assembly. Install the Printhead. Perform the Head Tilt Gear Homing procedure (ADJ 4.13.1). Perform the Process Drive Homing Procedure (ADJ 4.7.1). Turn system power On to check wiper operation.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Figure 1 Removing the Printhead Wiper Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual
09/2007 4-27
REP 2.0.5
WARNING
Allow adequate time for the system to cool before servicing the printer. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the Scanner Assembly with the attached DADF (REP 1.0.11) Remove the Output Tray (REP 1.0.6) Remove the Right Side Cover (REP 1.0.21) Remove the Left Side Cover (REP 1.0.7) Remove the Ink Loader Assembly (REP 2.0.1) Place several sheets of paper between the Printhead and Drum to protect the Drum. Unlock the Wiper Assembly by raising the Wiper Assembly Lock.
09/2007 4-28
8.
Lower the Wiper Assembly completely by rotating the drive gear s as shown.
Figure 3 Releasing the Printhead Tilt Spring. 10. Pull the X-Axis Bias Spring and Hook out slightly, and then rotate downward to allow it to rest in detents provided on the frame. See Figure 4.
Figure 2 Lowering the Printhead Wiper Blade 9. Hold the Printhead away from the Drum and push down on the left and right Printhead Restraint Arms to release the Printhead Tilt Spring tension.
09/2007 4-29
REP 2.0.8
Figure 5 Removing the Printhead Restraint Screws NOTE: Use a flat-bladed screwdriver to rotate the X-Axis Motor to adjust the Printhead position as needed to remove the Printhead Restraints.
Figure 4 X-Axis Bias Spring Hook 11. Disconnect the Air Hose from the Purge Pump. 12. Remove 1 (plastic, T-20) screw that secures each Printhead Restraint, and then shift the restraint inwards toward the Printhead while lifting toward the rear of the printer.
REP 2.0.8
09/2007 4-30
Replacement
CAUTION Torque the Printhead Restraint screws to 6 in. lbs. Irreversible damage can result from overtightening these fasteners. Check that the Left Printhead Restraint does not interfere with the Roll Block. Also, make sure the Tilt Spring on the Left Printhead Restraint is properly positioned in the notch on the back of the Printhead and does not pinch the Air Hose. Perform the Head Tilt Gear (ADJ 4.13.1), and Process Drive Alignment (ADJ 4.7.1) adjustments before restoring system power.
Figure 1 Detaching the Transfix Load Module Spring Hooks 7. 8. Remove the Process Drive Gearbox (REP 4.0.7). Slide the camshaft to the right, making sure the bearing slides over to the gear. Move the camshaft down and slightly to the right, and then up to the left to remove it from the chassis.
09/2007 4-31
Replacement
CAUTION When reinstalling the camshaft, line up the hole on the bushing with the metal ground plate. Do not damage or bend the ground plate to install the camshaft. When installing the camshaft, position the flat side of the D-shaped cams towards the rear of the system as shown in Figure 1. Align the hole in the white Head Tilt Gear with the arrow on the chassis to put the Head Tilt Gear in home position.
09/2007 4-32
Replace the KL-Clips on the outside grooves of the Drum Maintenance Camshaft, and perform the Head Tilt Gear (ADJ 4.13.1), and Process Drive Alignment (ADJ 4.7.1) adjustments before restoring system power.
9.
09/2007 4-33
9.
Figure 1 Removing the Transfix Roller Shaft Restraint 10. Hold the Transfix Roller and Stripper Blade with one hand, engage the end of the Transfix Roller Shaft with the Transfix Roller Shaft Restraint and pull the shaft out of the Stripper Carriage Assembly. 11. Lift the Stripper Carriage Assembly and Transfix Roller up and out of the chassis.
Replacement
NOTE: Make sure the I/O Board Ground Straps are properly positioned and the I/O Board is behind the chassis retainers before installing the 2 I/O Board screws.
09/2007 4-34
Replacement
NOTE: Make sure the I/O Board Ground Straps are properly positioned and the I/O Board is behind the chassis retainers before installing the 2 I/O Board screws.
Figure 1 Removing the Transfix Roller Shaft Restraint 10. Hold the Transfix Roller and Stripper Blade with one hand, engage the end of the Transfix Roller Shaft with the Transfix Roller Shaft Restraint and pull the shaft out of the Stripper Carriage Assembly. 11. Lift the Stripper Carriage Assembly and Transfix Roller up and out of the chassis. 12. Remove the Transfix Roller from the Stripper Carriage Assembly.
09/2007 4-35
REP 2.0.13
10. Insert a T-20 Torx bit through the right side slotted hole in the Transfix Load Module. Engage the hole at the back of the module, and lever the modules spring cam towards the center of the printer while disconnecting the spring hooks from the Transfix Load Arms. Repeat this process for the left side.
Figure 1 Removing the Y-Axis Spring 4. Remove the Y-Axis Spring using either a spring hook or pliers, Brace the printer to prevent movement while removing the spring.
Figure 1 Detaching the Transfix Load Module Spring Hooks NOTE: In the following step, the Media Release Blade, Transfix Roller, Transfix Roller Shaft, and the 2 Transfix Load Arms are removed as a single assembly.
09/2007 4-36
11. Remove the Clevis Pins from the left and right Transfix Load Arms to release the Transfix Roller assembly from the chassis.
Figure 3 Removing the Preheater Lift Solenoid 14. Remove the screw that secures the Transfix Load Module Ground Strap.
Figure 2 Removing the Transfix Load Arm Clevis Pins 12. Disconnect the Preheater Lift Solenoid P/J202 from the harness. 13. Remove the screw that secures the Preheater Lift Solenoid to the Transfix Load Module.
09/2007 4-37
REP 2.0.15
Figure 4 Transfix Load Module Ground Strap Removal 15. Remove 4 (metal, T-20) screws, 2 at each end, that secure the Transfix Load Module to the chassis.
Figure 5 Transfix Load Module Fasteners 16. Rotate the top of the Transfix Load Module forward and spread the chassis slightly at the right side to remove it. The Transfix Load Module fits tightly in the chassis. Some force is needed to remove it.
REP 2.0.15
09/2007 4-38
Replacement
Place a small amount of Rheolube 768 grease (P/N 070E00890) in the groove at the end of each Transfix Load Arm before reattaching the Spring Hooks. Also, when replacing the Grounding Springs on the Transfix Load Module, make sure the springs rest below the Transfix Camshaft. After replacing the Exit Module, perform ADJ 2.5.1, Wiper Alignment. Error code 7009.4x indicates misalignment of the Wiper Assembly.
09/2007 4-39
10. Disconnect P/J860 from the I/O Board. 11. Feed the harness through the hole in the chassis near the front of the Drum Assembly while sliding the plate out the Drum Maintenance drawer cavity.
Replacement
Lightly grease the metal plates on the underneath side of the Pivot Plate using a small amount of Rheolube 768 grease (P/N 070E00890). Also check that the right end of the Pivot Plate Shaft is in contact with the Ground Plate following installation of the Drum Fan. Perform the Head Tilt Gear (ADJ 4.13.1), and Process Drive Alignment (ADJ 4.7.1) adjustments before restoring system power Figure 1 Preheater Electrical Connections 5. Slide the latches in and forward to release the Preheater as shown in Figure 2.
09/2007 4-40
Figure 2 Removing the Preheater 6. Slide the Preheater out of the chassis.
Replacement
NOTE: Check that the connector P/J0670 on the back of the Preheater Board is secure before installing the Preheater. The fingers on the Inner Simplex Guide go over the segmented roller. To install, first snap the left retainer in place, followed by the right. Make sure the sensors are properly positioned when completing the installation. Figure 1 Removing the X-Axis Bias Spring
Replacement
Do not rotate the spring more than one-quarter turn. Perform the Head Tilt Gear (ADJ 4.13.1), and Process Drive Alignment (ADJ 4.7.1) adjustments before restoring system power.
09/2007 4-41
Replacement
Position the fingers on the Inner Simplex Guide over the segmented roller. Install the guide by snapping the left side to the retaining post, then the right side.
09/2007 4-42
09/2007 4-43
NOTE: Pressure from the Idler Rollers may make it difficult to slide the Take Away Roller shaft to the right during removal.
Figure 1 Removing the Duplex Roller Figure 1 Removing the Take Away Roller
09/2007 4-44
Replacement
Route the solenoid harness through the right side of the frame. Also, route the guide under the edges of the Exit Module frame. Check that the Stripper Solenoid actuator engages the hole in the Stripper Carriage Assembly.
09/2007 4-45
REP 3.0.5
5.
09/2007 4-46
c. 7.
Remove the (plastic, T-20) screw connecting the Exit Module and Back Frame.
Figure 2 Exit Module Left Side Fasteners a. b. c. 8. Loosen the Media Drive Assembly to remove the left front screw. See REP 4.0.14. Remove the left rear screw located behind the large Wiper Assembly gear. Remove 1 (plastic, T-20) screw that connects the Exit Module and ground wire to the Back Frame. Output Tray Full Sensor (CN801 and CN802) Front Exit Module Harness (P/J303) Speaker (P/J410) Elevator Position Sensor (P/J409) Scanner Detect Sensor (CN851) Exit Module Harness (P/J308) Exit Door Interlock Switch (P/J411) Drum Temperature Sensor (P/J870) on the I/O Board. Front Door Interlock (P/J140). Head Maintenance Clutch (P/J130). I/O Board connector (P/J680). 9. Lift the Exit Module from the chassis. Figure 3 8860MFP Exit Module Harness Connections
Replacement
Transfer the Front Exit Module Harness to the replacement part, and Perform ADJ 2.5.1 after replacing the Exit Module.
09/2007 4-47
REP 3.0.7
Figure 1 Replacing the Pick Roller 3. Lift the Retard Roller to vertical, then pull the roller from the shaft in the tray. See Figure 2.
09/2007 4-48
Remove the 3 (plastic, T-20) screws that secure the Media Drive Motor. Allow the motor to hang from the harnesss. Remove the 4 (metal, T-20) screws that secure the Exit Module.
Replacement
For the Pick Roller, insert the replacement roller with the metal shaft at the top and toward the left. The grey rollers should be facing you. Position the roller back about 2 inches (5 cm) in the tray cavity. Fell for a large plastic lip on the right and the mating gear on the left. Rotate the Pick Roller up and back to snap it into place.
Figure 1 Removing the 8860 Exit Module 5. Lift the Exit Module from the chassis.
Replacement
Seat the Exit Module on the chassis., torque the 4 screws to 15 in. lbs, and perform ADJ 2.5.1. The system may report error 7,009.4x if the Wiper Assembly is misaligned.
09/2007 4-49
Replacement
NOTE: Route the fan harness behind the mylar insulator as shown in Figure 1.
09/2007 4-50
Replacement
Perform the Head Tilt Gear (ADJ 4.13.1), and Process Drive Alignment (ADJ 4.7.1) adjustments before restoring system power.
Replacement
Engage the fork extending from the motor shaft to the Side Rail as shown in Figure 1. Also, slip the mounting plate behind the ground strap and replace the cable retainer on the lower right screw. Perform the Head Tilt Gear (ADJ 4.13.1), and Process Drive Alignment (ADJ 4.7.1) adjustments before restoring system power.
09/2007 4-51
Replacement
NOTE: Check that the grounding strap contacts the Pivot Plate Shaft following installation.
09/2007 4-52
Replacement
CAUTION Before tightening the Process Drive mounting screws, align the holes in the Process Drive flange with the mounting bosses on the frame, seat the gears, and press the Process Drive tightly against the frame. Next, seat all three screws before torquing the screws to a final tightness of 12 in-lbs. Tightening the screws individually before seating all three can put undue strain on the mounting bosses. Do not use the screws to pull the Process Drive into alignment. Perform the Head Tilt Gear (ADJ 4.13.1), and Process Drive Alignment (ADJ 4.7.1) adjustments before restoring system power.
Figure 1 Removing the Process Drive and Process Drive Gear Alignment 8. 9. Remove the Process Drive from the chassis. Disconnect the Process Drive from the harness.
09/2007 4-53
REP 4.0.7
Figure 1 Removing the Exit Roller Motor 6. Remove the KL-Clip that secured the pulley on the motor shaft and transfer the pulley to the replacement motor. CAUTION When replacing the Exit Roller Motor screws, torque to no more than 12 in.-lbs. Overtightening these fasteners can result in irreversible damage to the chassis.
Replacement
Replacement
CAUTION When replacing the Elevator Motor screws, torque to no more than 12 in.-lbs. Overtightening these fasteners can result in irreversible damage to the chassis. If the Elevator Motor leads (P/J320) are reversed during replacement, on power-up, the system enters a fault state without displaying a fault code. This state is indicated by the LED on the Exit Module Control Board flashing and media jams in the Exit Module.
09/2007 4-54
Replacement
Check that the bushing tabs are properly seated in the chassis. To seat the new Push Nut, position the Push Nut so the fingers point away from the shaft. Place a 3/8 in. nut driver over the nut and press firmly to seat the nut on the shaft.
09/2007 4-55
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Hold tension with one hand while removing the Y-Axis Belt with the other. Remove the Y-Axis Spring using either a spring hook or pliers, Brace the printer to prevent movement while removing the spring. Disconnect the motor (P/J18) from the Electronics Module and remove the harness from the cable guide. Disconnect the Tray 1 Pick Solenoid (P/J241) from the harness. Disconnect the Tray 2 Pick Clutch (P/J230) from the harness.
NOTE: Observe the routing of the Y-Axis Motor harness. The harness exits the motor cavity through the notch provided at the bottom of the mount. 11. Remove 3 (plastic, T-20) screws, and 2 (metal, T-20) screws with ground connections from the Spring Arm and slide the assembly out of the chassis.
Replacement
CAUTION Figure 2 Y-Axis Assembly Electrical Connections 10. Release the harness from the retainers in the chassis. When replacing the Y-Axis Drive screws, torque to no more than 12 in.-lbs. Overtightening these fasteners can result in irreversible damage to the chassis. Check that the grounding lugs are captured by the screws, the spacers are present, and wiring is correctly routed.
REP 4.0.11
09/2007 4-56
Figure 1 Removing the Lift Motor Gear 4. 5. Figure 1 Removing the Tray 1 Pick Solenoid Disconnect the Tray 2 Lift Motor (P/J203) from the harness. Remove 2 screws that secure the Tray Lift Motor to the chassis, and remove the motor.
Replacement
Align the hole in the solenoid with the boss on the Media Drive Assembly before tightening the screw.
09/2007 4-57
Remove 1 (plastic, T-20) screw that secures the braided ground wire to the Media Drive Motor mounting plate. Remove 1 (metal, T-20) screw in the Y-Axis Motor mount that secures a ground strap to the Pick Clutch.
Replacement
Check that the bushing tabs are properly seated in the chassis. To seat the new Push Nut, position the Push Nut so the fingers point away from the shaft. Place a 3/8 in. nut driver over the nut and press firmly to seat the nut on the shaft.
09/2007 4-58
Figure 1 Media Drive Assembly Electrical Connections 7. Remove 6 (plastic, T-20) screws that secure the Media Drive Assembly to the frame. Figure 2 Removing the Media Drive Assembly
Replacement
CAUTION When replacing the Media Drive screws, torque to no more than 12 in.-lbs. Overtightening these fasteners can result in irreversible damage to the chassis. To replace the Media Drive Assembly, remove Tray 2. Rotate the Pick Roller Shaft until the dshaft correctly seats into the Pick Clutch. Next, working upwards, rotate the Duplex Feed Roller until the Duplex Roller Shaft seats in its clutch. Check that the Media Drive Assembly is correctly positioned before tightening the screws. Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual 09/2007 4-59 Repairs and Adjustments
REP 4.0.14
Figure 1 Head Tile Gear KL-Clip Location 3. 4. 5. Remove the Waste Tray. Remove the X-Axis Spring (REP 2.0.21). Remove 1 (metal, T-20) screw that secures the X-Axis Spring Retainer to the chassis.
09/2007 4-60
9.
Reach into the Waste Tray cavity and pull the gear and shaft from the chassis.
Replacement
The leaf spring on the back side of the chassis must be behind the gear to engage. Lubricate the curved surface of the gear using a small amount of Rheolube 768 grease (P/N 070E00890). 1. 2. Remove the Leaf Spring from the chassis. Partially insert the Head Tilt Gear Shaft into the chassis.
Figure 2 Removing the X-Axis Spring Retainer 6. 7. 8. Unlock the Wiper Blade and raise the Wiper Blade to the top of its travel. Raise the Exit Elevator. Remove the Waste Tray Cover without disconnecting the Waste Tray Sensor harness. a. b. c. Lift the center of the cover to release the right side hook. Move the cover towards the back to release the 2 tabs from the chassis. Pull the cover right to release the left hook and position the cover out of the way. 3. Replace the spring. Turn the Head Tilt Gear while inserting the spring to guide the spring to its proper position behind the gear. Figure 4 Replacing the Head Tilt Gear
Figure 3 Removing the Waste Tray Cover Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual Repairs and Adjustments
09/2007 4-61
REP 4.0.16
Figure 5 Head Tilt Spring Alignment 4. 5. 6. Seat the gear by lifting the Head Tilt Solenoid Actuator. Replace the KL-Clip on the end of the Head Tilt Gear Shaft. Perform the Head Tilt Gear (ADJ 4.13.1), and Process Drive Alignment (ADJ 4.7.1) adjustments before restoring system power. Figure 1 Removing the Speaker
09/2007 4-62
Replacement
CAUTION When replacing the Head Tilit Solenoid screw, torque to no more than 12 in.-lbs. Overtightening this fastener can result in irreversible damage to the chassis. CAUTION To ensure proper operation of the Printhead following reassembly, perform these steps in the order given. 1. 2. Insert the plastic end of Head Tilt Solenoid into the frame, swing to the right and replace the screw. With the Printhead centered on the Drum, use a screwdriver to turn the lower screw of the Process Drive clockwise until you hear the Head Tilt Solenoid snap into place
Figure 1 Removing the Head Tilt Solenoid Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual 09/2007 4-63 Repairs and Adjustments
REP 4.0.20
Figure 1 Removing the Exit Module Control Board Figure 1 Removing the Scanner Power Supply
09/2007 4-64
Replacement
Route the cables through the slots provided. Position the T-shaped strain relief near the Wave Amplifier following installation. Perform the Head Tilt Gear (ADJ 4.13.1), and Process Drive Alignment (ADJ 4.7.1) adjustments before restoring system power.
09/2007 4-65
Replacement
1. Connect the replacement drive and close the Back Cover.
REP 5.0.7
09/2007 4-66
Figure 1 Removing RAM Figure 1 Removing NVRAM 3. Insert the replacement RAM and close the Back Cover.
09/2007 4-67
1. 2. 3.
Remove the Right Side Cover (REP 1.0.21 or REP 1.1.10 on the 8860). Disconnect the harnesses from the board. Remove the 2 screws that secure the board to the chassis.
Figure 1 Removing the I/O Board Figure 1 Removing the Drum Heater Relay Board
Replacement
CAUTION When replacing the I/O Board screws, torque to no more than 12 in.-lbs. Overtightening these fasteners can result in irreversible damage to the chassis. Position the corner of the board behind the Ground Tab before installing the screws.
09/2007 4-68
Replacement WARNING
Verify that no wiring is routed behind the Drum Heater Relay Board before installing the screws. CAUTION When replacing the Drum Heater Relay Board screws, torque to no more than 12 in.-lbs. Overtightening these fasteners can result in irreversible damage to the chassis.
10. Remove the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5). 11. Remove the Printer Stabilizer (REP 3.0.14). 12. Remove 7 (metal, T-20) screws that secure the Back Frame to the chassis.
09/2007 4-69
09/2007 4-70
09/2007 4-71
REP 6.0.2
Figure 1 Removing the X-Axis Spring Retainer 5. Figure 1 Removing the Drum Temperature Sensor 6. 7. Unlock the Wiper Blade and raise the Wiper Blade to the top of its travel. Raise the Exit Elevator. Remove the Waste Tray Cover without disconnecting the Waste Tray Sensor harness. a. b. c. Lift the center of the cover to release the right side hook. Move the cover towards the rear to release the 2 tabs from the chassis. Pull the cover to the right to release the left hook and position the cover out of the way.
09/2007 4-72
Figure 2 Removing the Waste Tray Cover 8. 9. Disconnect the Waste Tray Detect Sensor (P/J110) from the I/O Board. Unlace the sensor harness from the retainers and guides.
10. Release the hooks that secure the sensor to the cover and remove the sensor.
Replacement
Perform the Head Tilt Gear (ADJ 4.13.1), and Process Drive Alignment (ADJ 4.7.1) adjustments before restoring system power.
09/2007 4-73
Figure 1 Removing the Paper Size Switch 8. Pull the harness through the opening in the chassis and remove the switch from the tray cavity. Figure 1 Removing the No Paper Sensor 7. Disconnect the sensor (P/J171) from the harness and remove the sensor.
Replacement
Disconnect the Preheater Assembly (P/J0720 and P/J860) to make additional room to replace the sensor. Release the lock on P/J0720 to remove it from the Preheater Assembly.
09/2007 4-74
Figure 1 Removing the Paper Height Sensor 7. Disconnect the sensor (P/J172) from the harness and remove the sensor.
Replacement
Disconnect the Preheater Assembly (P/J0720 and P/J860) to make additional room to replace the sensor. Release the lock on P/J0720 to remove it from the Preheater Assembly.
09/2007 4-75
Figure 1 Scanner Calibration Page P/N 109K02110 NOTE: Perform this calibration procedure when replacing the Scanner Assembly or DADF. Start this procedure with the scanner having just made a duplex copy, this ensures the lamps are up to temperature. If the lamps are cold, the calibration procedure fails due to a time-out. Figure 1 Removing the Output Tray Full Sensor Manual calibration of the platen to DADF scanheads adjust grey level and margins. It matches the front of the page to the back of the page on a duplex scan/copy.
Adjustment
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. On the control panel, press the System Setup button. Select the Information menu Select Troubleshooting, and then press the Enter button. Select Calibrate Scanner, and then press the Enter button. Place the Scanner Calibration page on the platen with the top edge to the left as shown in Figure 2.
09/2007 4-76
NOTE: Make sure the Scanner Calibration page is aligned correctly and the paper guides are adjusted to fit against the paper. If the page is misaligned, the calibration procedure fails. 11. Select Document Feeder Step from the menu, and then press Enter to scan the Calibration page. 12. When the scan completes, check the control panel message: If the Control Panel indicates Success, select Continue, press Enter, and calibration procedure is complete. If the Control Panel indicates Failure, select Continue, press Enter, and then repeat Steps 1 and 2 until a successful result is achieved.
Figure 2 Scanning the Scanner Calibration Page NOTE: Make sure the Scanner Calibration page is aligned correctly. If the page is misaligned, the calibration procedure fails. 6. 7. 8. Close the document feeder. Select the Document Glass Step from the menu, and then press Enter to scan the Scanner Calibration page. When the scan completes, check the Control Panel message: 9. If the Control Panel indicates Success, select Continue, press Enter, and then continue with Step 9. If the Control Panel indicates Failure, select Continue, press Enter, and then repeat Steps 5-7.
10. Place the Scanner Calibration page in the DADF face up so the top edge enters first. Adjust the paper guides so they fit against the page.
09/2007 4-77
ADJ 1.15.1
Adjustment
Use this procedure to move the Printhead to its parked position. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the Scanner Assembly with attached DADF (REP 1.0.11). Remove the Output Tray (REP 1.0.6). Remove the Left Side Cover (REP 1.0.7 or REP 1.1.9 on the 8860). Remove the Right Side Cover (REP 1.0.21 or REP 1.1.10 on the 8860). Remove the Ink Loader (REP 2.0.1 or REP 1.1.8 on the 8860). Engage the Head Tilt Gear as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Printhead Wiper Blade Drive 7. Rotate the Drum Maintenance Camshaft until the Printhead has moved to the parked position, which is the furthest point from the Drum.
ADJ 2.2.1
09/2007 4-78
Adjustment
To ensure Wiper Blade alignment, and place the blade in the home position, remove the drive gear, lower the blade, and then reseat the gear. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Scanner Assembly with attached DADF (REP 1.0.11). Remove the Output Tray (REP 1.0.6). Remove the Left Side Cover (REP 1.0.7 or REP 1.1.9 on the 8860). Remove the Right Side Cover (REP 1.0.21 or REP 1.1.10 on the 8860). Remove the KL-Clip that secures the left side Wiper Blade Drive Gear and remove the gear.
Figure 1 Printhead Wiper Blade Drive Rotate the left and right Wiper Blade Idler Gears to lower the Wiper Blade to the bottom of its travel. As you lower the Wiper Blade, keep the blade parallel to the Drum.
09/2007 4-79
Adjustment
Examine the Process Drive alignment points to verify proper gear alignment: The holes in the Process Drive and gears must align as indicated in Figure 1.
Figure 2 Lowering the Printhead Wiper Blade 7. Replace the left side Drive Gear and KL-Clip.
Figure 1 Process Drive Gear Alignment Repairs and Adjustments The hole in the Camshaft gear must align with the arrow on the chassis. The hole in the Transfix Camshaft Gear must align with the hole in the chassis. Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual
09/2007 4-80
09/2007 4-81
ADJ 4.13.1
Figure 2 Rotating the Drum Maintenance Camshaft NOTE: Rotate the Drum Maintenance Camshaft Gear until the hole in the gear reaches the 6:00 position. 3. Disengagement of the Head Tilt Gear is indicated by the alignment of the two arrows on the left side of the chassis as shown in Figure 3.
ADJ 4.13.1
09/2007 4-82
5 Parts List
Parts List Overview ......................................................................................................... Serial Number Format..................................................................................................... 5-3 5-3
8570 Covers
PL 1.1 8860 Covers ........................................................................................................
Imaging
PL 2.0 Imaging ................................................................................................................
Drive
PL 4.0 8860MFP Drive....................................................................................................
Drive
PL 4.1 8860 Drive ...........................................................................................................
8570MFP Electrical
PL 5.0 8860MFP Electrical..............................................................................................
8570 Electrical
PL 5.1 8860 Electrical .....................................................................................................
09/2007 5-1
Parts List
Parts List
09/2007 5-2
The serial number is coded as follows: The text S/N followed by the serial number in the barcode. The barcode does not include a field identifier. The nine digit serial number format PPPRSSSSS where: PPP - Is the alphanumeric Product Code Table 1 8860/8860MFP Product Code Product 8860 8860MFP Product Code HAV HBB
R - Is the numeric revision digit. Changes at major product updates or when the serial number is reset to a starting value. SSSSS - Is the five digit numeric serial number. For example: S/N HBB453072 HBB = Product code for the 8860MFP 4 = Revision level 53072 = Serial number
Figure 1 Serial Number Location Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual 09/2007 5-3 Parts List
09/2007 5-4
Parts List
PL 1.0
09/2007 5-5
Parts List
PL 1.1
PL 2.0 Imaging
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Part 848K18890 848K24660 848K18880 848K24650 033K04490 020K15090 023E30670 033E05290 023E31250 094E02790 120E29160 120E29150 020K14800 008K02260 041K06500 022E33180 809E69920 137E24130 020K15100 126E02721 059K50011 019E75180 809E69940 809E69930 121K44430 Description Ink Loader (8860MFP only) Ink Loader (metered 8860MFP) Ink Loader (8860 only) Ink Loader (metered 8860) Printhead Drum Assembly Y-Axis Belt Printhead Wiper Blade Wiper Drive Belt Purge Pressure Pump Left Printhead Restraint Right Printhead Restraint Drum Maintenance Camshaft Transfix Camshaft Stripper Carriage Assembly Transfix Roller Y-Axis Tension Spring Transfix Load Module Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate Preheater and Deskew Assembly Transfix Arm Kit (with pins) X-Axis Bias Spring Hook X-Axis Roll Adjuster Spring X-Axis Bias Spring Preheater Lift Solenoid X-Axis Bias Spring Retainer (Not Spared) Transfix Roller Shaft (Not Spared) Drum Ground Plate (Not Spared) Roll Block (Not Spared) Transfix Roller Shaft Restraint (Not Spared) Transfix Load Module Ground Strap (Not Spared)
09/2007 5-6
Parts List
PL 2.0
09/2007 5-7
Parts List
PL 3.0
09/2007 5-8
Parts List
PL 3.1
09/2007 5-9
Parts List
PL 4.0
09/2007 5-10
Parts List
PL 4.1
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
117E29840 121K50440 237E23640 237E23650 237E23890 237E23660 069E00570 117E29790 117E29820 960K22331 117E29810 117E29650 117E29660 117E29830 117E28790 960K35170 117E28780 117E34880 117E29800 117E29670 801K33480 050K67600 117E29680
09/2007 5-11
Parts List
PL 5.0
09/2007 5-12
Parts List
PL 5.1
09/2007 5-13
Parts List
PL 6.0
Xerox Supplies
Description Table 1 Kits, Supplies, and Options Description Mechanical Kit Print Engine: Backframe Cable Clamps (2 ea.) Exit Module KL-Clips 5 mm (5 ea.) Exit Module Plastic Washers (2 ea.) Scanner Power Supply and Exit Module Control Board screws M4x6 (5 ea.) DADF/Scanner Hinge Screws M4x12 (5 ea.) 604K42670 113R00736 604K53810 016184500 695K22810 695K23120 674E00750 674E00760 137E11900 003E77400 019E68680 109K02110 650K26620 650K26630 650K26640 650K26650 650K26660 650K26670 650K26680 650K26690 650K26700 650K26710 650K26720 650K26730 650K27210 650K27200 650K27190 650K26740 097S03740 097S03741 097S03742 Part Number 604K42210 Cord, Power, Standard, 115V Cord, Power, EURO, 220V Cord, Power, UK, 240V Cord, Power, AUST, 240V Cord, Power, SWISS, 220V Cord, Power, DANISH Cord, Power, CHINESE Cord, Power, ARGENTINA, 240V
Table 2 Power Cords Part Number 117E29520 117E29500 117E29510 117E29490 117E35050 117E29460 117E35030 117E35040
Mechanical Kit IIT Maintenance Kit Standard Capacity Maintenance Kit Extended Capacity Cleaning Kit Repackaging Kit: 8860 8860MFP Stabilizer 525-Sheet Feeder Stabilizer Cart Stopper, Retainer Clip, Retainer Scanner Calibration Page Control Panel Overlay Kit, Hungarian (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, Polish (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, Turkish (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, Italian (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, German (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, Spanish (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, Dutch (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, Swedish (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, B. Port (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, Russian (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, Czech (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, Danish (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, Greek (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, Norwegian (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, Finnish (8860MFP only) Control Panel Overlay Kit, French (8860MFP only) Wireless Network Adapter with NA power converter 110V Wireless Network Adapter with Euro power converter 220V Wireless Network Adapter with UK power converter 220V
Parts List
Xerox Supplies
09/2007 5-14
6 Diagnostics
System Power On Process ............................................................................................. Hidden Service Menu...................................................................................................... Service Diagnostics......................................................................................................... Print Engine Check Menu Tests...................................................................................... General Troubleshooting................................................................................................. Electrical Troubleshooting............................................................................................... DADF Malfunction ........................................................................................................... Scanner Malfunction ....................................................................................................... Control Panel Malfunction ............................................................................................... Exit Module Malfunction .................................................................................................. Media Path and Transport Problems .............................................................................. Operating System and Application Problems.................................................................. Network Problems........................................................................................................... USB Port Testing ............................................................................................................ Fax Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... Remote Fax Does Not Ring ............................................................................................ Remote Fax Answers Then Fails .................................................................................... Fax Does Not Answer ..................................................................................................... Fax Answers Then Fails.................................................................................................. Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist .............................................................................. Printhead Cleaning Cycle................................................................................................ 6-3 6-5 6-5 6-13 6-34 6-36 6-39 6-40 6-40 6-41 6-41 6-42 6-43 6-45 6-45 6-47 6-48 6-48 6-49 6-49 6-51
09/2007 6-1
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-2
2. 3. 4.
5.
10. Print Engine Self Tests (PEST) begin with solenoids and clutches 11. Print Engine Self Test complete. 12. Scanner initializes. 13. Four high tones from motor testing 14. Mechanical initialization begins. 15. Back light on Control Panel display turns on. 16. Control Panel displays Warming Up. 17. Control Panel displays Warming Up 5%. 18. Mechanical initialization ends. 19. Control Panel displays Warming Up xx% (increasing toward 100%).
8.
20. When the Control Panel displays Warming Up 60%, cleaning starts --- 07:34 Cold systems only. 21. Cleaning ends --- Cold systems only. 22. Control Panel displays Printing page 1 of 4 --- Cold systems only. 23. Cleaning page exits --- Cold systems only. 24. Startup page exits (if enabled) 25. Control Panel displays Ready To Print. 10:16 11:12 11:48 11:58 11:59
09/2007 6-3
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-4
Service Diagnostics
The system has built-in diagnostics to aid in troubleshooting problems with the system components. The Service Diagnostics menu provides a means to test sensors, motors, switches, clutches, solenoids, fans, and power supplies. Diagnostics also contain functions to report system status and some NVRAM access. Service Diagnostics are to be executed by a certified service technician only. The Control Panel, Exit Module, Scanner, DADF, and Fax are discreet subsystems with their own diagnostic specialized diagnostic firmware. Typically, the systems Service Diagnostics firmware simply commands the subsystem to perform the built in test, and reports the results. Test results appear on the Control Panel display in this format: RX: YYYYYY. Where X is the result identifier (starting with 0), and YYYYYY is the result. Labels (meaning), and units are not presented. If the results exceed the display, the last line is replaced by Display full - press key to page. Pressing any Control Panel key, except the Back (small round) key, scrolls the display to additional results. When the Down(v), Up(^), or Enter (large round) keys are pressed after the last results group have been presented, the first group will be presented again (i.e. with wraparound). If the Cancel or Back button is pressed after the last result group has been displayed, the results are erased and the menu is refreshed.
NOTE: The Hidden Service menu varies by model. Table 1 Hidden Service Menu Selections Menu Item Fax Enable Test Prints Startup Page Eliminate Light Stripes Fault History Jam History Diagnostics History Enter Diagnostic Mode Reset NVRAM Description Turns FAX On or Off. The system resets following a change. See Section 3 for descriptions of each test print available. Prints basic system configuration and networking information. Performs a cleaning procedure to remove light stripes in prints; this process will take about 5 minutes. Displays available information regarding the last 15 faults reported by a test and/or the print engine. Displays available information regarding the last 20 jams reported by a test and/or the print engine. Displays Fault History results. See Service Diagnostics Menu Definitions for test descriptions. Resets the system back to default settings and clears all network settings. If possible, print the Configuration page before resetting NVRAM. Selects the Power Saver Time-out, the amount of time the system must be idle before changing to Power Saver mode. Resets all items in the System Controls menu to default values. This is for manufacturing or engineering use only. This is for manufacturing or engineering use only. This is for manufacturing or engineering use only. This is for manufacturing or engineering use only. Prints pages with detailed system-usage information. Displays engine copy count. Displays the Printhead serial number. Displays the date the Printhead was calibrated Displays the Printhead version. Check functions Adjusts the margin to center an image. Activate the optional FDI interface. This reduces engine speed to accurately track the credit available from the input to the FDI. Report functions Test functions Monitor functions
Power Saver Time-out Restart System Head Adjust Adjust X-Axis scale Drift Compensation Head to Drum Adjust Service Usage Profile Engine Copy Count Head Serial Number Head Cal Date Head Version Center Image FDI Enable
Exercise functions
Enable Metered Supplies Prompts for the PagePack PIN on metered systems.
09/2007 6-5
Diagnostics
Test 000 is inoperative and causes no response if the OK button is pressed. To return to Customer mode, run test 001. Table 1lists the available tests. Table 1 Test Selection Numbers No. Test Name 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 No test selected Exit Diagnostics Paper Path Status Temperature Status Deskew Clutch Strip Solenoid Tray 1 Pick Solenoid Tray 2 Pick Clutch Tray 3 Pick Clutch Tray 4 Pick Clutch Tilt Solenoid Purge Vent Solenoid Drum Heater Relay Deskew Shaft Wiper Shaft Tray 1 Pick Shaft Tray 2 Pick Shaft Tray 3 Pick Shaft Tray 4 Pick Shaft Drum Fan Electronics Fan Reservoir Heater Jetstack Left Heater Jetstack Right Heater Preheat Heater Drum Heater Ink Melt 1 Heater Ink Melt 2 Heater Ink Melt 3 Heater Ink Melt 4 Heater Clear Heater Data Paper Drive Power No. Test Name 44 45 46 47 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 Transfix Drive Tilt Drive Tray 2 Lift Plate Drive Tray 3 Lift Plate Drive Tray 4 Lift Plate Drive Y-axis Encoder Y-axis Geometry Y-axis Drive Y-axis Belt Slip Y-axis Belt Tension Stripper Contact No. Test Name 88 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 Report EM Status Monitor EM Sensors Exercise EM Home Seq Exercise EM Lift Seq Exercise EM Roller Drive Test EM Subsystem Reset EM Subsystem Report SM FW Version Report SM Status Report SM Lamp Status Monitor SM Sensors Exercise SM DRAM
The tests may also be performed with the system operating at less than normal printing temperatures, but may produce slightly less typical results. NOTE: While the heaters are On, the Y-Axis is turning (to keep the Drum heating even), and the Drum Fan may be active. The Exercise Menu -> Heaters -> All Off function disables thermal regulation if access to these areas is necessary. The background thermal regulation is reactivated by the Exercise Menu -> Heaters -> All On function if the system is still warm enough. Turning off a single heater does NOT disable this function and the heater may be turned back on following the next check test or reboot. The Electronics Module Fan is always active.
Drum Maintenance Con- 100 Exercise SM Axis Motion tact Y-axis Motor X-axis Motor Process Motor Media Path Motor Tray 2 Lift Motor Tray 3 Lift Motor Tray 4 Lift Motor Tray 3 Pick/Feed Motor Tray 4 Pick/Feed Motor Purge Pump Voltages Line Voltage Wiper Alignment Drum Maint/Transfix Home Printhead Clearance Transfix Gap Clear Fault History Clear ISC Fault Clear PS NVRAM 101 Exercise SM Axis Unlock 102 Exercise SM Data Capture 103 Exercise SM Lamp 104 Test SM Subsystem 105 Reset SM Subsystem 106 Report DH FW Version 107 Report DH Status 108 Report DH Lamp Status 109 Report DH Paper Status 110 Monitor DH Sensors 111 Exercise DH DRAM 112 Exercise DH Data Capture 113 Exercise DH Cal Sheet Motion 114 Exercise DH Feed Motion 115 Exercise DH Lamp 116 Test DH Subsystem 118 Report FW Version 119 Report Status 120 Report Line Status
When the system transitions from Customer mode into Test Selection mode, the initial Control Panel display is the Test Selection screen as follows: Diagnostics Menu 19.212.0 Test: 000 None Selected The Diagnostics Menu revision number identifies the system and diagnostics firmware versions. The first two identify the system firmware version. The last digit identifies the Diagnostics Firmware version. The Test number (000) is entered using the Up or Down buttons. The currently selected Test appears next to the number. Run the test by pressing the OK button. At that point, the display changes to the name of the test, followed by a series of status messages providing a general idea of the current test activity. When the test completes, the display changes to display the results. In some menus the subsystems are identified as follows: FP - Control Panel Module subsystem EM - Exit Module subsystem SM - Scanner Module subsystem DH - Doc Handler Module (DADF) subsystem FM - FAX Module subsystem
28 29 30 31 32
Diagnostics
Service Diagnostics
09/2007 6-6
Table 1 Test Selection Numbers No. Test Name 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 Paper Lead Edge Times Paper Trail Edge Times Paper Sensor Bounce Times Duplex Paper Lead Edge Times Duplex Paper Trail Edge Times Duplex Paper Sensor Bounce Times Clear Paper Path Data Wiper Drive Paper Path Drive X-axis Drive No. Test Name 77 78 79 Clear PE NVRAM Set PE NVRAM To Defaults Print DMU Blot Display Fault History Monitor Sensors Monitor Encoders Monitor Temperatures Monitor Heaters Monitor Line Voltage Report MFP Configuration Report EM FW Version No. Test Name 121 Test FAX Modem Subsystem 122 Reset FAX Subsystem 123 Report FP FW Version
Service Diagnostics Menu When the system is powered up (or reset) directly into Diagnostic mode, or Enter Diagnostics is selected from the Hidden Service menu, the initial Control Panel displays the Service Diagnostics menu. The display reverts back to this menu whenever a test terminates. On return, the highlighted menu item is the previously selected test. Use the Control Panel buttons as described in Table 2 to navigate the menu, select tests and respond to prompts. Table 2 Control Panel Button Functions in Service Diagnostics Button Function Returns to the prior higher level menu structure, if available. Cancels the display of test results on the control panel and allows the current test to complete. If help text is displayed on the control panel, pressing BACK restores the current menu item and removes the help text. Cancels certain functions of the system Provides help information about the current menu selection, if available. Press any key to advance through the help text. Scrolls up one menu item within a menu list. This control does not wrap. Used to increment data in tests requiring user input. Scrolls down one menu item within test results. This control does not wrap. Used to decrement data in tests requiring user input. Enters the highlighted menu. Executes the current test item.
BACK
NOTE: Pressing any key may cause an abort if allowed by the test being performed. A power cycle is used to arbitrarily stop a test.
09/2007 6-7
Diagnostics
Service Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Service Diagnostics
09/2007 6-8
Table 3 Service Diagnostics Menu Definitions Menu Item Print Engine Menu Monitor Menu A submenu containing a set of functions for passively viewing or monitoring system mechanical parameters. See the monitor menu table for a description of the individual test functions and results. A submenu containing a set of functions for actively causing mechanical actions which may then be observed. See the exercise menu table for a description of the individual test functions and results. A submenu containing a set of extensive manufacturing tests that return measured parameters for comparison against known limits. A submenu containing a set of functions for commanding more complex actions by portions of the system. See the function menu table for a description of the individual test functions and results. Reports current firmware version. Displays the current status Reports the current mechanism status as understood by the Exit Module Control Board. The status is reported as one or more of the following messages: Ready Figure 3 8860MFP Service Diagnostics Menu (3/3) Service Diagnostics Menu Definitions Table 3 provides a description, behavior, and preconditions for Service Diagnostic tests. Table 3 Service Diagnostics Menu Definitions Menu Item Main Menu Menu Help Exit Diagnostics Report MFP Config Print Engine Displays information on how to use the menus. Exits Service Diagnostics and runs through POST to Ready. Lists the system configuration. Lists the print engine tests. Each menu item under this print engine menu has its own table describing the individual test descriptions and results Lists the Exit Module tests. Lists the Scanner Assembly tests. Lists the DADF tests. Lists the Fax tests. Lists the Control Panel tests. Exercise Elevator Home Sequence Description Monitor Sensors Rollers Open Roller Closed Elevator Up Driving Rollers Down Description
Exercise Menu
Monitors all sensors associated with the Exit Module assembly. Manually exercise the sensor flags and verify the results. Exit Home Position Sensor - Home or Not Home Exit Sensor - Paper or No Paper Output Tray Full Sensor - Full or Not Full
Exercises the exit path elevator home position and reports final status as Ready or Error.
Exercise Elevator Lift Causes the exit path elevator to move to the lifted position, pause, then Sequence move back to the Home position. Exercise Roller Drive Rotates the exit path transport rollers clockwise, then counter-clockwise, performs a seek home command, and then reports final status as Ready or Error. Test Exit Path Subsystem Reset Path Subsystem The test sends a series of commands to verify the operation elevator and exit drive rollers. This resets the Exit Module, Scanner, and DADF, and then reports status as Ready or Not Ready
* The Control Panel, Exit Module, Scanner, DADF, and Fax are separate subsystems with their own diagnostic firmware. In these tests, Service Diagnostics commands the subsystem to perform its built-in test, and reports the results on the display. Each subsystem is tested separately, with an electronic reset performed when switching the testing focus from one subsystem to another. Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual
09/2007 6-9
Diagnostics
Service Diagnostics
Table 3 Service Diagnostics Menu Definitions Menu Item Scanner Menu Report FW Version Report Status Reports current firmware version. Reports the current Scanner Assembly status: OK- (no errors detected) Report Lamp Status Internal Target Failure Optical Test Error Home Position Test Error Check Lock Test Error Description Menu Item Doc Handler Menu Report FW Version Report Status
Table 3 Service Diagnostics Menu Definitions Description Reports the current DADF firmware version. Reports the current DADF module status: OK - (no errors detected) Report Lamp Status Paper Jam Cover Open Internal Target Failure Test Fail Optical Test Error Calibration Device Error
The Scanner reports the current lamp status as On, Off, or Warming Up. The Warming Up status includes the dim state, which won't change to On until instructed to do so. This monitors the state of the Scanner Cover (DADF or Document Cover) Sensor. Toggle the sensor state by opening the cover. The Scanner performs a DRAM test. Errors are reported as a Internal Target Failure and the lamp flashes twice.
The DADF reports the current lamp status as On, Off, or Warming Up. The Warming Up status includes the dim state, which won't change to On until instructed to do so. The DADF reports the current status as Paper or No Paper. Tests the DADF No Paper and Cover Sensors. Toggle the actuator to change sensor state. Results are reported as Paper Present or Not Present, and Cover Open or Closed. The DADF performs a DRAM test. Errors are reported as a Internal Target Failure and the lamp flashes twice. The DADF performs a Data Capture test which exercises the lamp, optics, CCD, DRAM, and supporting electronics. Errors are reported as an Optical Device Error. For this test the lamp is on and the scan head is moved under the calibration strip.
Exercise Axis Motion The Scanner moves the scan axis to the Home position, then to the right limit of travel, and then back to the Home position. This test exercises the axis motion mechanism and the Home sensor. Exercise Axis Unlocked Exercise Data Capture The Scanner performs a Locked test. Errors are reported as Check Lock Test Error. The test determines if the scanner motion axis is currently unlocked and available for use. The Scanner performs a Data Capture test which exercises the lamp, optics, CCD, DRAM, and supporting electronics. Errors are reported as an Optical Device Error. For this test the lamp is on and the scan head is moved under the calibration strip. The Scanner turns the lamp On, Off, then On. Each state is held for a short time to allow observation of the lamp state. Errors with a light state transition are reported as a Light Check Error. The lamp may be On prior to the test, and the lamp is left On after the test. Each lamp On transition triggers a calibration function which takes approximately 50 seconds to complete. The test exercises the lamp and the lamp control. The Scanner runs a series of tests to verify the operation of these Scanner functions as previously described: DRAM Reset Scanner Subsystem Unlock Motion Capture Lamp
Exercise Lamp
Test Cal Sheet Motion The DADF performs a Calibration Motion test which moves the cal sheet out under the lamp. Errors are reported as a Calibration Device Error. The test determines if the cal sheet motion is as expected. Exercise Feed Motion The DADH performs a Transmission test. This test rotates the transport rollers for a short time (sufficient to transport a 14 inch sheet of paper). The test requires observation of the correct action, and a final status of Complete is always reported. Remove all media from the DADF before running this test. Exercise Lamp The DADF turns the lamp On, Off, then On. Each state is held for a short time to allow observation of the lamp state. Errors with a light state transition are reported as a Light Check Error. The lamp may be On prior to the test, and the lamp is left On after the test. Each lamp On transition triggers a calibration function which takes approximately 50 seconds to complete. The test exercises the lamp and the lamp control.
This test forces a hardware reset of the Exit Module, Scanner, DADF and FAX modules.
Diagnostics
Service Diagnostics
09/2007 6-10
Table 3 Service Diagnostics Menu Definitions Menu Item Test Doc Handler Subsystem Description The DADF runs a series of tests to verify the operation of these DADF functions as previously described: DRAM Reset DADF Subsystem FAX Modem Menu Report FW Version Report Line Status Test FAX Modem Subsystem Reset FAX Modem Subsystem Control Panel Menu Report FW Version Monitor Buttons Reports the current firmware version. Reports Control Panel button activity. Results are identified by the button name and the transition (Pressed/Released). The test ends when there have been no button presses for 10 seconds. Cycles the Backlight Off then On to verify pixels and operation. After the test ends, the display settings are backlight maximum, contrast is minimum, and the pixel background is clear. Exercises each Control Panel LED by turning On, flashing, then turning Off. The LEDs are activated beginning with the upper right most LED and moves from top to bottom and left to right until all LEDs have been activated. The pattern repeats. As each LED is activated, the LED name is displayed. After termination all LEDs are off. Reports the current firmware version. Reports whether the FAX modem is able to detect a Dial Tone on a connected phone line. The FAX modem runs an analog loopback test. When the test is stopped, the error rate (mismatched characters received / characters sent) is reported. This forces a hardware reset of the Exit Module, Scanner, DADF and FAX modules. Feed Cal Sheet Capture Lamp
Print Engine Monitor Menu The Print Engine Monitor tests report current values (temperatures, positions, etc.), and demonstrate the ability to read the values without changing the current state of the system. Some monitor tests, such as sensors, allow tracking of the values as a state change, either manually or otherwise. Press any Control Panel key to stop the test. Table 4 Print Engine Monitor Menu Definitions Test Sensors Description Results
This forces a hardware reset of the Exit Module, Scanner, DADF and FAX modules.
Monitors all mechanically activated senState changes are reported as: sors in the print engine, except the front H = Open or de-actuated panel buttons. When a state change is L = Closed/Present/Actuated detected it is reported on the display. The state change reports scroll up as new ones are added. If the sensor transitions several times very fast (too fast to do by hand), the transition is reported as a bounce. Monitors these analog sensors: Tray 1 width sensor Y-Axis Motor encoder Media Drive Motor encoder Process Drive Motor encoders These sensors are monitored: Tray 1 Media Width Y-Axis Position Media Path Motor Position Process Motor Position
Encoders
Temps
Monitors each of the thermal sensors. Abbreviations used: Shows the current thermal control setpoint LJ = Left Jetstack (first value) and the current sensor temper- RJ = Right Jetstack ature (second value). RE = Reservoir DR = Drum PH = Preheater IM = Ink Melter 1, 2, 3, or 4
Exercise Display
Exercise LEDs
Heaters
Monitors each of the heaters and shows if Abbreviations used: LJ = Left Jetstack the heater is currently enabled (first value) and what percentage of maximum power is RJ = Right Jetstack currently allocated (second value). RE = Reservoir DR = Drum PH = Preheater IM = Ink Melter 1, 2, 3, or 4
Line Voltage Monitors the line voltage seen by the power supply. Reports the minimum and maximum values seen during the monitoring period. Fast line voltage spikes are not reported. Helps to evaluate the AC supply, such as line voltage sags do to the start up of adjacent equipment. You can run this test overnight to record supply voltage settings.
09/2007 6-11
Diagnostics
Service Diagnostics
Print Engine Exercise Menu This submenu contains a group of functions intended to stimulate a specific portion of the print engine system in such a way that the test can be observed. Listening observations may be required for certain tests and will prompt you on the control panel if covers, doors, or trays need to be removed. Table 5 Print Engine Exercise Menu Definitions Test Activators Menu Exercise All Tray 1 Pick Solenoid Tray 2 Pick Clutch Tray 3 Pick Clutch Tray 4 Pick Clutch Deskew Clutch Strip Solenoid Head Maintenance Clutch Purge Vent Solenoid Drum Heater Relay Description The tests pulse the specified target causing it to generate a sound or motion. The Exercise All function cycles each of the listed components below 4 times, in sequence, until interrupted by pressing the Cancel button. The other functions continue cycling repeatedly until interrupted by a control panel key press. The Cancel button should be pressed only when the state is Off Test Motor/Shafts Menu Exercise All Process Motor Y-axis Motor X-axis Motor
Table 5 Print Engine Exercise Menu Definitions Description The motor and shaft functions drive the specified motor or shaft enough to generate enough motion to be easily observed (usually 1 revolution), without making a substantial change to the state of the system.The Exercise All function cycles each of the listed motors/shafts 3 times in sequence until interrupted by a control panel button press. The other functions continue to cycle the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a control panel key press.
Purge Pump Motor Drum Fan Motor Electronics Fan Motor Media Path Motor & Shafts Transfix Cam Shaft Drum Maintenance Cam Shaft Deskew Shaft Wiper Shaft Tray 1 Pick Shaft Tray 2 Pick Shaft Tray 3 Pick Shaft Tray 0 lift motor Tray 3 Lift Motor Tray 3 Motor & Shafts Tray 4 Pick Shaft Tray 4 Lift Motor Tray 4 Motor & Shafts
Heaters Menu Monitor Heaters Monitor Temperatures All Heaters On (warmup to normal operating temperature setpoints with Ink Melt Heaters Off). All Heaters Off Toggle Printhead Heaters Toggle Preheat Heater Toggle Drum Heater Toggle Ink Melt Heaters (The Ink Melt Heaters remain On for 4 seconds.).
Allows the heaters to be forced to an On or Off condition or to be toggled from one condition to the other. Also provides monitoring to observe the resulting heater power or temperature.
Diagnostics
Service Diagnostics
09/2007 6-12
Print Engine Function Menu This submenu contains a group of functions that either perform higher-level exercise functions involving multiple print engine subsystems, or special purpose functions requiring software support, such as working with NVRAM. Table 6 Print Engine Function Menu Function Initialize Mechanism Print DMU Blot Description Performs a simplified version of the power-up mechanical initialization sequence. Raises the DM unit up against the drum, then does a Chase sequence. The result is an oil print of the contact of the DM unit with the drum (about 2/3 down the page). Displays the contents of the Fault History NVRAM store.
Access PE NVRAM Parameters A restricted function that provides read/write access to selected PE NVRAM parameters. Clear Fault History Clear PS NVRAM Clear PE NVRAM Set PE NVRAM to Defaults A restricted function that clears the Fault History NVRAM store. A restricted function that clears the PS NVRAM to be rebuilt with defaults at the next power-up. A restricted function that clears the PE NVRAM to be rebuilt with defaults at the next power-up. A restricted function that sets the PE NVRAM parameters to the default values.
Print Engine Check Menu This submenu contains a group of tests that perform specific measurements on portions of the print engine and report measured values to the Control Panel. These tests are typically used to verify system operation during manufacture. Details of the function and output of these tests is provided in the Print Engine Check Menu Tests discussion. Table 7 Print Engine Check Menu Test Menu Check All Activators Menu Shafts Menu Fans Menu Heaters Menu Paper Path Menu Drive Menu Drum Menu Motors Menu Misc. Menu Description Each of the tests listed under the submenus contained in the Check Menu are described in detail in Print Engine Check Menu Tests.
NOTE: The Check All selection runs all check tests, taking 1.5 hours to complete and is not for use by field technicians.
Activators Menu
Check Menu Activator tests measure DC (i.e. steady state), parameters and do not provide information on transient phenomenon, such as rise/fall times, inductive overshoot, change in inductance due to core/clapper pull in, etc.). The parameters measured do not verify mechanical function. An audible noise generated by most activator tests is one indication of mechanical activity. Observable motion is another. Tests the selected component and reports the value of the characteristic defined in the following tables.
09/2007 6-13
Diagnostics
Head Maintenance Clutch Test This test briefly energizes the Head Maintenance Clutch coil and measures parameters. Peak power is expected to be very close to the average power level. An appreciable deviation could indicate a variation in the supply voltage or coil resistance, possibly due to heating during the test. A change in heating behavior could indicate a problem with cooling or the thermal conductivity through the mounting. Deviations from typical average values could indicate voltage supply problems, and/or unexpected resistance. Table 1 Head Maintenance Clutch Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 Peak Power (Watts) Average Power (Watts) Typical Value N/A N/A Result Reports the profile maximum power. Report the average power during the constant portion of the parts profile. Stripper Solenoid Test R# Characteristic 3 4 5
Table 3 Preheater Solenoid Nominal Values Typical Value Result Reports the power On peak solenoid power. Reports the average high power following power On. Reports the average low power following power On.
Peak High Pull Power (Watts) N/A Average High Pull Power (Watts) Average Low Pull Power (Watts) N/A N/A
Deskew Clutch Test This test briefly energizes the Deskew Clutch coil and measures parameters. Peak power is expected to be very close to the average power level. An appreciable deviation could indicate a variation in the supply voltage or coil resistance, possibly due to heating during the test. A change in heating behavior could indicate a problem with cooling or the thermal conductivity through the mounting. Deviations from typical average values could indicate voltage supply problems, and/or unexpected resistance. Table 2 Deskew Clutch Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 Peak Power (Watts) Average Power (Watts) Typical Value N/A N/A Result Reports the profile maximum power. Report the average power during the constant portion of the parts profile.
This test briefly energizes the Stripper Solenoid and measures parameters. Peak power is expected to be very close to the average power level. An appreciable deviation could indicate a variation in the supply voltage or coil resistance, possibly due to heating during the test. A change in heating behavior could indicate a problem with cooling or the thermal conductivity through the mounting. Deviations from typical average values could indicate voltage supply problems, and/or unexpected resistance. Table 4 Stripper Solenoid Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 Peak Power (Watts) Average Power (Watts) Typical Value N/A N/A Result Reports the profile maximum power. Report the average power during the constant portion of the parts profile.
Tray 1 Pick Solenoid Test This test briefly energizes the Tray 1 Pick Solenoid and measures parameters. Peak power is expected to be very close to the average power level. An appreciable deviation could indicate a variation in the supply voltage or coil resistance, possibly due to heating during the test. A change in heating behavior could indicate a problem with cooling or the thermal conductivity through the mounting. Deviations from typical average values could indicate voltage supply problems, and/or unexpected resistance. Table 5 Tray 1 Pick Solenoid Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 Peak Power (Watts) Average Power (Watts) Typical Value N/A N/A Result Reports the profile maximum power. Report the average power during the constant portion of the parts profile.
Preheater Solenoid Test This test separately energizes both Preheater Solenoid coils briefly, and then measures parameters. The peak power level is expected to be constant during the On High intervals. Therefore, peak power is expected to be very close to the average power level. An appreciable deviation could indicate a variation in the supply voltage or coil resistance, possibly due to heating during the test. A change in heating behavior could indicate a problem with cooling or the thermal conductivity through the mounting. The Low power level is generated via a software controlled voltage signal. The presence of any intermediate value indicates that the drive circuitry is operating correctly. The Preheater plates should not relax when the power level drops to low. Table 3 Preheater Solenoid Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 Peak High Push Power (Watts) Average High Push Power (Watts) Average Low Push Power (Watts) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A Result Reports the profile maximum power. Reports the average power during the constant portion of the parts profile. Reports the low average power.
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-14
Tray 2~4 Pick Clutch Tests These tests briefly energize the Tray 2, 3, or 4 Pick Clutch and measures parameters. Peak power is expected to be very close to the average power level. An appreciable deviation could indicate a variation in the supply voltage or coil resistance, possibly due to heating during the test. A change in heating behavior could indicate a problem with cooling or the thermal conductivity through the mounting. Deviations from typical average values could indicate voltage supply problems, and/or unexpected resistance. Table 6 Tray 2 ~ 4 Pick Clutch Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 Peak Power (Watts) Average Power (Watts) Typical Value N/A N/A Result Reports the profile maximum power. Report the average power during the constant portion of the parts profile.
Drum Heater Relay Test This test briefly energizes both relay coils of the Drum Heater Relay Board and measures parameters. Peak power is expected to be very close to the average power level. An appreciable deviation could indicate a variation in the supply voltage or coil resistance, possibly due to heating during the test. A change in heating behavior could indicate a problem with cooling or the thermal conductivity through the mounting. Deviations from typical average values could indicate voltage supply problems, and/or unexpected resistance Table 9 Drum Heater Relay Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 3 220V Coil Peak Power (Watts) 220V Coil Average Power (Watts) 110V Coil Peak Power (Watts) 110V Coil Average Power (Watts) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A N/A Result The profile maximum power. The average power during the constant portion of the parts profile. The profile maximum power. The average power during the constant portion of the parts profile.
Head Tilt Solenoid Test This test briefly energizes the Head Tilt Solenoid and measures parameters. The solenoid is activated for a short time at both the high and low power levels while the power is measured. The peak power level is expected to be constant during the On High intervals. Therefore, peak power is expected to be very close to the average power level. An appreciable deviation could indicate a variation in the supply voltage or coil resistance, possibly due to heating during the test. A change in heating behavior could indicate a problem with cooling or the thermal conductivity through the mounting. The Low power level is generated via a software controlled voltage signal. The presence of any intermediate value indicates that the drive circuitry is operating correctly. The Preheater plates should not relax when the power level drops to low. Table 7 Head Tilt Solenoid Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 Peak High Push Power (Watts) Average High Push Power (Watts) Average Low Push Power (Watts) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A Result Reports the power ON high peak power. Report the power On high average power. Reports the power On low average power.
Shafts Menu
Runs the selected shaft in both directions to determine shaft characteristics, steady state drive requirements, bearing status, etc. The objective of these tests is to perform dynamic testing of the engaging clutch. Deskew Shaft Test This test attempts to determine if the deskew shaft is controllable and is operating normally. The deskew shaft is first driven for a short time to loosen up the gears/bearings and run any flat spots out of the rollers. Then the Media Drive Assembly is started and run for a short time without the deskew shaft. Next, the deskew clutch is engaged "on the fly". After a short time, the clutch is released and the Media Drive Assembly is stopped. This process repeats for the opposite direction of deskew shaft rotation. The response of the system to the clutch engagement/disengagement should show the clutch characteristics. The steady state drive requirements indicate bearing status and the condition of the rollers, flat/dirty, bent shafts, etc. The data used is the Media Drive Assembly servo system following error (fe), which is a measure of how hard the system is working at any point in time. Table 10 Deskew Shaft Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 Time to CCW On peak fe (sec) Typical Value N/A Result Reports how long it takes the Media Drive Assy servo system to react to the sudden addition of the deskew shaft load. Larger values may show a slipping/ slow to engage clutch. Reports peak effort needed to accelerate the deskew shaft load. A smaller value could indicate a slipping clutch.
Purge Vent Solenoid Test This test briefly energizes the Purge Vent Solenoid and measures parameters. Peak power is expected to be very close to the average power level. An appreciable deviation could indicate a variation in the supply voltage or coil resistance, possibly due to heating during the test. A change in heating behavior could indicate a problem with cooling or the thermal conductivity through the mounting. Deviations from typical average values could indicate voltage supply problems, and/or unexpected resistance. Table 8 Purge Vent Solenoid Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 Peak Power (Watts) Average Power (Watts) Typical Value N/A N/A Result Reports the profile maximum power. Report the average power during the constant portion of the parts profile. Diagnostics 1 CCW On peak fe N/A
09/2007 6-15
Table 10 Deskew Shaft Nominal Values R# Characteristic 2 Typical Value Result Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to settle down after the sudden addition of the deskew shaft load. A longer time could indicate a loose deskew shaft or a slipping clutch. Reports the average effort required to rotate the deskew shaft in the CCW direction at a constant velocity. An unusual value could indicate a difference in the composition and/or number of the rollers, the nip pressure, or out of range mechanical dimensions due to wear or contamination (such as paper dust increasing the effective diameter of a roller). Reports the variation of effort required to rotate the deskew shaft in the CCW direction at a constant velocity. A larger value could indicate particles in the gears or non uniform contamination of a roller (causing a lump). Reports the time it takes the Media Drive Motor servo system to settle down after the sudden release of the deskew shaft load. A larger value can indicate a slow to release or dragging clutch. Reports a time that indicates how long it takes the MP motor servo system to react to the sudden addition of the deskew shaft load. Larger values may indicate a slipping or slow to engage clutch. Reports the peak effort required to accelerate the deskew shaft load. A smaller value could indicate a slipping clutch. Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to settle down after the sudden addition of the deskew shaft load. A longer time could indicate a looseness in the deskew shaft assembly or a slipping clutch. R# Characteristic 9 CW On average fe
Table 10 Deskew Shaft Nominal Values Typical Value N/A Result Reports the average effort required to rotate the deskew shaft in the CW direction at a constant velocity. An unusual value could indicate a difference in the composition and/or number of rollers, the nip pressure, or out of range mechanical dimensions due to wear or contamination (such as paper dust increasing the effective diameter of a roller). Reports the variation of effort required to rotate the deskew shaft in the CW direction at a constant velocity. A larger value could indicate particles in the gears or non uniform contamination of a roller (causing a lump). Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to settle down after the sudden release of the deskew shaft load. A larger value could indicate a dragging or slow to release clutch.
CCW On average fe
N/A
10 CW On fe ripple
N/A
CCW On fe ripple
N/A
N/A
Wiper Shaft Test This test exercises the Head Maintenance Clutch and Wiper Assembly. The test raises the wiper to just under the tilt engage point, and then moves the wiper to home position to initialize the drive mechanism. Next, the Printhead is tilted back out of the way and the Media Drive Assembly is driven for a short time. While the Media Drive Assembly is being driven, the Head Maintenance Clutch is engaged. Finally, the clutch is released and the Media Drive Assembly is stopped. This process repeats for the opposite direction. If the Printhead does not tilt to the Standby position, the Wiper Blade will interfere with the Printhead causing error in the recorded values. The system response to the Head Maintenance Clutch activity demonstrates the clutch characteristics. Steady state drive values indicate bearing status and the condition of the pulleys, belts, and shafts. The CW and CCW measurements are slightly different due to the vertical motion of the Wiper Assembly. The data used is the Media Drive Assembly servo system following error (fe), which is a measure of how hard the system is working at any point in time. Table 11 Wiper Shaft Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 Time to CCW On peak fe (sec) Typical Value N/A Result Reports how long it takes the Media Drive Assembly servo system to react to the sudden addition of the wiper shaft load. Larger values may show a slipping/ slow to engage clutch. Reports peak effort needed to accelerate the wiper shaft load. A smaller value could indicate a slipping clutch. Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual
CW On peak fe
N/A
N/A
CCW On peak fe
N/A
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-16
Table 11 Wiper Shaft Nominal Values R# Characteristic 2 Typical Value Result Reports the time it takes the Media Drive Assembly servo system to settle down after the sudden addition of the wiper shaft load. A longer time could indicate a slipping clutch. Reports the average effort required to rotate the wiper shaft in the CCW direction at a constant velocity. Reports the variation of effort required to rotate the wiper shaft in the CCW direction at a constant velocity. Reports the time it takes the Media Drive Assembly servo system to settle down after the sudden release of the wiper shaft load. A larger value can indicate a slow to release or dragging clutch. Reports a time that indicates how long it takes the Media Drive Assembly servo system to react to the sudden addition of the wiper shaft load. Larger values may indicate a slipping or slow to engage clutch. Reports the peak effort required to accelerate the wiper shaft load. A smaller value could indicate a slipping clutch. Reports the time it takes the Media Drive Assembly servo system to settle down after the sudden addition of the wiper shaft load. A longer time could indicate a loose wiper shaft or a slipping clutch. Reports the average effort required to rotate the wiper shaft in the CW direction at a constant velocity. An unusual value could indicate a difference in the composition and/or number of rollers, the nip pressure, or out of range mechanical dimensions due to wear or contamination (such as paper dust increasing the effective diameter of a roller). R# Characteristic 10 CW On fe ripple
Table 11 Wiper Shaft Nominal Values Typical Value N/A Result Reports the variation of effort required to rotate the wiper shaft in the CW direction at a constant velocity. Most of this variation is caused by the normal gear mesh impulses in the assembly. An irregular ripple could be caused by the wiper binding in the track (too long, misaligned, or loose clips). A long term ripple could be caused by a worn or out of spec drive belt. Other unexpected variation could come from non-circular gears, broken/ malformed teeth, foreign materials in the teeth, dirty rollers, bent shafts, etc. Reports the time it takes the Media Drive Assembly servo system to settle down after the sudden release of the wiper shaft load. A larger value could indicate a dragging or slow to release clutch.
CCW On average fe
N/A
CCW On fe ripple
N/A
N/A
Tray 1 Pick Shaft Test This test exercises the Tray 1 pick mechanism to determine if the shaft can be engaged/disengaged and to measure the friction between the Pick Roller and the Separator Pad. The Media Drive Assembly is started and run for a short time without the Tray 1 pick shaft to loosen up the gears/bearings. Next, the Tray 1 Pick Solenoid is engaged and through one revolution of the pick shaft and released right after the next trip point so that two full revolutions are obtained. During the two revolutions, the drive requirements are recorded to test the interaction between the Tray 1 pick shaft, Pick Roller, lift plate, and Separator Pad. The data used in the analysis is the Media Drive Assembly servo system following error (fe), which is a measure of how hard the drive system is working at any point in tim. Open Tray 1, remove any media, and fold out the media extension before running this test. Table 12 Tray 1 Pick Shaft Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 Off average Media Drive fe. (mpts) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the average MP fe during the run in interval before the pick shaft is engaged.
CW On peak fe
N/A
N/A
CW On average fe
N/A
09/2007 6-17
Diagnostics
Table 12 Tray 1 Pick Shaft Nominal Values R# Characteristic 1 On response time. (sec) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the time between Pick Solenoid activation and a detectable response from the Media Drive Assembly indicating pick shaft engagement. A higher value of R1 could indicate that the pick shaft gear engaged more slowly than usual, which could be a problem with the lift plate spring tension, the condition of the sliding surfaces between the cams and followers, drag on the pick shaft, or problems with the drive gears (missing teeth, etc.). Reports the average Media Drive fe immediately following pick shaft engagement. A higher value of R2 could indicate extra friction between the cams and the lift plate followers (wear, contamination, etc.), as well as high lift plate spring tension or higher shaft bearing drag. Also, if the pick shaft gear did not engage, this value is unchanged from R0. Reports the minimum MP fe value at the transition point between breaking separator pad contact and the continued depression of the lift plate. Value reflects the effort needed to rotate the pick shaft and compress the lift spring. A higher value of R3 could show higher cam/bearing friction and/or lift plate spring strength. Reports the average Media Drive fe while the Pick Roller is contacting the Separator Pad. This value reflects friction between the Separator Pad and the Pick Roller. This value may be effected by contamination or glazing. Reports the peak MP fe during the interval when the pick cams are depressing the lift plate A higher value here could indicate issues with the cam surfaces or the spring compression force. Reports the average Media Drive fe following the latching of the pick shaft gear. This value should be the same as R0 if the pick shaft gear successfully latched.
Tray 2, 3, or 4 Pick Shaft Test This test determines if the specified tray pick shaft is operating normally. The test is the same for each pick shaft, although for Tray 2, the Media Drive Assembly is used instead of the optional Tray Motor. Requesting a test for a missing tray generates an "option not detected" message and the test does not run. This test checks Pick Clutch, Nudger Roller, and Separator Pad performance, although information is obtained about bearing, gear and shaft condition. At the start of the test, a prompt requests removal of any media, if present, in the tray (if initially empty, cycle the tray to leave the lift plate in the down position). Acknowledge the prompt by pressing a Control Panel key. After acknowledgement, the pick shaft is driven for a short time to loosen up the gears and bearings. Next, the Tray Motor is run for a short time with the pick shaft disengaged. The pick clutch is momentarily engaged and the Tray Motor stopped. The test continues by running the pick shaft at a slow pick speed. At the same time, the corresponding lift plate is raised. The raising operation terminates when the Paper Height Sensor goes High. The pick shaft continues to run for a short time to determine the amount of friction between the Nudger Roller and the Separator Pad. The system response to the Pick Clutch activity demonstrates the clutch characteristics. The steady state drive requirements should show bearing status and the characteristics of the roller materials, flat/dirty rollers, bent shafts, etc. Nudger Roller and Separator Pad friction indicates condition of these parts (glazed, dirty). Table 13 Tray 2, 3, or 4 Pick Shaft Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 Time to On peak fe (sec) Typical Value N/A Result Reports a time that indicates how long it takes the Media Drive Assembly servo system to react to the sudden addition of the pick shaft load. Larger values may indicate a slipping or slow to engage clutch. Reports the peak effort required to accelerate the pick shaft load. A smaller value could indicate a slipping clutch. Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to settle down after the sudden addition of the pick shaft load. A longer time could indicate looseness in the pick shaft or a slipping clutch. Reports the average effort needed to rotate the pick shaft in the pick direction at a constant velocity. An unusual value could indicate a binding shaft, missing pressure springs, hard/dirty rollers, or excessive friction. Reports the variation of effort required to rotate the pick shaft in the pick direction at a constant velocity. A larger value could indicate particles in the gears or non uniform contamination of a roller (causing a lump).
N/A
On peak fe
N/A
N/A
Contact average fe
N/A
On average fe
N/A
Pushdown MP fe max
N/A
On fe ripple
N/A
N/A
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-18
Table 13 Tray 2, 3, or 4 Pick Shaft Nominal Values R# Characteristic 5 Off fe settling time (sec) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to settle down after the sudden release of the Tray 2 pick shaft load. A larger value could indicate a dragging or slow to release clutch. Reports the time between the activation of the Tray Motor and the detection of the raised lift plate. Out of range values may indicate a problem with the lifting mechanism (which could effect the following friction measurement), or media in the tray. Reports the peak effort required to drive the pick shaft when the nudger roller is in contact with the separator pad. A smaller value could indicate a slipping clutch, missing Nudger Roller pressure spring, or a glazed pad.
Electronics Fan Test The Electronics Module Fan is turned On and allowed to rotate to its constant velocity. Next, the Drum Fan is turned Off and the values are calculated. Typical values are influenced by part variability and power supply tolerances. Table 15 Electronics Fan Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 3 Max Power (Watts) Constant Velocity Power (Watts) Typical Value N/A N/A Result Reports the initial fan power draw. Reports the power drawn by the fan while running a constant velocity. Reports the power ripple while the fan is running at constant velocity. Reports the time from On until the fan reaches constant velocity. Values above typical could indicate a weak fan, extra drag (bearings, blades), or obstructed airflow.
N/A
Constant Velocity Power Rip- N/A ple (Watts) Constant Velocity Time (sec) N/A
N/A
Heaters Menu
These tests determine if the selected heater is operating as expected. When test data on a specific heater is requested, all of the heaters are tested as a group and the data for the selected heater is displayed. Subsequent requests for heater test data is derived from this captured information (without further testing). Heater test data remains in memory until a nonheater test is selected, a reset, or restart occurs. The test tilts the Printhead back to isolate the Drum from the jetstack heaters. The Drum is rotated at idle velocity to keep the Drum temperature uniform. The test then sequentially applies power to each heater (while monitoring all of the temperatures), to produce a temperature response. The test determines the relationship between heating power applied, the resulting temperature response profile, and the current drawn by each heater. Reservoir Heater Test The Printhead reservoir heater test characteristics and descriptions are listed in the following table. Table 16 Reservoir Heater Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 AC Line Voltage (volts) Initial Temperature (deg C) Average AC Current Delta (amps) Average AC Voltage Delta (volts) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A Result Reports the baseline AC voltage prior to the start of the test. Reports the thermistor temperature prior to the application of heater power. Reports the average difference from baseline AC current during the specified heating interval. Reports the average difference from baseline AC volts during the specified heating interval.
Fans Menu
These tests determine if the specified fan is operating properly. The selected fan is turned on for a short interval while the power is measured. Drum Fan Test The Drum Fan is turned On and allowed to rotate to its constant velocity. Next, the Drum Fan is turned Off and the values are calculated. Typical values are influenced by part variability and power supply tolerances. Table 14 Drum Fan Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 3 Max Power (Watts) Constant Velocity Power (Watts) Typical Value N/A N/A Result Reports the initial fan power draw. Reports the power drawn by the fan while running a constant velocity. Reports the power ripple while the fan is running at constant velocity. Reports the time from On until the fan reaches constant velocity. Values above typical could indicate a weak fan, extra drag (bearings, blades), or obstructed airflow.
Constant Velocity Power Rip- N/A ple (Watts) Constant Velocity Time (sec) N/A
N/A
09/2007 6-19
Diagnostics
Table 16 Reservoir Heater Nominal Values R# Characteristic 4 Response Time (ms) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the time following the application of power to the specified heater that the corresponding temperature begins to increase. Reports the temperature at the end of the heating interval. Reports the peak temperature following the end of the heating interval. Reports the time following the application of power to the specified heater until the peak temperature is reached. Reports the final temperature at a fixed time following the peak temperature time.
Right Jetstack Heater Test The Right Jetstack heater test characteristics and descriptions are listed in the following table. Table 18 Right Jetstack Heater Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 AC Line Voltage (volts) Initial Temperature (deg C) Average AC Current Delta (amps) Average AC Voltage Delta (volts) Response Time (ms) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A Result Reports the baseline AC voltage prior to the start of the test. Reports the thermistor temperature prior to the application of heater power. Reports the average difference from baseline AC current during the specified heating interval. Reports the average difference from baseline AC volts during the specified heating interval. Reports the time following the application of power to the specified heater that the corresponding temperature begins to increase. Reports the temperature at the end of the heating interval. Reports the peak temperature following the end of the heating interval. Reports the time following the application of power to the specified heater until the peak temperature is reached. Reports the final temperature at a fixed time following the peak temperature time.
5 6 7
N/A N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Left Jetstack Heater Test The Left Jetstack heater test characteristics and descriptions are listed in the following table. 5 Table 17 Left Jetstack Heater Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 AC Line Voltage (volts) Initial Temperature (deg C) Average AC Current Delta (amps) Average AC Voltage Delta (volts) Response Time (ms) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A Result Reports the baseline AC voltage prior to the start of the test. Reports the thermistor temperature prior to the application of heater power. Reports the average difference from baseline AC current during the specified heating interval. Reports the average difference from baseline AC volts during the specified heating interval. Reports the time following the application of power to the specified heater that the corresponding temperature begins to increase. Reports the temperature at the end of the heating interval. Reports the peak temperature following the end of the heating interval. Reports the time following the application of power to the specified heater until the peak temperature is reached. Reports the final temperature at a fixed time following the peak temperature time. 6 7 End Heating Temperature (deg c) Peak Temperature (deg c) N/A N/A
N/A
N/A
Preheater Test The Preheater test characteristics and descriptions are listed in the following table. Table 19 Preheater Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 AC Line Voltage (volts) Initial Temperature (deg C) Average AC Current Delta (amps) Average AC Voltage Delta (volts) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A Result Reports the baseline AC voltage prior to the start of the test. Reports the thermistor temperature prior to the application of heater power. Reports the average difference from baseline AC current during the specified heating interval. Reports the average difference from baseline AC volts during the specified heating interval.
N/A
5 6 7
N/A N/A
N/A
N/A
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-20
Table 19 Preheater Nominal Values R# Characteristic 4 Response Time (ms) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the time following the application of power to the specified heater that the corresponding temperature begins to increase. Reports the temperature at the end of the heating interval. Reports the peak temperature following the end of the heating interval. Reports the time following the application of power to the specified heater until the peak temperature is reached. Reports the final temperature at a fixed time following the peak temperature time.
Ink Melt Heater Tests The four Ink Melt Heater (YCMK) test characteristics and descriptions are listed in the following table. Select the color of Ink Melt Heater to view the test results. Table 21 Ink Melt Heater Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 AC Line Voltage (volts) Initial Temperature (deg C) Average AC Current Delta (amps) Average AC Voltage Delta (volts) Response Time (ms) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A Result Reports the baseline AC voltage prior to the start of the test. Reports the thermistor temperature prior to the application of heater power. Reports the average difference from baseline AC current during the specified heating interval. Reports the average difference from baseline AC volts during the specified heating interval. Reports the time following the application of power to the specified heater that the corresponding temperature begins to increase. Reports the temperature at the end of the heating interval. Reports the peak temperature following the end of the heating interval. Reports the time following the application of power to the specified heater until the peak temperature is reached. Reports the final temperature at a fixed time following the peak temperature time.
5 6 7
N/A N/A
N/A
N/A
4 Drum Heater Test The Drum heater test characteristics and descriptions are listed in the following table. Table 20 Drum Heater Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 AC Line Voltage (volts) Initial Temperature (deg C) Average AC Current Delta (amps) Average AC Voltage Delta (volts) Response Time (ms) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A Result Reports the baseline AC voltage prior to the start of the test. Reports the thermistor temperature prior to the application of heater power. Reports the average difference from baseline AC current during the specified heating interval. Reports the average difference from baseline AC volts during the specified heating interval. Reports the time following the application of power to the specified heater that the corresponding temperature begins to increase. Reports the temperature at the end of the heating interval. Reports the peak temperature following the end of the heating interval. Reports the time following the application of power to the specified heater until the peak temperature is reached. Reports the final temperature at a fixed time following the peak temperature time. 6 7 5
N/A
N/A N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5 6 7
N/A N/A
N/A
09/2007 6-21
Diagnostics
Paper Drive Power / Duplex Drive Power This test measures required drive power (in Watts). Table 22 Paper Drive Power / Duplex Drive Power Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 3 4 Tray Paper Size Tray 4 Pick Average Power Tray 4 Transport Average Power Tray 4 - 3 Transport Average Power not used Tray 3 Pick Average Power Tray 3 Transport Average Power not used not used Tray 2 Transport Average Power not used not used Tray 1 Transport Average Power Stage Average Power Transfix Average Power Exit Average Power Typical Value 1/2/3/4 0 or 1 N/A N/A N/A Result Reports the source tray. Reports the paper size (0/1 -> A/A4).
Table 22 Paper Drive Power / Duplex Drive Power Nominal Values R# Characteristic 10 Duplex Transfix Average Power 11 Duplex Exit Average Power Typical Value N/A N/A Result Reports average of the power over the duplex transfix interval. Reports average of the power over the duplex exit interval.
Tray 4 Source Tray Reports average power over the Tray 4 pick interval. Reports average of the power over the Tray 4 to Tray 3 transport interval. Reports average power over the Tray 4 to deskew transport interval. No Tray 3 value. Reports average power over the Tray 3 pick interval. Reports average power over the Tray 3 to deskew transport interval. No Tray 2 value. No Tray 2 value. Reports average power over the Tray 2 to deskew transport interval. No Tray 1 value. No Tray 1 value. Reports average power over the Tray 1 to deskew transport interval. Reports average of the power over the stage interval. Reports average of the power over the transfix interval. Reports average of the power over the exit interval for all trays for Simplex operations only. Reports average of the power over the duplex turnaround interval for all trays. Reports average of the power over the duplex pick interval. Reports average of the power over the duplex stage interval.
Paper Leading Edge Times / Duplex Paper Leading Edge Times The test measures the paper leading edge arrival time (in microseconds) at each paper path sensor. An out of range value could indicate slipping rollers or excessive drag. Rollers can slip due to contamination or loss of pressure. A slipping clutch or drag in previous path segment could also result in increased transport times. Table 23 Simplex / Duplex Paper Leading Edge Times Nominal Values R# Characteristic undefined N/A N/A 0 1 2 3 4 Tray Paper Size Tray 4 Pick Interval Time Tray 4-3 Transport Interval Time Typical Value 1/2/3/4 0 or 1 N/A N/A Result Reports the source tray. Reports the paper size (0/1 -> A/A4). Reports the Tray 4 pick interval timing. Reports the Tray 4 to Tray 3 transport interval timing. Reports the Tray 4 transport interval timing. No Tray 3 value. Reports the Tray 3 pick interval timing. Reports Tray 3 transport interval timing. No Tray 2 value. No Tray 2 value. Reports the Tray 2 pick interval timing. No Tray 1 value. No Tray 1 value. Reports the Tray 1 pick interval timing. Reports stage interval timing. Reports the strip interval timing. Reports the exit interval timing. Reports the exit clear timing. Reports turnaround interval timing. Reports duplex pick interval timing.
Tray 3 Source Tray 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 9 not used Tray 3 Pick Interval Time undefined N/A
Tray 3 Transport Interval Time N/A not used not used Tray 2 Pick Interval Time not used not used Tray 1 Pick Interval Time Stage Interval Time Strip Interval Time Exit Interval Time Exited Interval Time Duplex Turnaround Interval Time Duplex Pick Interval Time undefined undefined N/A undefined undefined N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Duplex Operations Only 7 8 9 Duplex Turnaround Average Power Duplex Pick Average Power N/A N/A
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-22
Table 23 Simplex / Duplex Paper Leading Edge Times Nominal Values R# Characteristic 10 Duplex Stage Interval Time 11 Duplex Strip Interval Time 12 Duplex Exit Interval Time 13 Duplex Exited Interval Time Typical Value N/A N/A N/A N/A Result Reports duplex stage interval timing. Reports duplex strip interval timing. Reports duplex exit interval timing. Reports duplex exit interval. 9 Paper Trailing Edge Times / Duplex Paper Trailing Edge Times This test measures the paper trailing edge arrival time (in microseconds) at each paper path sensor. An out of range value could indicate slipping rollers or excessive drag. Rollers can slip due to contamination or loss of pressure. A slipping clutch or drag in previous path segment could result in increased transport times. A sticking sensor, vibration of the trailing edge, media too thin to support the sensor actuator, and buckling or tearing media could produce an apparent media length change effecting the result. Table 24 Simplex / Duplex Paper Trailing Edge Times Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 3 Tray Paper Size Tray 4 Pick Trailing Edge Interval Time Tray 4-3 Pick Trailing Edge Interval Time not used Tray 3 Pick Trailing Edge Interval Time not used not used not used not used Typical Value 1/2/3/4 0 or 1 N/A N/A Result Reports the source tray. Reports the paper size (0/1 -> A/A4). 8
Table 24 Simplex / Duplex Paper Trailing Edge Times Nominal Values R# Characteristic 7 Duplex Turnaround Interval Time Typical Value N/A Result Reports duplex turnaround trailing edge interval timing. Reports the duplex deskew trailing edge interval timing. Reports the duplex Preheater trailing edge interval timing. Reports the duplex strip trailing edge interval timing. Reports the duplex exit trailing edge interval.
Duplex Deskew Trailing Edge N/A Interval Time Duplex Preheat Trailing Edge N/A Interval Time N/A N/A
10 Duplex Strip Trailing Edge Interval Time 11 Duplex Exit Trailing Edge Interval Time
Paper Trailing Edge Bounce Times / Duplex Paper Trailing Edge Bounce Times This test measures the paper trailing edge bounce interval of each paper path sensor (in microseconds). An out of range value can indicate a sticking actuator due to missing, damaged, or displaced springs. Vibration of the trailing edge caused by media type or condition may also cause excessive bounce. Stuck or still bouncing flags (an odd number of transitions following the initial deassertion), causes the test to exit. Table 25 Simplex / Duplex Paper Trailing Edge Bounce Times Nominal Values
Tray 4 Source Tray Reports the Tray 4 pick interval timing. Reports the Tray 4 to Tray 3 transport interval timing. No Tray 3 value. Reports the Tray 3 pick trailing edge interval timing. No Tray 2 value. No Tray 2 value. No Tray 1 value. No Tray 1 value. Reports deskew trailing edge interval timing. Reports Preheater trailing edge interval timing. Reports strip trailing edge interval timing.
R# Characteristic 0 1 2 3 Tray Paper Size Tray 4 Pick Trailing Edge Bounce Interval Time
Result Reports the source tray. Reports the paper size (0/1 -> A/A4). Reports the Tray 4 pick interval bounce timing. Reports the Tray 4 to Tray 3 pick bounce interval timing. No Tray 3 value. Reports the Tray 3 pick bounce interval timing. No Tray 2 value. No Tray 2 value. No Tray 1 value. No Tray 1 value. Reports deskew bounce interval timing. Reports Preheater bounce interval timing. Reports strip bounce interval timing.
Tray 4-3 Pick Bounce Interval N/A Time not used Tray 3 Pick Bounce Interval Time not used not used not used not used Deskew Bounce Interval Time Preheat Bounce Interval Time Strip Bounce Interval Time undefined N/A
Tray 2 Source Tray 2 3 2 3 4 undefined undefined undefined undefined N/A N/A N/A
Deskew Trailing Edge Interval N/A Time Preheat Trailing Edge Interval N/A Time Strip Trailing Edge Interval Time Exit Trailing Edge Interval Time N/A
Simplex Operations Only 7 N/A Reports exit trailing edge interval timing. 5 6
09/2007 6-23
Diagnostics
Table 25 Simplex / Duplex Paper Trailing Edge Bounce Times Nominal Values R# Characteristic 7 7 8 9 Exit Bounce Interval Time Duplex Turnaround Bounce Interval Time Duplex Operations Only N/A Reports duplex turnaround bounce interval timing. Reports the duplex deskew bounce interval timing. Reports the duplex Preheater trailing edge interval timing. Reports the duplex strip bounce interval timing. Reports the duplex exit bounce interval. 3 Typical Value N/A Result Reports exit bounce interval timing. R# Characteristic 2
Table 26 X-Axis Nominal Values Typical Value N/A Result Reports the average power required to move the Printhead from the left stall point to the right stall point. A high value could indicate a problem with the lead screw or the Printhead bearings (lubrication, etc.), or out of spec restraint spring. A too low value could indicate that the restraint spring is missing or damaged. Reports the ripple in the power level required to move the Printhead from the left stall point to the right stall point. A high value could indicate a bad motor, lead screw, or something interfering with the Printheads motion. Reports the average power required to move the Printhead from the right stall point to the left stall point. This value should be lower than R2 due to the effect of the restraint spring. Reports the ripple in the power level required to move the Printhead from the right stall point to the left stall point. This value should be similar to R3. Reports the width of the momentary drop in the required drive power when the Printhead motion is being reversed. A high value could indicate an unusual amount of backlash in the drive mechanism (lead screw/drive cone threads), or an issue with the restraint spring where the Printhead is not being pressed tightly to the drive cone. If the mechanism is tight this value could be 0.
Duplex Deskew Bounce Inter- N/A val Time Duplex Preheat Bounce Inter- N/A val Time
10 Duplex Strip Bounce Interval N/A Time 11 Duplex Exit Bounce Interval Time N/A
N/A
Drive Menu
These tests exercise each subsystems driven by a motor and measure the power required (in Watts). The exception being the Y-Axis tests which are included under the Drum menu. X-Axis Test This test determines if the X-Axis is operating correctly. The X-Axis Motor is driven CW (viewed from behind the motor) until the Printhead stalls at the right stop (viewed from the front of the system). Next, the X-Axis Motor is driven CCW until the Printhead stalls at the left stop. Finally, the Printhead is moved into the clear and a in motion velocity reversal is performed. This test assumes that the X-Axis Motor test produced satisfactory results. Table 26 X-Axis Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 Left Stall Power Level Left Right Distance (in) Typical Value N/A N/A Result Reports the stall power when the Printhead stalls at the left stop. Reports the distance between the left and right stall points in inches. a short distance could indicate something blocking the normal Printhead range of motion (either inside of outside the right side frame), or some significant binding (loose cables, foreign object, Printhead not in the Ready position, etc.). A long distance could mean a problem with the drive cone or motor not turning.
N/A
N/A
Transfix Drive Test CAUTION This test does not clean the Drum before lowering the Transfix Roller. To prevent contamination of the Transfix Roller, check that the Drum is clean before running this test. This test exercises the Transfix Roller and reports the results. The Transfix Drive test measures the dynamic response of the transfix mechanism at normal operating velocity. Table 27 Transfix Drive Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 Time to first contact (sec) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the time from the load command to the engine until the drum indicates pressure roller contact.
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-24
Table 27 Transfix Drive Nominal Values R# Characteristic 1 Loaded Average Y-axis following error (mpts) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the average Y-axis following error during the Roll With Transfix Roller Down interval. Reports the difference between the max and the min Y-axis following error during the Roll With Transfix Roller Down interval. Reports the time from the unload command to the engine until the drum indicates no further contact.
Tilt Axis Drive Test This test exercises the head tilt mechanism. This includes the Drum Maintenance Kit, Process Drive, Media Drive Assembly, Wiper Assembly, and Head Tilt Solenoid and Gear. Table 29 Tilt Axis Drive Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 Tilt Engage Wiper Position (min) Pre Standby peak Location (deg) Pre Standby peak Av (counts) Post Wipe Peak Location (degrees) Post Wipe peak Av (counts) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the distance from the wiper Home position to the tilt cam engage point. Reports the distance around the tilt cam from the tilt engage position to the pre standby peak. Reports the Process Drive following error at the pre standby peak location. Reports the distance around the tilt cam from the tilt engage position to the post wipe peak. Reports the pm motor following error at the post wipe peak location
N/A
N/A
2 Drum Maintenance Drive Test This test determines if the drum maintenance mechanism is operating by placing the Drum Maintenance Kit against the Drum for a short time. First with the roller and blade in contact with the Drum, then just the blade. This test requires that the Drum is clean and not dry to provide a predictable interface surface. NOTE: If this test indicates the Drum Maintenance Kit is not functioning, the Tilt Axis Drive test may also produce out of range results due to the effect of the Drum Maintenance Kit on that test. Table 28 Drum Maintenance Drive Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 Time to blade first contact (sec) Time to roller first contact (sec) Typical Value N/A N/A Result Reports the time to blade contact with the Drum. Reports the time to roller contact with the Drum. Reports the average Y-axis following error during the Roll With Both Loaded interval. Reports the difference between the max and the min Y-axis following error during the Roll With Both Loaded interval. Reports the time till the drum indicates no further roller contact. Reports the average Y-axis following error during the Roll With Blade Loaded interval. Reports the difference between the max and the min Y-axis following error during the Roll With Blade Loaded interval. Reports the time till the drum indicates no further blade contact. 3
N/A N/A
N/A
If the Tilt mechanism does not engage, the test will abort with one of the following messages: Printhead unlatch time-out - The Drum Maintenance following error did not exceed 105% of the Drum Maintenance only max with in the Process Motor tilt drive interval. The wiper stalled during the scan before unlatching the Head Tilt Gear. The most likely cause is the Wiper Blade is not level causing the high end to contact the drip bib and stalling the wiper axis before unlatching the gear. Other causes could be that the Head Tilt Gear is jammed (full of ink), or not properly biased (Head Tilt Spring missing or defective). Also the trip lever could require extra effort to lift (flat spring stronger than usual, rough or warped engage surface with gear, binding/drag from Head Tilt Solenoid), causing the wiper axis to stall before contacting the drip bib. Extra drag in the wiper mechanism could also cause a stall. Process Drive stalled before the Head Tilt Gear was unlatched.
Roller/Blade loaded average N/A Y-axis following error (mpts) Roller/Blade loaded Y-axis following error ripple (mpts) Roller Disengaged Time (sec) N/A
4 5
N/A
Blade loaded average Y-axis N/A following error (mpts) Blade loaded Y-axis following error ripple (mpts) Blade Disengaged Time (sec) N/A
Drive problems on either axis could cause the respective motor to stall and the test to abort. The Wiper Drive and Drum Maintenance Drive tests would test the basic drive mechanisms. If the Head Tilt Gear fails to engage the tilt mechanism, the test aborts, and all R values are undefined. If peak values are high, there could be an issue with a weak Process Drive, friction in the tilt cam drive train, the cam surfaces (lubrication), the Head Tilt Spring, or something impeding the Printhead from tilting (warped insulation on the side, X-Axis misalignment, or the Printhead being compressed against the Electronics Module. If the peak values are low, check the Head Tilt Spring. Wiper Drive Test This test exercises the Wiper Assembly, Printhead latching mechanism, Head Maintenance Clutch, and related parts. This test assumes that the tilt drive and the Wiper Assembly mechanisms are functioning correctly. Run the Tilt Drive test first to verify correct operation of that mechanism. This test activates the tilt mechanism to move the Printhead out of the way. Next, the Media Drive Assembly drives the Wiper Blade over it's range of motion.
N/A
09/2007 6-25
Diagnostics
If the Printhead does not reach the standby position, the Wiper Blade can contact or interfere with the Printhead. Problems with the Wiper or Media Drive assemblies (including the clutch) can cause excessive ripple and or drive power levels. Review the results of the Paper Path Drive and the Wiper Shaft tests to verify the wiper mechanism drive is operating properly before investigating problems indicated by this test. Variation in the Up and Down Drive characteristics are often caused by CW/CCW drive differences in the Media Drive Assembly. A slipping Head Maintenance Clutch could produce several out of bounds results. Check the clutch using with the Wiper Shaft test. Incorrect Wiper Belt tension can introduce variation in several ripple or position values, especially the turnaround recovery time. Table 30 Wiper Drive Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 Up Motion Drive Error (min) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the average following error while move the wiper up from the low limit to the lock encounter point. Reports the difference between the max and min following error over the same interval. Reports the difference between the max and min limits of travel when moving up. Reports the distance up from the lower limit of travel at which the head lock latch is encountered. Reports the distance up from the lower limit of travel at which the head lock latch engages. Reports the peak following error at the point the latch engages. Reports the average following error while move the wiper up from the low limit to the lock encounter point. Reports the difference between the max and min following error over the same interval. Reports the difference between the max and min limits of travel when moving up. Reports the distance up from the upper stall point at which the head lock latch releases. Reports the peak following error at the point the latch releases. Reports the distance up from the upper limit of travel at which the wiper first encounters the lower travel limit. Reports the time following the start of the turnaround motion that the motion drive error return to normal in the opposite direction.
Paper Path Drive Test This test exercises the Media Drive gear train and shafts. This test runs the Media Drive gear train for a short time to loosen up the gears and bearings. Next, the gear train is abruptly reversed to capture the reversal transient (which includes the swing gear motion), and operation in the other direction. No media is needed for this test to run. However, check that the Tray 1 pick gear, Tray 2 Pick Clutch, and Head Maintenance Clutch are disengaged before running this test. Verify proper Media Drive motor operation with the Media Path Motor test. Excessive following error (fe) during the drive intervals might indicate: Weak Media Drive motor Shafts with high drive requirements due to dry or misaligned bushings, bent shafts, roller tension springs too strong, shaft gear diameter too large, rollers that are hard or dirty. Media Drive Assembly with high drive requirements due to warpage, no lubrication, gear diameter too large, or out of spec face gear
Up Motion Drive Error Ripple N/A (min) Up Distance (min) Lock Encounter Distance (min) N/A N/A
2 3
Excessive ripple may indicate heavy load, malformed gear teeth, eccentric gears, bent shafts, dirt on rollers, or warped face gear. An out of spec transition time might indicate and issue with the meshing gears or a bound up Media Drive Assembly swing gear. The power peaks indicate when swing gears loose contact on one side (reducing the required power), and make contact on the other side, accelerating the upper shafts in the opposite direction. Table 31 Paper Path Drive Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 3 4 CW MP fe Av (counts) CW MP fe Ripple (counts) CCW MP fe Av (counts) CCW MP fe Ripple (counts) Swing Arm Transition Time (sec) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Result Reports the average drive following error level in the foreword direction. Reports the average drive following error ripple in the foreword direction. Reports the average drive following error level in the backward direction. Reports the average following error ripple in the backward direction. Reports the time that the lower portion of the paper path drive is disconnected while the swing arm transitions to the other rotation direction drive position.
5 6
N/A N/A
Down Motion Drive Error Rip- N/A ple (min) Down Distance (min) Lock Disengage Distance (min) N/A N/A
8 9
Tray 2, 3, and 4 Lift Plate Drive Test This test exercises the selected Lift Motor and Lift Plate mechanism. This test. raises the Lift Plate until it stalls against the upper stop. If the tray is empty (the normal situation), the No Paper Sensor is not activated, but the Paper Height Sensor is. If the tray contains 1 sheet of media (additional media would distort the power and lift distance readings), both sensors would are activated.
10 Lock Disengage Peak (min) 11 Bottom Encounter Distance (min) 12 Turnaround Recovery time (sec)
N/A N/A
N/A
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-26
NOTE: The test requires that the tray be cycled (pulled out and pushed in) and emptied. However there are no sensors to detect if the required actions were taken. The test runs with the tray in any state, but the results are less useful if the tray is not in the required configuration. The power peaks indicate when swing gears loose contact on one side (cutting the required power), and then making contact on the other side and accelerating the upper shafts in the other direction. Table 32 Tray 2, 3, and 4 Lift Plate Drive Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 Tray Configuration Start Peak Power (watts) Typical Value N/A N/A Result Reports the tray status (present, plate not lifted, etc.). Reports the highest peak during the first quarter of the lifting interval. Peak power is a characteristic of the motor, and shows the power required to begin moving. Reports the time interval between motor power on and when lifting actually starts. Reports the average power during the lifting interval. This is power required to lift the plate. This value is affected if the tray is missing, not empty, or problems with the lift arm (missing sleeve bearings, etc.). Reports the interval from the motor start time until the required lift power starts to increase due to the initial contact with the Nudger Roller. This value indicates the point of contact with the Nudger Roller. which indicates if the roller is installed and is hanging down correctly Reports the interval from the motor start time until the Paper Height Sensor is activated. This value indicates that the sensor is working and is encountered at the correct spot in the lift profile. This value is also be affected if the tray contains media. Reports the average motor stall power during the over lifting interval. Stall power is a characteristic of the motor.
Y-Axis Encoder Test This test gathers data on the performance of the Y-axis Encoder and Home position reporting. The Y-Axis encoder subsystem (consisting of the data gathering hardware and the firmware), is very tolerant and operates correctly with a wide range of data. Most data issues are related to encoder disk misalignment, damage, or contamination. Table 33 Y-Axis Encoder Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 Typical Value Result Reports one half of the difference between the average of the Sin Sum positive peak values and the average of the Sin Sum negative peak values. Reports sum of the absolute values of the average of the Sin Sum positive peak values and the average of the Sin Sum negative peak values. Reports difference between the Sin amplitude ripple (the difference between the max and min Sin Sum positive peak values over a revolution ignoring a short distance each side of the notch), and half the peak to peak Sin Sum average amplitude (R1 / 2). Reports max value of the difference between the amplitudes of any adjacent Sin Sum positive peaks. Reports max value of the difference between the rotational position of any adjacent Sin Sum positive peaks. Reports the ratio between the notch bottom amplitude measured with respect to the Sin DC offset (R1), and one half the peak to peak average amplitude value (R1 / 2), as determined from the Sin Sum data. Reports the width of the Home notch at 99% full depth as determined from the Sin Sum data. Reports the ratio of the portions of the Home notch width distance as bisected by a vertical from the notch min as determined from the Sin Sum data. Reports difference between the average of the Cosine Sum positive peak values and the average of the Cosine Sum negative peak values.
N/A
2 3
N/A N/A
N/A
N/A
Sin max delta amplitude (sin N/A sum units) Sin max delta position (YAxis encoder ticks) Home Notch Depth Ratio (none) N/A
N/A
N/A
Home Notch Width (Y-Axis encoder ticks) Home Notch Symmetry (none)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Drum Menu
The Drum menu contains tests for different aspects of Drum operation and the Y-Axis subsystem.
N/A
09/2007 6-27
Diagnostics
Table 33 Y-Axis Encoder Nominal Values R# Characteristic 9 Typical Value Result Reports sum of the absolute values of the average of the Cosine Sum positive peak values and the average of the Cosine Sum negative peak values.
Y-Axis Drive Test This test checks the dynamic performance of the Y-Axis servo control loop. The test is performed with and without the Transfix Roller loaded on the Drum (i.e. min and max loads). Servo response parameters under various conditions covering anticipated usage ranges are measured. Excessive velocity ripple could result in image quality problems due to variations in YAxis pixel placement. Excessive settling times can reduce throughput or result in leading edge print artifacts. Table 35 Y-Axis Drive Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 HAHVN CCW Average fe (mpts) HAHVN CCW fe Ripple (mpts) HAHVN CW Average fe (mpts) Typical Value N/A Result Reports average following error (fe) during the last half of the first steady state period. Reports following error ripple during the last half of the first steady state period. Reports average following error during the last half of the second steady state period. Reports following error ripple during the last half of the second steady state period. Reports the time following the start of motion that it takes the following error value to enter the CCW ripple band. Reports the time following the start of motion reversing that it takes the following error value to enter the CW ripple band. Reports the time following the start of motion stopping that it takes the following error value to enter the idle ripple band. Reports the time following the start of motion that it takes the Y-axis delta velocity to enter the CCW delta velocity ripple band. Reports an approximation of the motor Ke parameter during high speed operation. Reports an approximation of the motor Ke parameter during low speed operation.
Y-Axis Geometry Test This test measures the dynamic stability of the Y-axis drive system. The test rotates the Drum at a constant velocity and measures Drum and Y-Axis Motor vibration. A very high motor or drum peak indicates that the component is unbalanced. Table 34 Y-Axis Geometry Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 Drum FFT Power (none) Drum Frequency (hz) Motor FFT Power Ratio (none) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A Result Reports the rescaled FFT power amplitude of the drum frequency. Reports the current drum frequency. Reports the ratio of the FFT power amplitude of the motor frequency to the FFT power amplitude of the drum frequency. Reports the current motor frequency. Reports the ratio of the FFT power amplitude of the most powerful FFT frequency (not including the drum or motor), to the FFT power amplitude of the drum frequency. Reports the frequency of the most powerful FFT frequency (not including the drum or motor. Reports the ratio of the FFT power amplitude of the second most powerful FFT frequency (not including the drum or motor), to the FFT power amplitude of the drum frequency. Reports the frequency of the second most powerful FFT frequency (not including the drum or motor). 5 3 1 2
N/A N/A
3 4
N/A N/A
HAHVN Start fe Settle time (sec) HAHVN Reverse Fe Settle time (sec)
N/A
N/A
N/A
HAHVN Stop Fe Settle time (sec) HAHVN Delta Print Velocity Settle Time (sec)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
HAHVN Speed/Voltage Ratio N/A (in/sec/volt) HALVN Speed/Voltage Ratio N/A (in/sec/volt)
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-28
Y-Axis Drive Belt Slippage Test This test does a chase (pick/transfix), of a special sheet of preprinted media and records the Y-axis following error (fe). Table 36 Y-Axis Drive Belt Slippage Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 Initial Peak Y-axis fe (mpts) Maximum Peak Y-axis fe (mpts) Average Y-axis fe (mpts) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A Result Reports the amplitude of the first Y-axis following error peak. Reports the amplitude of the maximum Y-axis fe peak after the first. Reports the average of the Y-axis following error during the roller down portion of the transfix operation.
Zero or too small readings for all of the engage/release values indicate that the stripper blade did not contact the Drum. A minimal bump could occur if the solenoid plunger activated, but there was no stripper mechanism motion, possibly due to the stripper blade being in the latched up position. The test does not prepare the Drum with a drum maintenance cycle. The condition of the Drum (too much oil, not enough oil, ink residue, or dirt), may affect results. Table 38 Stripper Contact Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 Typical Value Result Reports the static difference between the average Y-Axis following error before and after the blade has engaged the Drum, indicating how strongly the blade is interacting with the drum while pushing onto the drum. Unusual values may indicate blade condition (stiffness, dirty, bent, delaminated, etc.). Another potential contributor is the solenoids range of travel or engagement force (solenoid/ solenoid drive strength or return spring strength, including a missing or double spring). Reports the time between the engagement of the Stripper Solenoid and the blade begins to contact the Drum. Unusual values may indicate the geometry of the mechanism (i.e. parts out of tolerance, bent, missing, etc.), causing an incorrect blade to Drum gap. Reports the time between the engagement of the Stripper Solenoid and the reaction of the Drum servo error signal fades back into the ripple (noise). Reports the magnitude of the reaction of the drum to the contact of the blade. Reports the static difference between the average Y-Axis following error before and after the blade has disengaged from the drum. Reports the time between the disengagement of the Stripper Solenoid and the blade begins to withdraw from the Drum. See R2. Reports the time between the disengagement of the Stripper Solenoid and the reaction of the drum to the withdrawal of the blade fades back into the ripple. See R2.
Y-Axis Drive Belt Tension Test This test checks for proper belt tension by modifying the Y-Axis servo loop so it is unstable and oscillates. After a run in period to loosen the belt, the drum is advanced for two revolutions and the oscillation frequency is recorded. Drive component runouts and tolerances can cause the belt tension to change as the Drum turns. Higher frequency variations are typically the motor pulley. While lower frequency variations are the drum pulley. Dirt, debris, or defects may also cause tension variations. Table 37 Y-Axis Drive Belt Tension Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 Min Resonant Frequency (hz) Max Resonant Frequency (hz) Min Resonant Frequency Revs (revs) Min Resonant Frequency Angle (deg) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A Result Reports the min resonant frequency over the data set. Reports the max resonant frequency over the data set. Reports the number of full Y-Axis rotations required to locate the min frequency configuration. Reports the amount of additional Y-Axis rotations required to locate the min frequency configuration. 2 Engaging Period (sec) N/A
N/A
3 4
N/A N/A
N/A
Stripper Contact Test This test exercises the stripper blade. The Drum is held stationary and the Stripper Solenoid is activated and released. The reaction of the Drum servo error signal indicates activation timing and how strongly the Drum was contacted by the stripper blade. The contract pressure on the drum may relate to stripper blade geometry and condition. The test requires the doors be closed and the upper paper path to be clear. 5 Release Time (sec) N/A
N/A
09/2007 6-29
Diagnostics
Table 38 Stripper Contact Nominal Values R# Characteristic 7 Releasing Amplitude (mpts) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the magnitude of the reaction of the Drum to the withdrawal of the blade. See R3. R# Characteristic 6 Motor performance
Table 40 Y-Axis Motor Nominal Values Typical Value N/A Result Reports the ability of the motor to respond to servo commands.
X-Axis Motor Test Drum Maintenance Contact Test This test exercises the Drum Maintenance Kit. The Drum is driven by a low amplitude vibration and the Drum Maintenance Kit is advanced through its cycle. The reaction of the Drum servo error signal indicates when the drum was contacted by the roller and blade. Table 39 Drum Maintenance Contact Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 Initial Contact Position (Process Motor counts) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the distance the Process Motor was moved (raising the Drum Maintenance Kit, before a Y-Axis reaction was detected. Shows that the Drum Maintenance Kit is raising and provides information on the blade/drum gap. R# Characteristic 0 Motor Voltage A Ripple (volts) Motor Voltage A Average (volts) Motor Voltage B Ripple (volts) Motor Voltage B Average (volts) Motor Drive Power Ripple (watts) Motor drive power average (watts) The X-Axis motor is turned On and run slowly for one revolution. The slow motion removes the effect of inertia from the test, and the one revolution avoids a large system status change via any permanently connected loads. With the slow operating speed used by the test, the motor may stall at a bad commutator segment. The connected drive cone could modify the drive power values if the threads were defective, dry, or if the guide notch was disengaged. The A and B voltage measurements should remain constant if the drive is operating properly. Table 41 X-Axis Motor Nominal Values Typical Value N/A Result Reports amount of variation of the motor phase A drive voltage over the recording interval. Reports the motor phase A drive voltage average value over the recording interval. Reports amount of variation of the motor phase B drive voltage over the recording interval. Reports the motor phase B drive voltage average value over the recording interval. Reports amount of variation of the motor drive power over the recording interval. Reports the motor drive power average value of the recording interval.
N/A
Motors Menu
This menu contains a test for each of the system motors. Y-Axis Motor Test The Y-Axis motor is moved to the Home position, then turned On and run slowly for one revolution. The slow motion removes the effect of inertia from the test, and the one revolution avoids a large system status change via any permanently connected loads. With the slow operating speed used by the test, the motor may stall at a bad commutator segment. Unusual average values might indicate a weak motor. The motor following error, drive voltage, and power ripple values indicate how smoothly the motor is able to turn through one revolution. Depending on the mechanical state of the drive when this test is run, both the ripple and average values may vary significantly from run to run due to the variation in the external load. Table 40 Y-Axis Motor Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 3 4 5 Motor following error ripple (ticks) Motor following error average (ticks) Motor drive voltage ripple (volts) Motor drive voltage (volts) Motor drive power ripple (watts) Motor drive power average (watts) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Result Reports variation of the motor following error over the recording interval. Reports the motor following error average value of the recording interval. Reports amount of variation of the motor drive voltage over the recording interval. Reports the motor drive voltage average value of the recording interval. Reports variation of the motor drive power over the recording interval. Reports the motor drive power average value of the recording interval. 3 N/A 2 N/A
4 5
N/A N/A
Process Motor Test The Process Drive motor is moved to the Home position, then the motor is jogged CW until it begins to engage the Drum Maintenance Kit. Next, the motor is run slowly CCW for one revolution. The slow motion removes the effect of inertia from the test, and the one revolution avoids a large system status change via any permanently connected loads. With the slow operating speed used by the test, the motor may stall at a bad commutator segment. Unusual average values might indicate a weak motor. The motor following error, drive voltage, and power ripple values indicate how smoothly the motor is able to turn through one revolution. Table 42 Process Motor Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 Motor following error ripple (ticks) Motor following error average (ticks) Typical Value N/A N/A Result Reports variation of the motor following error over the recording interval. Reports the motor following error average value of the recording interval. Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-30
Table 42 Process Motor Nominal Values R# Characteristic 2 3 4 5 6 Motor drive voltage ripple (volts) Motor drive voltage (volts) Motor drive power ripple (watts) Motor drive power average (watts) Motor performance Typical Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Result Reports amount of variation of the motor drive voltage over the recording interval. Reports the motor drive voltage average value of the recording interval. Reports variation of the motor drive power over the recording interval. Reports the motor drive power average value of the recording interval. Reports the ability of the motor to respond to servo commands.
Tray 2, 3, and 4 Lift Motor Test The specified Lift Motor is turned on and run for a period of time sufficient to advance the lift plate drive gear one tooth (about 20 revolutions). Next, the motor is turned off and the brake momentarily applied. Selecting a test for an undetected optional feeder generates an Option Not Detected message and the test aborts. Also, the test aborts if the selected tray is installed. Table 44 Tray 2, 3, and 4 Lift Motor Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 Motor Peak Power (watts) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the motor starting power. Reports the motor average constant velocity power. Reports the average motor brake power.
Motor Average Power (watts) N/A Brake Average Power (watts) N/A
Media Path Motor Test The Media Drive motor is run slowly CCW for one revolution. The slow motion removes the effect of inertia from the test, and the one revolution avoids a large system status change via any permanently connected loads. With the slow operating speed used by the test, the motor may stall at a bad commutator segment. The connected gear train effects the drive average and ripple values due to the load variation with gear train position. Unusual average values might indicate a weak motor. The motor following error, drive voltage, and power ripple values indicate how smoothly the motor is able to turn through one revolution. This test will not run if media is detected in the paper path. Table 43 Media Path Motor Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Motor following error ripple (ticks) Motor following error average (ticks) Motor drive voltage ripple (volts) Motor drive voltage (volts) Motor drive power ripple (watts) Motor drive power average (watts) Motor performance Typical Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Result Reports variation of the motor following error over the recording interval. Reports the motor following error average value of the recording interval. Reports amount of variation of the motor drive voltage over the recording interval. Reports the motor drive voltage average value of the recording interval. Reports variation of the motor drive power over the recording interval. Reports the motor drive power average value of the recording interval. Reports the ability of the motor to respond to servo commands.
Tray 3 and 4 Pick/Feed Motor Test The selected motor is turned On and allowed to reach a constant velocity. Motor drive data is then recorded for a fixed interval (approximately 25 motor revolutions). The connected gear train effects the drive average and ripple values due to the load variation with gear train position. The motor following error, drive voltage, and power ripple values indicate how smoothly the motor is able to turn through one revolution. Selecting a test for an undetected optional feeder generates an Option Not Detected message and the test aborts. This test will not run if media is detected in the paper path. Table 45 Tray 3 and 4 Pick/Feed Motor Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 3 4 5 Motor following error ripple (ticks) Motor following error average (ticks) Motor drive voltage ripple (volts) Motor drive voltage (volts) Motor drive power ripple (watts) Motor drive power average (watts) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Result Reports variation of the motor following error over the recording interval. Reports the motor following error average value of the recording interval. Reports amount of variation of the motor drive voltage over the recording interval. Reports the motor drive voltage average value of the recording interval. Reports variation of the motor drive power over the recording interval. Reports the motor drive power average value of the recording interval.
Miscellaneous Menu
This menu contains tests, which various reasons don't clearly belong to another group.
09/2007 6-31
Diagnostics
Voltages Test This test provides averaged readings for key voltages produced in the Electronics Module. For the AC line voltage, the value measured is read as either 110 Volts or 220 Volts depending on whether the measured value is less than or greater than 165 volts. The other AC Line voltage value is set to 0. A certain amount of variation in the regulated values is typical. These variations should not exceed 10 percent. The voltage sources for (R12/R13) are unregulated and may vary by as much as 20 percent. During the test, all possible system loads are turned Off except the X-Axis Motor. The motor is turned on to draw enough current to maintain power supply regulation. Any problems with the X-Axis Motor could cause unreliable voltage readings. The 0 Volt measurements are local ground references and should always be 0 V. Out of range power supply values can cause unusual power values in many other Print Engine Check tests. Table 46 System Voltages Nominal Values R# Characteristic Main Board Voltages 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Volts (volts) 1.5 Volts (volts) 2.5 Volts (volts) 3.3 Volts (volts) 12 Volts (volts) 1.2 Volts (volts) Negative 12 Volts (volts) 0 Volts (volts) Current DC Power (watts) 50 Volts (volts) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Reports a system ground reference. Reports the voltage at the 1.5 V source. Reports the voltage at the 2.5 V source. Reports the voltage at the 3.3 V source. Reports the voltage at the 12 V source. Reports the voltage at the 1.2 V source. Reports the voltage at the -12 V source. Reports a system ground reference. Reports system power consumption. Reports the voltage at the 50 V source. Reports the voltage at the - 50 V source. Reports a system ground reference. Reports the voltage at the -12 V source. Reports the voltage at the 12 V source. Reports the voltage at the 5 V source. Reports the AC line voltage. Reports the AC line voltage. Typical Value Result
Line Voltage Test This test provides an evaluation the systems external power source by checking if the AC source, and any supplemental wiring or devices, can supply the system adequate power. The test selectively turns On subsystems to measure the AC line voltage at both min and max load. Bypass the cool down interval if the system is already cool. An external AC supply of sufficient capacity should show only a small change in supply voltage. Run this test to verify the AC source before investigating problems caused by voltage supply problems. Table 47 Line Voltage Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 Min Load Line AC Voltage (volts) Max Load Line AC Voltage (volts) Typical Value N/A N/A Result Reports the minimum voltage level over the recording interval. Reports the maximum voltage level over the recording interval Reports amount of variation of the voltage level over the recording interval. The voltage change with load indicates the impedance of the source. The smaller the change, the better. Reports the maximum current draw for the recording interval.
N/A
Wiper Alignment Test This test checks Wiper Blade alignment. This test exercises the Process Drive, Media Drive, Head Tilt mechanism, and Wiper Assembly to determine Wiper Blade position. Table 48 Wiper Alignment Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 Tilt Engage Wiper Position Typical Value N/A Result Reports wiper position at the tilt trip point. Reports the location of the upper limit of travel. Reports the difference between the upper hard stop and the tilt trip point.
10 Negative 50 Volts (volts) 11 0 Volts (volts) 12 Negative 12 Volts (volts) 13 12 Volts (volts) 14 5 Volts (volts) 15 110 AC Volts (volts) 16 220 AC Volts (volts)
Upper Hard Stop Wiper Posi- N/A tion Position Difference N/A
If the Tilt mechanism does not engage, the test will abort with one of the following messages: Printhead unlatch time-out - The Drum Maintenance following error did not exceed 105% of the Drum Maintenance only max with in the Process Motor tilt drive interval. The wiper stalled during the scan before unlatching the Head Tilt Gear. The most likely cause is the Wiper Blade is not level causing the high end to contact the drip bib and stalling the wiper axis before unlatching the gear. Other causes could be that the Head Tilt Gear is jammed (full of ink), or not properly biased (Head Tilt Spring missing or defective). Also the trip lever could require extra effort to lift (flat spring stronger than usual, rough or warped engage surface with gear, binding/drag from Head Tilt Solenoid), causing the wiper axis to stall before contacting the drip bib. Extra drag in the wiper mechanism could also cause a stall. Process Drive stalled before the Head Tilt Gear was unlatched.
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-32
Drive problems on either axis could cause the respective motor to stall and the test to abort. The Wiper Drive and Drum Maintenance Drive tests would test the basic drive mechanisms. If the Head Tilt Gear fails to engage the tilt mechanism, the test aborts, and all R values are undefined. If peak values are high, there could be an issue with a weak Process Drive, friction in the tilt cam drive train, the cam surfaces (lubrication), the Head Tilt Spring, or something impeding the Printhead from tilting (warped insulation on the side, X-Axis misalignment, or the Printhead being compressed against the Electronics Module. If the peak values are low, check the Head Tilt Spring. Purge Pump Test This test exercises the Purge Pump system that includes the pump, hose, and valve. The purge functions of the Printhead are not tested. If the ink in the Printhead is solid at the time of the test, the Purge pump is energized for a fixed interval with the bleed valve closed to allow the pressure to reach a maximum. Next, the purge valve is opened (with the pump still pumping), allowing the pressure to decay. The pressure profile during this sequence indicates the condition of the system. If the ink is liquid at the time of the test, jetstack temperatures above 120 degrees, the bleed valve remains open for the entire sequence to avoid ink spills. Table 49 Purge Pump Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 1 2 3 Jetstack Temperature (deg) Pump PWM (percent) Start Power (watts) Typical Value N/A N/A N/A Result Reports the maximum of the current jetstack temperatures. Reports the current PWM value being used to drive the pump. Reports the initial peak pumping power following power on to the pump. Reports the minimum pumping power value following the start up peak (R2). If the pump is pumping the normal volume, then the drop is significant and the pressure rises slower. If the volume is small, hose pinched or plugged near the pump, then the drop is minimal and the pressure rises quickly. Reports the max pumping power during the pumping interval. Reports the average pumping power in the area of highest pressure. If this value is much different than R4, it might indicate pressure fluctuations when pumping at max pressure. Reports the time from pump on until the average pressure is reached. Reports the average pumping power after the pressure has fully decayed (purge valve open).
Table 49 Purge Pump Nominal Values R# Characteristic 8 Pressure Decay Time (sec) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the time between the purge valve opening and the point when the pumping power (relative to the current pressure), fades back into the ripple of the no pressure pumping power. See R7.
Drum Maintenance / Transfix Home Test This test determines if the Process Drive was successfully repositioned to home position by a previous test or operation. The test drives the Process Drive motor a short distance in both directions to check if the drive is at home position. When the Process Drive motor is returned to the start position after each excursion, the motor is driven enough to compensate for the current following error (fe), which should put the mechanism back in the initial position. There should be very little backlash in each drive as there is a restoring force opposing each motion. The amplitude values may vary more than the time values as amplitude is affected by the attached mechanisms. Table 50 Drum Maintenance / Transfix Home Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 Typical Value Result Reports the height of the initial peak when starting rotation of the drum maintenance drive gear. Reports the time since the start of CCW motion until the peak was detected. Reports the height of the initial peak when starting rotation of the transfix drive gear. Reports the time since the start of CW motion until the peak was detected.
DM Initial fe Peak (pm motor N/A counts) DM Initial fe Peak Time (sec) N/A TF Initial FE Peak (pm motor N/A counts) Transfix Initial fe Peak Time (sec) N/A
1 2
Printhead Clearance Test This test measures the clearance between the Printhead insulation and the left and right sides of the chassis when the Printhead is tilted to the Standby position (i.e. back). This measurement could help to determine if the Printhead insulation is loose or warped. The test moves the X-Axis to the home position, the Printhead is first moved to the Tilt position, then to the Standby position. Next, the X-axis is moved to the right until the insulation makes contact with the right side frame and the drive cone unloads from the Printhead. The X axis is then moved left for a fixed time. Finally, the Printhead is jogged back to the right and then moved to the left for a fixed time until the insulation starts to make contact with the left side frame. An abnormal value for either characteristic could indicate a clearance problem. Table 51 Printhead Clearance Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 Tilt To Left Contact Distance (min) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the approximate clearance between the left side of the Printhead and the chassis.
4 5
N/A N/A
6 7
N/A
09/2007 6-33
Diagnostics
Table 51 Printhead Clearance Nominal Values R# Characteristic 1 Tilt To Right Contact Distance (min) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the approximate clearance between the right side of the Printhead and the chassis.
General Troubleshooting
This section provides troubleshooting procedures for system problems not associated with a error message or code. For troubleshooting problems associated with an error code or message, and information on how to use the troubleshooting procedure tables, see Section 2. Troubleshooting procedures attempt to isolate a problem to a specific component or subassembly, in some cases including the wiring harness. If you go through a troubleshooting procedure and still are unable to solve the problem, re-read the Theory of Operations for the problem area and ensure that you understand how that section of the system is supposed to function. Service Diagnostics provides several tools useful for troubleshooting non-specific problems. Three of these are especially useful: Sub-system Status Reports Component Checks Diagnostic Fault History
Transfix Gap Test CAUTION This test does not clean the Drum before lowering the Transfix Roller. To prevent contamination of the Transfix Roller, check that the Drum is clean before running this test. This tests exercises the Transfix Roller and reports the results. The Transfix Gap test lowers the Transfix Roller at a lower velocity than the Transfix Drive test to more accurately determine of the gap between the Transfix Roller and Drum. Table 52 Transfix Gap Nominal Values R# Characteristic 0 Time to first contact (sec) Typical Value N/A Result Reports the time from the load command to the engine until the drum indicates pressure roller contact. Reports the average Y-axis following error during the Roll With Transfix Roller Down interval. Reports the difference between the max and the min Y-axis following error during the Roll With Transfix Roller Down interval. Reports the time from the unload command to the engine until the drum indicates no further contact.
The following overview describes the function and proper application of the each tool.
Sub-system Status
Located in the Exit Path, Scanner, and Doc Handler menus, Report Status reports on the condition of each sub-system. Report Status lists the current sub-system status as reported by. that sub-systems firmware. Status listings are not stored. If the system reaches Ready, the list is cleared. Some applications of status are: Provides an initial condition from boot to begin troubleshooting. Captures static or dynamic events. Confirms diagnostic test results and subsequent repairs.
N/A
N/A
Component Checks
Located under the Print Engine -> Exercise menu of Service Diagnostics is an extensive suite of component-level tests that exercise individual electromechanical, thermal, and optical components. Use these tests as the primary tool for testing system components. Occasionally, a troubleshooting procedure refers to a test located in the Print Engine -> Check menu. The Check Menu contains tests that perform measurements on system components and report measured values to the Control Panel. These tests are typically used to verify system operation during manufacture. However, in some instances, the values returned by these tests can help to locate system malfunctions or indicate excessive wear in selected components. Use these tests when directed to do so from a troubleshooting procedure.
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-34
When executed from the Print Engine Function menu, the Diagnostic Fault History displays on the Control Panel and updates as each error event is detected. Fault History events are recorded only when no pre-existing errors are present. The second and subsequent occurrences of the same event are not recorded. The maximum number of events recorded is 25. Once the list is full, additional new events are lost until the log is cleared by either a system reboot or by selecting Fault History Master Clear from the Fault History menu. New events occurring after the list is cleared are recorded. For display, the list combines a line number, a code, and potentially a test precondition indicated by the letter P (for events requiring a power cycle), a U for unknown event sequence, an M for more entries, or a string of asterisks ***** to indicate the last error recorded. As an example: Fault History Display 1 [150] 2 [42]P 3 [198]P 4 [T2]M Press CANCEL to exit The example shows a single screen displaying four events. Lines 2 and 3 include the precondition indicator P directing a reboot before component testing continues. Line 4 includes an abbreviated Misfeed at Tray 2 code, and the continuation notation M indicating more events appear on subsequent pages. Pressing OK calls up the next page. Pressing Cancel exits the utility and displays the Fault History menu. Events typically appear in the order detected. However, occasionally the events sequence is indeterminate. As is the case with simultaneous events. In these cases, a U is appended to the event to indicate an unknown sequence. While event sequence can be important in determining cause, the event itself provides a starting point for investigation. For those events listed with a P, testing of a specific component may not require the indicated power cycle. For example, if the log lists a motor failure, its reasonable to go directly to the appropriate motor test to confirm the failure without first power cycling the system. For events involving components, such as the Drum, Transfix Roller, or Ink Sticks, power cycling is recommended before additional testing is performed. Using Diagnostic Fault History The general approach to using the Diagnostic Fault History utility is as follows: 1. 2. Determine the diagnostic test necessary to reproduce a suspected transient event. Determine if the current logged events are important to understanding the problem. If so, examine or record the events currently in the log, perform whatever analysis is appropriate, and then clear the log. Perform the selected test. Re-examine the event list. Identify an abnormal or suspicious event based on the test performed. For example, a door open event while printing a test print when the door remained closed.
Therefore, you would: 1. 2. 3. 4. Override the interlock function to provide power. Access the Interlock Switch actuator Clear the list with Clear Fault History. Display Fault History and manipulate the component or connecting wires as required to reveal the switchs condition
3. 4. 5.
As an example, assume the Interlock Switch is suspect. The process to gain access to the switch will produce a number of events unrelated to switch function.
09/2007 6-35
Diagnostics
General Troubleshooting
Electrical Troubleshooting
The Electronics Module contains the power supply, main board containing the image processor, power control board, and in the case of the 8860MFP, the FAX circuitry. Also on the 8860MFP, the Backframe contains the Scanner Power Supply and the Exit Module Control Board. The 8860 and 8860MFP use different Electronics Modules. If a component of the Electronics Module fails, and service is necessary, replace the entire Electronics Module, with the exception of the NVRAM, RAM memory, the Configuration Card, and either the Flash or Hard drive; no individual board troubleshooting procedures or tests are necessary. NOTE: If the system encounters certain fault conditions, the system may reboot up to three times before displaying an error code. This is an attempt to correct the problem and reduce the number of unnecessary service calls. Following the suggested troubleshooting procedures in the specified sequence generally provides better test coverage than performing tests in a different order. If either the Scanner turns on or the Exit Module initializes, the Scanner Power Supply is operational. If the Scanner turns on, but the Exit Module doesnt initialize properly, then the Power Supply may be operational, but the Exit Module Control Board may be malfunctioning. NOTE: On the 8860MFP, the image processor board enables the Scanner Power Supply and communicates with the Exit Module, Scanner, DADF, and Control Panel. A faulty image processor board can make it appear as if other subsystems are at fault.
Key Ground Connections The following illustration shows the grounding points in the Print Engine. There is also a ground point on the Backframe. Check that these grounding points are in contact with the frame.
Diagnostics
Electrical Troubleshooting
09/2007 6-36
b.
Turn off system and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge. Damage to circuits within the Electronics Module may occur if the power supply capacitors are not allowed to fully. Connect the Power Control cable to the I/O Board connector (J800). This connects the I/O Board to the working Electronics Module - nothing else is connected. Turn on power to the system.
c. d.
If the PE and PS LEDs do not flash momentarily, the short is on the I/O board or related cabling. Skip the rest of this section if the PE and PS LEDs flash, because the problem is elsewhere in the system. a. b. Verify the short is on the I/O Board using an ohmmeter to check the resistance on J270, pin 1 to ground. Resistance of less than 1K ohm indicates a problem. To isolate problem to I/O board or related cabling, unplug all I/O board connectors. c. d. I/O Power Control (J840) Waste Tray Sensor (J110) Stripper Solenoid (J250) Paper Tray Sense (J610) Front Door Interlock (J600) Ink loader Signal (J910) Drum Maintenance Kit Detect (J860) Drum Thermistor (J870) Exit Module (J680) Heater Relay Control (J950)
Disconnect the Scanner Assembly. Transient on AC line tripped protective circuitry in system power supply. Cycle power to system to reset protective circuits in power supply. Short circuit on 3.3 V power supply within the Electronics Module. ESD damage to the system may occur if static electricity is discharged to system electronics. a. b. With Power Cord connected, touch the metal Electronics Module to discharge any static electricity. Turn off system and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge. Damage to circuits within the Electronics Module may occur if the power supply capacitors are not allowed to fully discharge. Unplug power cord and remove system's covers. Unplug the following Electronics Module connectors: This step removes all other circuits so the Electronics Module can be tested alone. e. f. Power Control to I/O board (J10) Right Side Harness (J9) Preheater Lift Solenoid (P/J202) Head Tilt Solenoid (P/J208) Printhead data (J3) Wave Amp signal (J16) Left Side Harness (J17) Y-Axis Motor (J18) c. b. 7. e. a.
c. d.
Retest the resistance of the I/O board. If the resistance is still less than 1K ohm, replace the I/O board, reinstall all cables and retest the system. If the I/O board resistance is OK, above 1K, reconnect the I/O Board connectors one at a time testing the resistance after each connection. At the point resistance falls below 1K, replace the component just connected. Reassemble the system and retest. REQURIED: Follow all procedures from 'Short circuit on 3.3 V power supply within the Electronics Module' before proceeding. The following procedure relies on a working Electronics Module to determine if the Printhead is causing a short circuit With Power cord Connected, touch the metal Electronics Module to discharge any static electricity. ESD damage to the system may occur if static electricity is discharged to system electronics. Turn off the system and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge. Damage to circuits within the Electronics Module may occur if the power supply capacitors are not allowed to fully discharge. Connect the Printhead Power connector to the Electronics Module (J4). Turn on the system On. If the PE and PS LEDs do not flash momentarily, the short is on the Printhead. Replace the Printhead and retest the system. Skip the rest of this section if the PE and PS LEDs flash because the problem is elsewhere in the system. Carefully test the system to ensure damage to the Electronics Module did not occur due to the shorted Printhead. Reassemble and retest the system.
Plug in the power cord and turn the system on. If the PE and PS indicators do not flash momentarily, the short is inside the Electronics Module. Replace the Electronics Module and retest the system. If PE and PS indicators flash, continue with debug. Connect all harnesses removed. Reassemble the system and retest. Follow all procedures from Step 3 before proceeding with these steps. The I/O board needs to be isolated from other systems in the system to be effectively tested.
d. e. f.
g. h. 5. a.
09/2007 6-37
Diagnostics
Electrical Troubleshooting
Testing F2 and F3 The Drum and Preheater connect to F2. The Printhead and Ink Loader connect to F3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn the power switch off and wait for the system to shut down. Disconnect the power cord from the Electronics Module. Remove the Ink loader Assembly (REP 2.0.1). From the back of the system you will see one heater cable connector (J7) on the left above the power switch and two (J4 and J5) under the ink loader. Place the Power Switch in the On position. Measure the resistance between the lowest pin on J7, and the lowest pin on the AC input connector (J8). If the meter measures 0 ohms, F3 has not been damaged.
Diagnostics
Electrical Troubleshooting
09/2007 6-38
7. 8.
Measure between the right most pin under the Ink Loader and (again) the lowest pin on the AC input connector (J8). If the meter measures 0 ohms, F2 has not been damaged. The heater triacs are not accessible for measurement and are disconnected from loads if the switch is off or the system is powered down. Check the Power Supply Status LEDs (Figure 2), they should be bright. If the system is operational, use the Service Diagnostics Monitor Voltages test to check DC voltage levels.
DADF Malfunction
DADF Lamp Does Not Turn On
1. 2. Is there power at the DADF? Place media in the DADF input tray. If the paper feeds, the DADF has power, and the lamp circuit is faulty. Replace the DADF (REP 1.0.15). Is there power at the scanner? Lift the DADF and observe the scanner lamp and scanhead motion. If the lamp is on and the scanhead moves, the Scanner Power Supply is operating correctly. Replace the DADF (REP 1.0.15). Is there power to the Exit Module? The Exit Module elevator should cycle up and down after the Scanner Assembly is raised and lowered. The Exit Module Control Board receives power from the Scanner Power Supply, so if the elevator cycles the Scanner Power Supply is operating correctly. Replace the Scanner Assembly (REP 1.0.11). Check the Scanner Power Supply. Is there power at the DADF? Lift the DADF and verify the DADF lamp is on and the calibration strip moves into position. If so, the Scanner Power Supply is operating correctly. If there is no power at the DADF, perform Steps 1 and 2 from Scanner Lamp Does Not Turn On. Run the Service Diagnostics Exercise Feed Motion test. If the test fails, replace the DADF (REP 1.0.15). Clean or replace the Pick Rollers and Separator Pad. Check the DADF Front and Upper Cover for obstructions or damage. Print a Usage Profile and look for repeating DADF or Scanner errors that could cause the problem. NOTE: If the system encounters scanner or document feeder errors, the system can lose communication with scanner and document feeder. If the system cannot re-establish communication with the document feeder the document feeder will be unable to feed paper. 7. Replace the DADF (REP 1.0.15).
Measuring DC Voltages 1. 2.
3.
4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
09/2007 6-39
Diagnostics
Scanner Malfunction
Scanhead Does Not Move
1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. Verify the scanhead shipping lock is in the unlocked position. Reboot the system. Is there power to the Scanner Assembly? Lift the DADF and verify the lamp is on. If so, the Scanner Power Supply is operating correctly. Verify the Scanner Power Supply operation. See Scanner Power Supply. Replace the Scanner Assembly (REP 1.0.11). Verify the scanhead shipping lock is in the unlocked position. Reboot the system. Run the Service Diagnostics Exercise Axis Motion test and observe Scanhead motion, paying special attention to anything that could obstruct scanhead motion. Replace the Scanner Assembly (REP 1.0.11). Is there power to the Scanner Assembly? Lift the DADF and verify the scanhead moves. If so, the Scanner Power Supply is operating correctly. Check the Scanner Power Supply. See Scanner Power Supply. Replace the Scanner Assembly (REP 1.0.11). Check the +24 VDC Status LED. If the LED is On, the Scanner Power Supply is operational. If the LED is blinking, there is a problem with the DADF, Scanner Power Supply or Exit Module Control Board.
6. Figure 1 Scanner Power Supply 24 Volt Status LED 2. 3. 4. If the LED is blinking, turn the system Off and disconnect the DADF. Restart the system. If the LED is blinking, the DADF is not the problem. Disconnect the Scanner Assembly. Turn the system On, if the LED is still blinking, the problem is not the Scanner Assembly. Replace the Scanner Power Supply (REP 5.0.2). If the +24 V Status LED is off, there could be a problem with the Scanner Power Supply or the Electronics Module. 7. 8. 9.
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-40
2. 3.
Initial Actions
Check that the correct type of media is being used, for information on the correct media type and sizes refer to the Paper Tips page. Ensure the system is operating under the right environmental conditions. Ensure the correct weight of paper is being used. Ensure that envelopes are of an acceptable size and oriented with the flap up for Tray 1 and the flap down for Trays 2, 3, and 4 Ensure that the correct media is in the correct media tray. The paper guides indicate to the system the size of media being used. Ensure the media guides are set correctly. Inspect the paper for bent, torn or folded corners. Check to ensure no small pieces of paper are in the paper path. Run the Service Diagnostics Paper Path Status test to test all path sensors. Try printing from a fresh, unopened ream of paper.
7. 8. 9.
10. Inspect the rollers, bushings and gears of the paper path
09/2007 6-41
Diagnostics
10. Inspect the rollers, bushings and gears of the paper path.
3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
3.
10. Replace the Process Drive (REP 4.0.7). 11. Replace the Media Drive (REP 4.0.14).
b. c.
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-42
f. 4.
If you still cannot connect to the system via network, try another computer.
Network Problems
Selecting Network Diagnostics runs a test on the TCP/IP connection (Ethernet Port) and displays the results. If no errors are detected, the message Network diagnostics completed, No problem detected displays, along with options for Help or printing either the Connection Setup or Configuration page. The Connection Setup and Configuration pages list current network parameters stored in the systems NVRAM. If Network Diagnostics detects an error, the error message displays with menu options to assist in correcting the error. Pressing Help (?) provides help text listing steps to help diagnose and clear the error. In situations where Network Diagnostics completes without an error, but printing continues to fail, test the systems Ethernet Port directly using a cross-over cable and a second, known good, Ethernet Port. A successful test using this procedure eliminates the systems networking hardware as the root cause. NOTE: The Ethernet Port verification procedures were developed for Windows XP or Mac OS X. If a different operating system is in use, adapt the steps as necessary.
In Mac OS X, open Printer Setup Utility, located at Applications --> Utilities at the root of the Mac OS X boot disk. Check to make sure the system status does not indicate Stopped. If it does, check your network and insure the host system is on the same subnet as the system. Correct if needed. Delete all jobs in the queue for the system by doubleclicking the system name, selecting each job, and clicking Delete. Restart the print queue by clicking Start Jobs. Try your print job again. In the Printer Setup Utility, select your system. In the Printers menu, select Show Info. From the pull-down menu in Printer Info, make sure the configuration shown for the printer is correct. If the configuration is wrong, click the configuration in the pull-down menu, and re-install. Check the Installable Options and make sure they match the systems configuration. If any changes are made, retry your print job. If there is still no output, try printing from a simple application. Open TextEdit located at the Applications folder, select New File, and create a small test document. Select Print from the File menu. If an error message displays or there is no output, try turning on the PostScript error status from CentreWare IS or the systems Control Panel. PostScript will now output an error page if an error occurred during the print job, assuming the system received it. Try printing again using the TextEdit tool located at the Applications folder. Once you have opened a document or created a new document, select Print from the File menu. Click on the Printer pull-down menu, and then select Edit Printer List. Click the add button, or pick Add Printer from the Printers menu (The add button is configurable, so it may not be there). Select IP Printing from the pull-down menu. Put the IP address your system in the Printers Address text area. Click on the Printer Configuration pull-down menu, and then select XEROX. A scrolling list should display. Pick the correct Xerox Phaser 8860/ 8860MFP configuration. You can check the exact configuration on the systems Startup page in the upper right corner. The newly added system displays in bold on the printer list, indicating it is the default system. When you are done adding the new system, close the Printer List dialog. Now select your system from the Printer pull-down menu, and then click Print in the dialog box. If you can print from the TextEdit tool, but cannot print from your application, the problem is likely in your application. Check for upgrade availability or contact the application vendor for further diagnosis. Try printing a test page from the system drivers Properties dialog box. Try printing from another application. Try printing to another network/PostScript printer Try printing from another computer. If the error returns, turn On the PostScript error handler through the Control Panel PostScript Error Info in the Support menu, or CentreWare IS and print the document again. Take note of the information on the error page that just printed.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Type ping followed by a space and the systems IP address at the MS_DOS command prompt, and then press Enter. If the number of packets sent and received match, the Ethernet Port is functional. If the request times out and fails to reply, either the cable or the port is defective.
09/2007 6-43
Diagnostics
1. 2. 3.
Connect a crossover cable between the PC and system. Verify the system is Ready. Use the systems control panel to enable AutoIP: a. b. c. d. e. f. Select the system Setup menu. Select the Connection Setup menu. Select the Network Setup menu. Select the TCP/IP Setup menu. Set AutoIP to On. Exit the menu so the system is Ready.
To print an Event Log or Runtime Log: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Place the system in normal Customer Mode. From the main menu, highlight Troubleshooting and press Enter. Scroll and highlight Network Log Pages and press Enter Highlight the appropriate menu item from the list and select Enter. The page should now print. NOTE: To print the Connection Setup or Configuration page, select the system Setup menu.
4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Reset the system to cause AutoIP to assign a new IP address (cycle power or select Restart system from the Shutdown menu). After the systems IP address is set, test communication by sending the PING command. If the test fails, install a different cable and retest. Turn the system on and wait until it is Ready. To check the computers TCP/IP settings, use the Apple menu to select System Preferences. Select Network. Select Show Built-in Ethernet. Click the TCP/IP tab and record the computers IP address, subnet mask, and gateway. Print the Configuration page and verify that TCP/IP is enabled on the system. Select an IP address for the system that matches the computer, except for the last field, which must be unique. Edit the systems gateway and subnet mask to exactly match the computers. Connect a crossover cable between the Ethernet Ports on the system and the Mac
To obtain a trace:
10. Test the application using Network Utility by double-clicking the hard drive icon 11. Select Applications --> Utilities --> Network Utility. 12. Click the PING tab. 13. Enter the systems IP address. 14. Configure the utility to PING the system four times. The test will end after four attempts. 15. Click the PING button to complete the test. 16. If the number of packets sent and received match, the test was successful and the Ethernet port is functioning. If the request times out and fails, the cable or the port are malfunctioning. 5.
The trace should appear in the terminal dialog window. Examine the trace to troubleshoot the problem. Save the trace as a file, if necessary.
Network Logging
The system maintains 6 logs in memory detailing network functions. The logs contain TCP/IP, NetWare and AppleTalk initialization events. The logs can also be accessed remotely via CentreWare. The logs list events chronologically. The log is limited in length; when the log is full the system stops recording data to the log. The logs are stored on the Hard Drive so only new data is stored each time the systems power is cycled. There is a Connection Setup page, Configuration page, and a network reset available for troubleshooting Network problems.
Diagnostics
Network Problems
09/2007 6-44
Fax Troubleshooting
The Control Panel displays one of these errors related to Fax operation: Fax Memory Low indicates insufficient room, less than 10 MB, for Fax images in either the Flash or Hard Drive. If the drive is full, new Faxes are rejected. If the drive becomes full while a fax is being received, the phone line is hung up and received pages are deleted without printing. No Dial Tone indicates that the system did not detect a dial tone when attempting to send a Fax. Fax operations are not completely blocked by this error. Outgoing faxes can queue, Fax subsystem parameters are adjustable, and jobs received before the dial tone was lost are accessible (secure receive jobs). The system attempts to send pending faxes until the retry count is reached. Fax Modem is not Available indicates a communications error between the main board and Fax modem.
Initial Actions
Check that the driver software is properly installed on the host. Make sure the USB cable is connected at both ends and is serviceable. Print a Configuration page and verify that USB 2.0 is enabled in the systems NVRAM.
NOTE: The testing procedure was developed for Windows XP. If a different operating system is in use, adapt the steps as necessary.
In addition to the Control Panel messages, the system provides several built-in tools for troubleshooting Fax problems.
If the Fax line, Fax number, and cabling are all functional, use the following tools to isolate the problem.
09/2007 6-45
Diagnostics
Fax Protocol Report The Protocol Report provides transmission results, timing, and communications activity information about each Fax transmission. Accessed from the System -> Information -> Troubleshooting -> FAX Problems menu, the Protocol Report provides Job Details similar to the Transmission Report, and a detailed log of the communications activity between devices. Use this report to diagnose possible communications errors between machines. Table 1 lists the most common commands exchanged between Fax machines during a typical transfer of data. When reviewing the Protocol Report, trace the exchange of commands to identify irregularities. Commands in parentheses (_) may or may not appear in the log. Table 1 Common Fax Communication Commands Command (NSF) (CSI) DIS Definition Appropriate Responses DCN Command (PPS-MPS) or (PPS-EOP) or( PPS-EOM) or (PPS-PRI-MPS) or (PPS-PRI-EOP) or (PPS-PRI-EOM) (RR)
Table 1 Common Fax Communication Commands Definition Post-message commands for a complete page: from the transmitter to the receiver Appropriate Responses (PPR) MCF (RNR) PIP PIN (CRP)
Negotiating capabilities from a manual (NSC) (CIG) DTC receiver or an auto answer terminal (TSI) DCS (NSF) (CSI) DIS (CRP) (TSI) (NSS) (PWD) (SEP) (CIG) DTC (PWD) (SUB) (TSI) DCS (TSI) DCS (NSF) (CSI) DIS (CRP) (TSI) (NSS) CFR FTT (NSC) (CIG) DTC (NSF) (CSI) DIS (CRP) (CTR) (CRP) (ERR) (RNR) (CRP)
Ask for the status of the receiver: from (RNR) the transmitter to the receiver (ERR) MCF PIP PIN (CRP) Phase E command None
Fax Transmission Report The Transmission Report provides transmission status and activity information about each Fax transmission. Generation of this report is optional and is in an Error Only state by default. Use the menus: System -> Job Defaults Setup -> Fax Defaults Setup -> Fax Send Setup to change the Error Only default. Also by default, for the 8860MFP, the Transmission Report includes a reduced image of the document scanned for faxing. Result codes appear in the Results box of the Job Details section at the bottom of the page. The results format is <code><speed>. Where code is one of the codes listed in Table 2. Speed is the transmission baud rate (i.e. 9600). Typically, the results are CP<speed> for a completed Fax. Fax failures (FA) may omit the speed if the system was unable to start the connection. The job termination results (FA, TU, TS) count as errors for the purpose of printing a Transmission Report. Table 2 Fax Result Codes Code Definition FA TU TS CP Fax Failed Terminated by user Completed Description The system was unable to connect to the Remote Station. The transmission was canceled by the user. The system was able to deliver the Fax.
(NSC) (CIG) DTC Mode setting from calling terminal (PWD) (SEP) (CIG) DTC This is a poll operation (TSI) DCS Mode setting from manual transmitter (TSI) (NSS) or automatic receiver. (PWD) (SUB) (TSI) DCS
CTC (EOR-NULL)
Mode setting from the transmitter to the receiver. Indicates the next block transmission from the transmitter to the receiver.
Indicate the next message transmis(ERR) sion from the transmitter to the receiver (RNR) PIN (CRP)
In addition to the Results codes, the Job Details section includes Mode and Job Type codes. Definitions of all these codes appears on each report. MCF RTP RTN PIP PIN (CRP) (PPR) MCF (RNR) (CRP)
(PPS-NULL)
Post-message command for a partial page: from the transmitter to the receiver
Diagnostics
Fax Troubleshooting
09/2007 6-46
Initial Actions
Check that Fax is enabled and configured properly for the local phone line. Check the target Fax number. If the number is in memory, is it saved correctly? Call the target Fax number from a desk phone and confirm a Fax tone response. Check Fax cord condition and connections between the system and Fax line.
2.
Primary Causes
The Fax configuration for the line type is set to Tone dialing when the line is a Pulse type, or the number is being dialed faster than the exchange can process it. NOTE: Dial Delay is intended for use when the line is too noisy to reliably detect a dial tone. When in use, Dial Delay ignores any line noise, such as a busy signal, and dials the number after the specified delay interval.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 1 Remote Fax Does Not Ring Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Change the configuration to the correct line type. Check the remote Fax number. Replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5). Replace the Electronics Module (REP 5.0.5). Select a different access point and retest the connection.
Test the Fax line dialing type using a Go to Step 2. phone connected to the same line. Is the Fax configured correctly for the line type? Test the remote Fax connection. Does the remote Fax machine ring when called with the phone on the same line? Check dialing activity using the system speaker. Does the system Fax dial? Test the Fax on a local machine. Send a test Fax to a local machine. Does the local machine ring? Go to Step 3.
Go to Step 4.
Go to Step 5.
Insert a dialing pause following the exter- Complete. nal access number that precedes the Fax number on many office phone systems. Use the Pause button to insert a pause (represented by a comma) in the fax number. Does the remote machine ring?
09/2007 6-47
Diagnostics
Initial Actions
Check that Fax is enabled and configured properly for the local phone line. Check the target Fax number. If the number is in memory, is it saved correctly? Call the target Fax number from a desk phone and confirm a Fax tone response. Check Fax cord condition and connections between the system and Fax line.
Initial Actions
Check that Fax is enabled and configured properly for the local phone line. Check that the phone line supports Fax protocols. Check Fax cord condition and connections between the system and Fax line.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 1 Remote Fax Answers then Fails Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Change the configuration to the correct line type. Reduce the transmission speed until the connection is reliable.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 1 Fax Does Not Answer Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Print an Activity Report. Do incoming calls appear on the report? Yes Go to Step 2. No Change configuration settings that could impede inbound calls. Connect the system to a different access point.
Print a Protocol Report. Go to Step 2. Is there a communication failure indicated (V.34-PH2 or PH3)? Reduce the Starting Speed to G3 (14.4 Complete. kbps) and retest.The system uses Super G3 (33.6 kbps) by default. Some phone lines and older Fax machines do not support this speed. Does the transmission complete?
Test the incoming line using a phone. Does the phone ring? Test the Fax from a local machine. Send a test Fax from a local machine. Does the system answer?
Go to Step 3.
Check the line qual- Replace the Elecity. tronics Module (REP 5.0.5).
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-48
Initial Actions
Check that Fax is enabled and configured properly for the local phone line. Check that the phone line supports Fax protocols. Check Fax cord condition and connections between the system and Fax line. Disable Secure Receive and Junk Fax Prevention during testing.
Primary Causes
This is usually a line quality problem. An improperly filtered DSL line could also cause transmission errors.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 1 Fax Does Not Answer Troubleshooting Procedure Step Questions or Actions 1 Yes No Change the configuration to the correct line type. Reduce the transmission speed until the connection is reliable.
Print a Protocol Report. Go to Step 2. Is there a communication failure indicated after a CSI/DIS, DCS/TCF, or after (V.34PH2 or PH3)? Reduce the Starting Speed to G3 (14.4 Complete. kbps) and retest.The system uses Super G3 (33.6 kbps) by default. Some phone lines and older Fax machines do not support this speed. Does the transmission complete? Test the Fax from a local machine. Send a test Fax from a local machine. Does the system answer? Check the line.
Figure 1 Printhead Checklist Page 1 Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual Diagnostics
09/2007 6-49
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-50
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8.
9.
10. The Printhead is homed to the print position for printing. 11. A Cleaning page is printed at this time, if a purge was performed. 12. A Start page is printed (if enabled). 13. The Control Panel displays a message that the system is initializing and then Ready. 14. The print engine is initialized and is ready to print.
Figure 4 Printhead Checklist Page 4 NOTE: An Adobe PDF version of this checklist is included on the EDOC CD. Print and complete this checklist as part of the Printhead replacement process.
09/2007 6-51
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
09/2007 6-52
7 Wiring Data
How to use the Plug/Jack Location List .......................................................................... Plug/Jack Locations ........................................................................................................ Wire Routing ................................................................................................................... Wiring Diagrams.............................................................................................................. 7-3 7-4 7-10 7-14
09/2007 7-1
Wiring Data
Wiring Data
09/2007 7-2
Table 1 Plug / Jack Location List Coordinates Remarks Connects the Drum Fan to the Right Side Harness. Connects the Drum Encoder to the Right Side Harness. Connects the Process Motor to the Right Side Harness. Connects the Printhead Wiper Clutch to the I/O Board. Connects the Front Door Interlock to the Exit Module Harness. Connects the X-Axis Motor to the Right Side Harness. Connects the No Paper Sensor to the I/O Board. Connects the Paper Height Sensor to the I/O Board. Connects the Electronics Module to the Printhead. Connects the Control Panel to the Exit Cover Interlock Connects the Drum Heater to the Relay Board. Connects the Preheater Lift Solenoid to the Left Side Harness. Connects the Tray 2 Lift Motor to the Left Side Harness. Connects the Optional Feeder to the Left Side Harness. Connects the Media Drive Motor to the Left Side Harness. Connects the Electronics Module Fan to the Left Side Harness. Connects the Head Tilt Solenoid to the Left Side Harness. Connects the Relay Board to the Electronics Module. Connects the Purge Pump to the Left Side Harness. Connects the Relay Board to the Electronics Module. Connects the Tray 2 Pick Clutch to the Left Side Harness. Connects the Wave Amplifier to the Printhead. Connects the Tray 1 Pick Solenoid to the Left Side Harness Connects the Strip Solenoid to the I/O Board. Connects the Deskew Clutch to the Left Side Harness. No Connection on the I/O Board. Connects the Elevator Position Sensor, Scanner Detect Sensor, Speaker, and Elevator Motor to the Exit Module Harness. Connects the Elevator Position Sensor to the Elevator Motor Harness Interconnects two branches of the Exit Module harness. Connects the Exit Roller Motor to the Exit Module Harness. Connects the Exit Elevator Motor to the Exit Module Harness. Connects the I/O Board to the Preheater, Tray 2 Sensors, and Relay Board. Connects the Elevator Position Sensor to the Front Exit Module Harness.
09/2007 7-3
Wiring Data
Table 1 Plug / Jack Location List P/J 410 411 600 600 610 650 680 840 860 860 870 910 CN1 CN2 CN4 CN5 Map Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 9 Figure 9 Figure 3 Figure 9 Figure 9 Figure 9 Coordinates Remarks F-103 G-104 B-108 C-108 E-109 H-105 E-107 G-106 Connects the Speaker to the Exit Module Harness. Connects the Exit Door Interlock to the Exit Module Harness. Connects the Control Panel to the I/O Board Connects the Paper Size Switch to the I/O Board. Connects the I/O Board to the Front Door/Tray 1 Assy. Connects Front Door/Tray 1 to the I/O Board. Connects the I/O Board to the Exit Module. Connects the I/O Board to the Electronics Module. Connects the Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate to the I/O Board. Connects the Preheater Board to the I/O Board Connects the Drum Temp Sensor to the I/O Board. Connects the Ink Loader Sensors to the I/O Board. Connects the Exit Module Control Board to the Scanner Power Supply. Connects the Exit Module Control Board to the Exit Module sensors. Connects the Exit Module Control Board to the Exit Module motors. Connects the Scanner Power Supply Fan to the Exit Module Control Board. Connects the right Output Tray Full Sensor to the Exit Module harness. Connects the left Output Tray Full Sensor to the Exit Module harness. Connects the Scanner Detect Sensor to the Exit Module Harness.
Plug/Jack Locations
Figure 12 G-107
Figure 11 G-103 Figure 9 Figure 9 Figure 7 Figure 7 Figure 7 Figure 7 G-106 C-109 G-107 A-106 D-108 A-107 E-102 G-103 F-102
Wiring Data
Plug/Jack Locations
09/2007 7-4
09/2007 7-5
Wiring Data
Plug/Jack Locations
Wiring Data
Plug/Jack Locations
09/2007 7-6
09/2007 7-7
Wiring Data
Plug/Jack Locations
Wiring Data
Plug/Jack Locations
09/2007 7-8
09/2007 7-9
Wiring Data
Plug/Jack Locations
Wire Routing
Wiring Data
09/2007 7-10
09/2007 7-11
Wiring Data
Wire Routing
Wiring Data
Wire Routing
09/2007 7-12
09/2007 7-13
Wiring Data
Wire Routing
Wiring Diagrams
Wiring Data
Wiring Diagrams
09/2007 7-14
09/2007 7-15
Wiring Data
Wiring Diagrams
Wiring Data
Wiring Diagrams
09/2007 7-16
09/2007 7-17
Wiring Data
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 10 Right Side Harness / I/O Control Figure 9 Electronics Module Power
Wiring Data
Wiring Diagrams
09/2007 7-18
09/2007 7-19
Wiring Data
Wiring Diagrams
Wiring Data
Wiring Diagrams
09/2007 7-20
8 Theory of Operation
System Overview ............................................................................................................ Image Input Terminal ...................................................................................................... System Electronics.......................................................................................................... Image Output Terminal ................................................................................................... 8-3 8-3 8-6 8-8
09/2007 8-1
Theory of Operation
Theory of Operation
09/2007 8-2
System Overview
The Phaser 8860 in either the printer (8860) or multifunction (8860MFP) version uses a Printhead and new ink formulation to produce color or black and white output. With the exception of the DADF, Scanner, Exit Module, Ink Loader, covers, and some electronics, the two models are essentialy the same. For this overview, the 8860MFP is divided into two main components: Image Input Terminal (IIT - Document Feeder/Scanner) and Image Output Terminal (IOT Print Engine). IOT descriptions also apply to the 8860.
Figure 1 Phaser 8860MFP Model This section describes these major assemblies and subassemblies: Image Input Terminal (IIT) DADF and paper path The Scanner Assembly with Control Panel Electronics Module Scanner Power Supply Exit Module Control Board Paper Path Sensing Drive Image Process Exit Theory of Operation Figure 1 Major Components of the DADF and Scanner
System Electronics
09/2007 8-3
Media Sensor
Staged This sensor, located within the DADF scanhead, detects whether media has been fed into the DADF to a predetermined (staged) point. When the scanner detects this point, it starts collecting data from the Charge Coupled Device (CCD).
DADF Cover This optical sensor detects the status of the DADF access cover. When Open Sensor the cover is open, DADF operation is inhibited; given sufficient time, an error message appears on the Control Panel display instructing the user to close the access cover. Pick Roller and The pick roller is the first of several feed rollers. It is designed to work with Separator Pad the separator pad to ensure that only one sheet of media is fed at a time. Feed and Rollers Idler Three additional feed rollers in the DADF are responsible for media transport through the media path. They include associated idler rollers to maintain proper media tension. This ensures proper imaging while providing the minimal chance for damage to the original document(s). A stepper motor is housed in the DADF to drive the pick and feed rollers, and moves the calibration shutter into position. The connection is through a toothed belt and gear drive.
Drive Motor
DADF Scanhead The DADF utilizes a stationary scanhead containing the imaging CCD. and Lamp This scanhead is only for scanning the second side of a duplex original. The lamp is a Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp (CCFL). The CCFL is powered through a chopper board. It is supplied with a variable DC input (Up to +24 VDC) and generates +600 VDC to +900 VDC depending on the supply voltage. DADF Connector An electrical connector on the rear of the DADF connects to the rear of the flatbed portion of the IIT. The DADF communicates with the Scanner and the IOT. The image information is also passed to the Scanner and then sent to the IOT. There is no direct communication between the DADF and IOT. DADF Hinges Mechanical connection between the DADF and the Scanner consists of a set of hinges. These hinges allow for the DADF to lift from the platen glass to facilitate copying. The hinges are designed to lock when the IIT is opened for adding consumables or removing media jams. In order to unlock the hinges, the IIT must be closed.
CVT Window
IIT Connector
Control Panel
Theory of Operation
09/2007 8-4
Automatic calibration uses built in targets. The target for the flatbed is on the back of the diverter strip; the target for the DADF is located on the back of a moveable flap, internal to the DADF. The calibration is automatic at power-up, when coming out of energy star mode, and at a predetermined schedule based on the length of time the lamps have been on continuously. Automatic DADF Calibration Calibration for the DADF is performed at initial power-up and as required with normal usage of the DADF. The steps are the same for both conditions. 1. 2. 3. The lamps turn on. The calibration strip moves back slightly from the home position, to confirm the home position, then extends into the image path. The calibration strip holds this position until the Charge Coupled Device (CCD) image reaches a specified luminescence value and is stable.This time varies depending on the starting conditions of the lamp. Once the color stabilizes, the strip retracts back to its home position.
5. 6.
Scanhead moves toward platen glass to confirm motion control. Scanhead moves back to the home position under the CVT window.
Manual Calibration Manual calibration is a maintenance procedure accessed through the Control Panel. Scanner calibration requires the calibration sheet provided with a replacement Scanner Assembly. It is designed to ensure the DADF and scan heads are aligned to the system (motion control), the scan heads are aligned to one another (duplex scanning alignment), and that certain white, black and gray scale calibrations are performed. This calibration is performed: At the factory during initial system setup. Whenever the document feeder or scanner assembly, or both, are replaced. If troubleshooting determines that the calibration has drifted or that the calibration data has been erased from the system (ESD event).
4.
Figure 2 DADF Calibration Strip Automatic Scanner Calibration 1. 2. 3. 4. Lamps turn on. The scanhead drives toward the automatic calibration target to ensure that the head lock is released. Scanhead moves back to the home position flag, out, and back in to confirm operation. Scanhead moves under the calibration target until the CCD achieves a predetermined image quality and stability. Theory of Operation
09/2007 8-5
System Electronics
The Phaser 8860MFP has two controller boards: the main board, contained in the Electronics Module, and the Exit Module Control Board. For both models, the main board controls all image processing by way of an integrated daughter board. The main board also controls network functionality, PS and PCL interpretation, memory, job management, device management interfaces and a host of other services. The Exit Module Control Board, exclusive to the 8860MFP, provides low level motor control for the Exit Module components. The 8860MFP also contains a Scanner Power Supply located next to the Exit Module Control Board on the Backframe (see Figure 1). This supplies power to the Scanner, DADF, and the Exit Module motors. For more information, or block diagrams showing the interaction between the system electronics, see the Wiring section of the manual. NOTE: Although the Control Panel is part of the Scanner Assemby on the 886MFP, it receives power from the Electronics Module power supply.
The Electronics Module enables or disables the Scanner Power Supply using the power supply enable line for functions such as Intelligent Ready and standby functions. The Control Panel receives power from the power supply contained in the Electronics Module.
Electronics Module
The Electronics Module includes the main board, image processing board, power control board, and the power supply. The Electronics Module is replaced as one assembly and is unique for each model. The imaging process is a "three way" communication between the Electronics Module, Printhead, and Wave Amplifier. Imaging data is received from either the print or scan function and is processed through the imaging path portion of the main board. This data then is split into two paths. One of these paths is through the power control board to the Wave Amplifier. This data controls the operation of the Wave Amplifier with regard to the drive algorithm to use for driving the jet stacks (discussed later in the Printhead section). The second path is through a ribbon cable from the main board to the Printhead control board (located on the underside of the Printhead). These two signals are interpreted by the Printhead to produce the image on the drum. Electronics Module Components Main Board The main board controls the operation of all the mechanical and electrical systems in the IOT. Through the power control and I/O boards, signals are passed to the different gear trains, heater controls, and drive motors and signals are received from sensors for proper operation of the IOT. The main board provides support for Ethernet and USB 2.0 external I/O interfaces.
Image Processor The image processor board provides the interface between the main Board board and the scanner. The image processor board includes a complete color image path, taking raw 24-bit RGB scanner data and creating print ready CMYK or B&W binary data, 8-bit RGB data, or 8-bit grayscale data. NVRAM NVRAM, located on the main board, stores Control Panel defaults, network settings, IOT calibration data, copy counts, usage profile data, and the system serial number, which is also referred to as the engine tracking number (ETN). When the Electronics Module is replaced, transfer the NVRAM to the replacement Electronics Module. Two PC3200 compatible DDR SDRAM memory connectors are available supporting a minimum of 256 MB and maximum of 1 GB.
Theory of Operation
System Electronics
09/2007 8-6
Electronics Module Components Hard Drive A Hard Drive IDE cable is plugged into the main board from the hard drive board. A separate power cable must be plugged into the power control board from the Hard Drive board. The Flash Drive is a solid state equivalent of the Hard Drive, but with much smaller capacity (256 MB). The Configuration Card is a thumbnail-sized device that plugs into the side of the Electronics Module. This device stores system information and interacts with NVRAM. When replacing the Electronics Module, transfer the Configuration Card to the replacement Electronics Module.
Power Board
Control The power control board distributes drive voltages to operate the systems various motors, solenoids and clutches. The power control board also provides the interface that returns information from the system's sensors to the main board. The sensors are used to track mechanical and thermal functions, such as the position and temperature of the Printhead. The power control board also generates regulated +/- 12 V and 5 V from unregulated +/-15 V power. There are no field adjustments necessary on the power supply. In general, the power supply has two main, yet interrelated sections: the AC section and the DC section. In the AC section, power is routed to 10 triacs. Under the main board logic control, the triacs supply AC power to the 10 heaters in the system. Two fuses provide current protection to the triacs. Fuse F2 and F3 protect the power supply from, most often, a shorted triac caused by a defective heater. If the F2 or F3 fuses blow, it is best to replace the Electronics Module (and, of course, the defective heater), rather than the fuse. Otherwise uncontrolled, with the fuse replaced but the triac shorted, AC power may be applied to the heater. Each time the main board turns on a triac to activate a heater, it is turned on for only a fraction of a second. The mainboard must constantly readdress each heater it wants to remain on. This means if the print engine firmware should fail, the heaters automatically shut off. The system is also protected by thermal fuses. A thermal fuse opens in the unlikely event of a runaway heater following a hardware failure. The drum and the Preheater thermal fuses are located on the Preheater. Additional thermal fuses are located on the Printhead and on the ink melting elements. The DC power supply generates + 3.3 V, +/- 15 V, and +/- 50 V. These voltages are used directly or regulated to other voltage values as needed by various circuits in the system. The power control board regulates +/15 V to +/- 12 and other voltages. The main board also has regulators providing + 5 V, + 2.5 V, and + 1.8 V. The power supply outputs + 3.3 V in power saver mode. Fuse F1 provides protection for the switching power supply in the DC section.
Power Supply
09/2007 8-7
Theory of Operation
System Electronics
NOTE: The Electronics Module is also a subsystem of the IOT but was discussed previously. For more information on the Electronics Module, see Electronics Module.
Except for the Exit, Electronic, and Ink Loader modules, the 8860 and 8860MFP use the same print engine. Subsystem descriptions apply to both models.
Figure 1 IOT Subassemblies IOT Subassembly Functions Process Drive An open loop system that transmits torque to two main camshaft assemblies. One camshaft assembly controls the Transfix Roller loading, and the other controls the drum maintenance system and Printhead tilt system. The Media Drive assembly controls each roller in the media transport system. The Media Drive assembly includes a drive motor, gearbox, solenoid, and three clutches. The Media Drive motor also drives the Wiper assembly and the headlock mechanism through a gear train and solenoid on the Exit Module.
Media Drive
Theory of Operation
09/2007 8-8
IOT Subassembly Functions Ink Loader Printhead Melts the ink as required by the Printhead. The melted ink drops into the ink reservoirs of the Printhead underneath the ink loader. Interfaces with the electronics of the system to jet ink onto the drum surface to create an image. The Printhead includes 1236 interleaved jets (309 of each primary color) to provide the ability to electronically turn off a weak or missing jet to restore image quality.
Drum Mainte- Creates a thin intermediate liquid transfer surface, a layer of silicone oil, nance System on the surface of the drum prior to printing. The oil keeps the ink from sticking to the drums surface and facilitates its transfer to the sheet of paper or transparency film. Preheat Deskew and Serves to ensure that the print media (paper, envelope, or transparency film) aligns properly to the drum and that the media is sufficiently warms to facilitate transfer of the image from the drum to the media.
Drum and Trans- The image is first printed as a mirror image on the rotating drum. A fix System sheet of warmed media feeds from the Preheater and passes between the drum and the Transfix Roller. The process gear train then loads the transfix system and presses the paper to the drum to adhere the image as the drum spins in the transfix direction. Exit Module For the 8860MFP, the Exit Module receives control signals from the Exit Module Control Board, which contains its own firmware. The 8860MFP Exit Module incorporates an elevator mechanism that lifts and redirects the media forward. For the 8860, the Exit Module is controlled by the Electronics Module. Media is directly to the Output Tray on the Ink Loader. Uses an air hose and Purge Pump to pressurize the Printhead to purge debris or air bubbles that may be obstructing the Printhead jets. Figure 2 Tray 1 Pick Mechanism
Purge System
Paper Pick for Trays 2 ~ 4 NOTE: Trays 3 and 4 are optional 525-Sheet Feeders. To pick a sheet of paper, the media path drive starts the process. The pick clutch engages to turn the pick roller and the nudger roller. The nudge roller advances one sheet of paper forward into the pick nip. The retard roller prevents two sheets from advancing. The sheet of paper continues past the take away rollers until the sheet completes the deskew process. When using the optional 525-sheet feeder, paper is pre-picked from the tray and staged in the paper path while the system is printing previous pages. The deskew process uses a reverse/buckle deskew for all three paper paths. The paper is first driven against non-rotating rollers. The rollers reverse during simplex, causing a buckle in the paper. This ensures that the leading edge is straight to prevent skewing. The deskew rollers will not reverse during duplex printing.
09/2007 8-9
Theory of Operation
Figure 3 Paper Path Sensors 2-Sided (Duplex) Printing When duplex printing, the exit rollers pull the paper to a predetermined location. In this position, the trailing edge of the paper is adjacent to the exit rollers. The exit rollers then pull the paper back into the duplex path. From a non-rotating deskew nip, the print continues through the paper Preheater and transfix system to the exit tray in the same manner as a single-sided print.
Theory of Operation
09/2007 8-10
Sensors
The system contains sensors of various types that perform a variety of functions. One group of sensors track the progress of the paper along the paper path, and detects if a paper jam occurs. Other sensors detect the presence of the Ink Sticks, stop system activity if a door is open (interlock), detect the presence and size of media, and monitor system temperatures.
Two types of photo sensors are used, photo-reflective and photo-receptive. Photo-reflective sensors use light reflected back from an object to detect its presence. Photo-receptive sensors use an actuator or the object itself to block the light path to detect an object or condition. Photoreflective sensors have the light emitter and light receiver aligned on a single surface. Output of the photo-receptor is High when light is being reflected back and Low when it isnt. Photoreceptive sensors consist of a LED in one arm of a U-shaped holder, and a photo-transistor in the other arm. When the sensing area is vacant, nothing is between the arms of the sensor, light falls on the photo-receptor sending the signal High. If the light is interrupted, the phototransistor goes Low. Microswitches are used primarily as paper size sensors and cover interlocks. They are in a normally open state, and close when actuated. A bank of microswitches is used to detect paper size in the universal trays. Microswitches also employ hooks or catches for retention in the bracket or frame. Temperature Sensors (Thermistors) have a known value of resistance whose value varies with temperature. Used primarily in the Drum and Printhead for temperature sensing.
Figure 5 Sensor Locations Sensor Types The types of sensors used vary with function. In general, there are three types in use: Photo Sensors Microswitches Temperature Sensors
09/2007 8-11
Theory of Operation
System Drive
Process Drive The Process Drive is an open loop system that transmits torque to two camshaft assemblies. One camshaft assembly, Transfix Camshaft, controls Transfix Roller loading. The second camshaft, Drum Maintenance Camshaft, controls the Drum Maintenance and Printhead tilt systems. A DC servo motor powers the Process Drive to rotate the gears to specific positions during the printing process. The Process Drive is able to actuate each camshaft system independently or concurrently through the use of the swing gear in the gear train. Operation of the transfix and drum maintenance system is controlled by the rotational direction of the motor. When the process motor rotates in one direction, the swing gear engages the lower gears. When the motor rotates in the opposite direction, the upper gears are engaged. Since the system is open loop, special attention to the home position of the Process Drive gears and the mating camshaft gears is critical. The Process Drive gearbox is mechanically keyed upon installation via gear orientations. These gear orientations allow the subsystems to self home during operation. If either the gearbox or cam gears is out of home during installation, the system does not function properly.
Theory of Operation
09/2007 8-12
Media Drive Assembly The Media Drive assembly controls each roller in the paper transport system. A gear train located behind the motor connects it to the exit rollers, which are built into the Exit Module. Gear trains located within the Media Drive Assembly, along with two clutches and a solenoid, allow the motor to control the Pick, Take Away, Duplex, and deskew rollers. A unique swing gear allows the Pick and Take Away roller to rotate in the same direction regardless of the direction the motor is rotating.
WARNING
Keep your fingers away from the Y-Axis drum rotation drive system; it uses a closedloop servo drive system and is inherently dangerous; the motor speeds up if it senses the drive system slowing down, and fingers caught in the belts and gears can be severely injured. Drum Preparation To prepare the Drum, a thin coating of silicone oil is applied to the surface of the Drum. First the Drum is rotated. Next, the oil roller and blade of the Drum Maintenance Kit are raised into contact with the Drum. To accomplish this, the Process Drive rotates the Drum Maintenance Camshaft lifting the oil and wiper blade to the Drum. The cams on the ends of the camshaft push against followers on each side of the Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate, forcing the oil roller and blade against the Drum. The Drum is rotated against the oil saturated roller.
Figure 8 Media Drive Assembly Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual 09/2007 8-13 Theory of Operation
If the ink level sensors inside the Printhead detect that the Printhead has run out of ink, but the ink low/out sensors are not activated, the Control Panel reports an Ink Jam error.
Figure 9 Drum Oiling Printing To print, the Drum starts rotating at a speed dependent upon print resolution. As the Drum reaches the correct speed, the jets begin to fire to deposit the image on the oiled portion of the Drum. As the jets fire, the Printhead moves from right to left to complete the image on the Drum. When printing, the system performs a six-jet interlace, in which each jet lays down a particular number of pixel columns, depending on the print resolution. Each jet lays down one pixel column for each Drum rotation, which varies from eight to 16 rotations, depending on the print resolution. Interlacing averages out the variability between jets by interlacing each jet with other jets. In some test prints, the Printhead moves to the right and lays down 309 parallel bands of ink. Each band is composed of 15 pixel columns of dots from an individual jet. Jet substitution allows a better performing jet to be used in place of a missing or poorly performing neighboring jet. When jet substitution is used, the Printhead makes a second right-toleft movement to deposit the pixel columns of the substituted jets. See Jet Substitution Mode. Ink Loader The Ink Loader consists of four parallel channels with an ink melting element at the end of each channel. Ink sticks, one color loaded in each channel, are pressed by coil spring pressure into the melting elements. As ink is required by the Printhead, the appropriate colors melting element is activated and the end of the ink stick is melted. The melted ink drips into the ink reservoirs of the Printhead underneath. Sensors in the Ink Loader alert the customer to install more ink sticks before the current sticks are completely consumed. Printhead The Printhead is the heart of the system, spanning nearly the length of the drum. Using its 1236 jet nozzles (309 jets for each primary color), with a horizontal motion of slightly less than 5 mm (0.2 inches), the Printhead can print the entire image on the rotating drum. The Printhead provides one size ink drop that it uses for all print-quality modes.
Theory of Operation
09/2007 8-14
Figure 12 Printhead Detail Figure 11 Printhead Components The Printheads jet stack is fabricated from a stack of chemically etched steel plates which are brazed together to form the jet array. Channels formed by the stacked plates route ink past the 1236 individual, piezo-electric crystal-driven diaphragms, which force the ink in droplets out the 1236 corresponding nozzles. Looking at the Printhead face, the nozzles are arranged in 12 rows, in color order KYKYKYCMCMCM, where K = black, Y = yellow, C = cyan, and M = magenta. During the printing process, the Printhead would only have to travel approximately 14 pixels horizontally to provide complete coverage. However, the Printhead travels much further, depending on print resolution, to interlace each jet with the output of neighboring jets. The jet array is bonded to a cast aluminum ink reservoir. The reservoir supplies the molten ink to the jet array. Heaters in the reservoir and the jet array keep the ink in a liquid state.
09/2007 8-15
Theory of Operation
The head tilt cam tilts the head into the basic four positions listed above. The cam has five special features and associated functions: 1. The cam is combined with a missing tooth gear (Head Tilt Gear) that allows the cam to be inactive in the print position. This frees the Process Drive to perform other system operations. The cam has a latching feature to unlatch and latch the missing tooth gear to engage the Printhead tilt drive train. The cam profile has a standby dwell (the portion of the cam that has a constant radius). This holds the Printhead back in the standby position The cam profile has a wipe dwell that holds the Printhead back in the wipe position. The cam profile increases the power consumption at a specific phase of rotation. This allows the software to identify a power consumption footprint to alert the system when the head is locked in error.
2. 3. 4. 5.
The Printhead is tilted away from the drum and locked for shipping. When the Printhead is locked in the shipping position there are three key restraining elements: 1. The Printhead is restrained from rotating from the shipping position by pins extending from both ends of the Printhead into a pocket. These pockets are defined by dampening pads that limit motion to the back and polycarbonate locks that pivot into the lock position and limit forward motion toward the drum. The locks are held in the lock position by the wiper carriage, and are spring-loaded to normally be unlocked. The Printhead is restrained at the X-Axis shafts by the right and left Printhead Restraints that limit motion at both ends of the Printhead. The Printhead is limited to the nominal motion of 1.7 mm in the X-Axis (left / right side motion when the Printhead is back and locked) by the right lock and the left home stop on the left side frame.
Figure 13 Printhead X-Axis Drive 2. X-Axis or lateral movement of the Printhead is accomplished using a stepper motor driving a fine-thread screw system. The Printhead, mounted to the X-Axis shaft, moves laterally across the surface of the drum. To find the Printhead home position, the X-Axis system drives the Printhead in an open-loop. The Printhead is driven against the left frame for a few seconds, and then reversed a set distance. A tension spring links to the Printheads left shaft, and provides a preloaded tension so the Printhead moves smoothly. Printhead Tilt The Printhead is able to rotate into four basic positions: 1. Printhead lock / ship position (19.5 degrees): the Printhead restraint pins are resting against the right and left locks. In this position, the Printhead tilt arm/ follower is free of the tilt cam, and the head is secured for shipping. Wipe position (12 degrees): the Printhead tilt arm/follower is engaged with the tilt cam, and the head overload spring contact is engaged with the overload spring-plate to provide the correct force for the wiper. Standby position (20.9 degrees): allows the wiper to clear the Printhead in order to be in the start wipe Printhead position, and also allow the Printhead locks to pivot and lock or unlock the Printhead. In this position, the Printhead tilt arm/ follower is engaged at the standby position of the tilt cam. Print position (0 degrees): the Printhead is forward and resting against the right and left head-to-drum buttons. The head-to-drum buttons define the space between the jet stack and the drum. 3.
2.
3.
4.
Theory of Operation
09/2007 8-16
The latching mechanism is actuated by a small movement of the wiper coupled with the Head Tilt Solenoid. The action of the solenoid ensures that the head-tilt gear engages the tilt drive gear. Through a follower gear, the compound gear drives the tilt cam gear clockwise. A cam follower, mounted on the lower end of the tilt arm, follows the rotating tilt cam gear and tilts the Printhead. After one revolution of the tilt gear, the latching mechanism is pulled back into position by the Head Tilt Solenoid. As viewed from the left side of the system, when the arrows do not align, the tilt gear is engaged.
Figure 14 Printhead Tilt Drive In the print position (0 degrees), the Printhead is forward and resting against the right and left head-to-drum buttons. The head-to-drum buttons define the space between the jet stack and the drum. When the Process Drive is activated, it drives the Drum Maintenance Camshaft to engage the tilt gear train. The tilt cam tilts the Printhead into the print position. The cam is combined with a missing tooth gear that allows the cam to be inactive in the print position, freeing the Process Drive to perform other system operations. The cam has a latching mechanism to unlatch and latch the Head Tilt Gear to engage the Printhead tilt drive train. The cams latching mechanism also holds the gear in place. A leaf spring applies constant pressure to engage the gear when the latching mechanism is released. The arm of the latching mechanism is inside the frame; the rest is visible, outside the frame. Arrows located on the latching mechanism and on the frame indicate when the Printhead is in print position. When the arrows on the latching mechanism and frame align, the Printhead is in the print position and the tilt gear disengages from the Process Drive. The Head Tilt Solenoid is actuated and deactuated when the Head Tilt Gear rotates to the respective engaged and disengaged positions.
Figure 15 Printhead Tilt Detail To accommodate Printhead maintenance, the Printhead can be tilted back away from the drum. This creates room for the Wiper to be moved into position in front of the Printhead faceplate. The Process Drive drives the gears to the tilt compound gear train. The drum maintenance camshaft drives the gear train to tilt the Printhead. Drum Assembly The Drum Assembly and transfix system form the key portion of the system where imaging takes place. The Drum Assembly and transfix system are separate, but interrelated. This section discusses the Drum Assembly. The next section goes into more detail on the transfix system.
09/2007 8-17
Theory of Operation
In operation, the image to be printed is formmed on the rotating drum. The Preheater heats the media to prepare it for image transfer. The heated media is then passed between the Drum (now rotating much more slowly) and the Transfix Roller. Under the pressure between the Drum and the Transfix Roller, the image is transferred. An encoder disk and sensor on the left end of the Drum monitors the Drums speed and position.
NOTE: The Drum rotates CW for Transfix, CCW for Maintenance and Printing.
Figure 16 Drum Assembly The drum heater heats the surface of the Drum for imaging. The drum heater does not rotate. The heater is inside the drum, and is controlled by the Drum Heater Relay Board. The drum heater consists of two resistive heater coils that operate in series for 220 V and in parallel for 110 V operation. The series/parallel operation is controlled by the Drum Heater Relay Board. A temperature sensor in contact with the drum surface monitors the drum temperature. The main board interprets the sensors signal and turns on the drum heater and Drum Fan to heat the drum, or turns on the Drum Fan alone to cool the drum. The Drum is driven by the Y-Axis Motor through a single reduction belt drive, the motor rotates the Drum at a high speed for imaging and a constant low speed for image transfer. The Y-Axis assembly uses an active tension system to allow the pulley to float while the spring adjusts the tension.
WARNING
Keep your fingers away from the Drum drive; it uses a closed-loop servo drive system. Since the motor speeds up if it senses the Drum slowing down, fingers caught in the belts and gears can be severely injured. Transfix System The Transfix Roller, Figure 18, applies pressure to the back side of the media as it moves between the Transfix Roller and Drum. This pressure transfers the image from the Drum to the media. A set of springs in the Transfix Load Module, acting through the Transfix Load Arms, evenly apply pressure across the Transfix Roller as it rests against the Drum. The pressure must be uniform across the length of the Transfix Roller to avoid paper wrinkles and light spots on the prints. After the Transfix Roller is engaged, the Drum rotates to advance the media during the transfix process. The Drum continues to advance the media until the Transfix Roller is disengaged. The Transfix Roller is lifted and lowered by the action of the Process Drive. All gears move to rotate the Transfix Camshaft to bring the Transfix Roller into contact with the Drum. The gears reverse to rotate the Transfix Roller back to its original position, except when printing from Tray 1 or on envelopes. The transfix load springs and double lever arms increase the force when the camshaft is engaged.
Theory of Operation
09/2007 8-18
CAUTION Never attempt to adjust or increase the transfix pressure of the springs.
Figure 18 Transfix System Drum Maintenance System The drum maintenance system creates a thin layer of silicone oil on the surface of the Drum prior to printing. The oil keeps the ink from sticking to the Drums surface and facilitates image transfer to the media. The oil is contained in a porous foam roller in the Drum Maintenance Kit. Prior to each print, the Process Drive rotaes the Drum Maintenance Camshaft to move the Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate forcing the oil roller and wiper blade against the Drum. The wiper blade produces a smooth and even oil film across the Drums surface. The excess oil drains back into the Drum Maintenance Kit through a felt filter for reuse. As the Drum completes one rotation, the Process Drive rotates the cam lowering the oil roller and wiper blade away from the Drum. The Drum has a floating deadband area. The deadband is a narrow section of the Drums surface containing excess oil and other debris cleared by the drum maintenance wiper blade. An oil bar is left on the Drum surface in this deadband area as the blade is lowered from the drum. The deadband areas location is controlled to keep it outside of the Drums image area. An EEPROM, built-in to the Drum Maintenance Kit, stores the number of oiling cycles performed by the drum maintenance system to track consumable life. At startup, four oiling cycles are performed to condition the Drum. Purge System
Proper Printhead operation is dependant on the purge system shown in Figure 20. The purge system uses air pressure to purge any debris or air bubbles that may be obstructing the Printhead jets. Waste ink expelled during a purge cycle is removed from the Printhead by the Wiper Blade and collected in the Waste Tray. Following the purge, a cleaning page is printed.
09/2007 8-19
Theory of Operation
WARNING
When servicing the system be careful of the purge system as it passes the Printhead. If a damaged wiper blade of the purge system catches on the Printhead, it could propel hot liquid ink upward into your face.
Figure 20 Purge System Printhead Maintenenace To perform a Printhead maintenance cycle, the Printhead is first tilted away from the Drum to allow the Wiper Blade to pass by. The Wiper Blade is then raised in front of the Printhead. The media path drive governs wiper movement when it engages the Head Maintenance Clutch on the exit shaft of the system. The Purge Pump applies pressure to the ink reservoir for approximately 2.5 seconds. Valves in the reservoir seal when pressure is applied. The pressurization ejects a small amount of ink from the jets. Following the pressure purge, the Printhead tilts into the Wiper Blade and the wipe cycle begins. The pump runs again with the solenoid for approximately 30 seconds, creating a neutral balance between pressure and ink. The Wiper Blade lowers and wipes excess ink from the jets into the Waste Tray. A proper purge covers the length of the Waste Tray with a single layer of ink about 20 mm wide. The level of the ink in the reservoir is kept constant. If the purge tubing is pinched, the Printhead may not purge properly. In addition, because the purge tubing also acts as a vent to atmosphere when not purging, a more serious failure can occur if the ink overfills and the reservoir cannot vent properly.
Theory of Operation
09/2007 8-20
Transfix and Exiting Transfixing and exiting consists of four major functions: 1. 2. 3. 4. Stage the paper for rendezvous with the image on the drum and Transfix Roller nip. Load the Transfix Roller and engage the Stripper Blade. Strip the paper from the drum. Exit the paper from the system, or exit the paper for 2-sided printing.
Tripping the Preheater Exit Sensor sets up a series of events that occur on a predetermined schedule. Media is transported through the Preheater to thermally prepare it for transfixing. The preheat sensor detects the medias presence and registers the leading edge with the image on the Drum. Based on the timing information from the Preheater Exit Sensor, the Transfix Roller lowers onto the leading edge in the nip. Timing is based on the sensor ensuring the image is perfectly aligned for transfix to the paper. The Process Drive lifts and lowers the Transfix Roller. At the point which the Transfix Roller is loaded, but before the Drum begins to rotate, the Stripper Solenoid is engaged. The stripper blade is actuated by energizing the Stripper Solenoid. The solenoid mounts on the Upper Inner Duplex Guide and activates the strip solenoid lever. The lever rotates the Stripper Carriage until it hits the transfix ground pins, causing the paper stripper blade to momentarily drop onto the deadband of the drum. This action catches the leading edge and guides the media to the rotating Exit Rollers. After the Transfix Roller is engaged, the Drum rotates to advance the media and transfix the image. All gears move to rotate the Transfix Camshaft to bring the Transfix Roller into contact with the drum. The Transfix Roller nip applies the load necessary to transfer the image. Once the image is transferred, the Drum stops rotating and the Transfix Roller is lifted by the Process Drive.
Figure 22 Transfix Components Initial Issue Phaser 8860/8860MFP Service Manual 09/2007 8-21 Theory of Operation
After the leading edge of the media is beyond the stripper blade, the Stripper Solenoid is deenergized. Once the solenoid is de-energized, the solenoid return spring provides force to move the solenoid plunger out of the solenoid coil which rotates the Stripper Carriage back to its ready position. The deskew rollers are not driven during transfixing. The Media Drive rotates the Exit Rollers in the correct direction to pull the paper out with the deskew clutch deenergized. As the Process Drive lifts the Transfix Roller, the Exit Rollers transport the media into the Exit Module. The media is then fed out over the ink loader until the trailing edge is at the nip of the Exit Module roller. In the 8860MFP, the Elevator Motor raises the carriage assembly to the top position, where it then stops and the Elevator motor drives the Exit Module rollers until the media exits ending the print cycle.
Theory of Operation
09/2007 8-22
Transfix and Print Speeds Table 1 Transfix and Print Speeds Characteristic Peak transfix speed (Simplex) Peak transfix speed (Duplex) Peak Transfix Speed (Legal) Peak transfix speed (Tray 1) First Sheet Transfix Speed Peak Transfix Speed 20 ips 5 ips 20 ips 13 ips 7 ips Set Point, Paper Media (inches per second) Fast Color Standard 17 ips 5 ips 17 ips 7 ips 7 ips 5 ips Table 2 Approximate Print Speeds Tray (Source) / Resolution Tray 1 Fast Color (300 x 300 dpi) Standard (300 x 450 dpi) Enhanced (563 x 400 dpi) High Res/Photo (525 x 2400) PCL 600 x 300 Mode / PCL 600 x 600 Mode Tray 2 ~ 4 Fast Color (300 x 300 dpi) Standard (300 x 450 dpi) Enhanced (563 x 400 dpi) High Res/Photo (525 x 2400) PCL 600 x 300 Mode / PCL 600 x 600 Mode 24 ppm 18 ppm 12 ppm 7 ppm 13 ppm / 6 ppm 15 spm 13 spm 11 spm 7 spm 10 pages per minute (ppm) 9 ppm 8 ppm 6 ppm 6.5 ppm / 3 ppm 10 sides per minute (spm) 9 spm 4 spm 3 spm Simplex, A4 Paper Auto Duplex, A4 Paper Enhanced 13 ips 5 ips 13 ips 7 ips 7 ips Hi-Res/Photo 7 ips 5 ips 7 ips 7 ips 7 ips
Personality parameters are a subset of network configuration parameters, which are populated to the configuration card over time as the system is configured by the customer. The personality parameters are copied, or shadowed, from the main board's NVRAM chip to the configuration card during the normal operation of the system. When the configuration card is inserted into a new system, the personality parameters on the configuration card are written into the NVRAM chip of the new system. When a system is powered on, if it contains the configuration card of another system, the personality parameters are automatically copied to the NVRAM chip. If the configuration card is removed, the system reboots as a non-networking, nonduplexing model. Table 3 Parameters Stored in the Configuration Card NCL Subject N/A version not NCL parameter NEST NEST NEST NEST IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP DNS Resolver DNS Resolver DNS Resolver NBNS (WINS) NBNS (WINS) NBNS (WINS) NBNS (WINS) Ethernet HTTP HTTP HTTP HTTP HTTP HTTP NCL Item version (of the layout of personality parameters) Base Printer Name SysAdmin Contact Printer Location Asset Identifier Host Name Domain Name Network Mask IP Address Default Gateway BOOTP/DHCP DDNS SMTP Server IP Source TCP/IP AutoIP DHCP Vendor Class ID Primary Name Server IP Address Secondary Name Server IP Address Multicast DNS Enable WINS Note Type Primary WINS Server Seconday WINS Server Speed On Information Forwarding SMTP Server Automatic Legal Settings Admin_Password Admin_Username Size (bytes) 4 48 128 (truncated from 256) 128 (truncated from 256) 128 (truncated from 256) 64 256 4 4 4 1 1 256 1 1 1 48 4 4 1 1 1 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 11 11
09/2007 8-23
Theory of Operation
Table 3 Parameters Stored in the Configuration Card NCL Subject HTTP HTTP HTTP HTTP Notify IPP IPP IPP FTP Security AppSocket AppSocket LPR LPR FTP FTP IPP IPP MIME MIME EtherTalk EtherTalk PSERVER PSERVER PSERVER_IPX NCL Item KeyUser_Password KeyUser_Username Admin_HostAccessList KeyUser_HostAccessList On Authentication Scheme IPP Username IPP Password Login Password Print Hosts On Enabled On Enabled On Enabled On Enabled On Enabled On Enabled On Enabled Enabled Size (bytes) 11 11 256 256 1 1 11 11 33 256 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Notes: 1. Parallel and USB, On and Enabled parameters have not been identified as personality parameters. They are not tied to networking. 2. NCL = Nest Configuration Library
Theory of Operation
09/2007 8-24